Home

MAN-EAM-0003 - Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware

1. Stream ID Data content SCO Windowed minimum for component S20 Windowed minimum for horizontal resultant S30 Windowed minimum for 3 dimensional resultant SCP Windowed PGA for component S2P Windowed PGA for horizontal resultant S3P Windowed PGA for 3 dimensional resultant SCQ Windowed maximum for component S2Q Windowed maximum for horizontal resultant S3Q Windowed maximum for 3 dimensional resultant SCR Windowed RMS for component S2R Windowed RMS for horizontal resultant S3R Windowed RMS for 3 dimensional resultant SCS Windowed SI for component S2S Windowed SI for horizontal resultant S38 Windowed SI for 3 dimensional resultant SCT Windowed average for component S2T Windowed average for horizontal resultant S3T Windowed average for 3 dimensional resultant 8 1 1 5 Causal filtering Digitiser Configuration The normal decimation chain on a CMG DM24 uses acausal finite impulse response FIR filters Acausal FIR filters have significantly higher latency than causal FIR filters The last filter in a decimation chain has the biggest effect on the overall latency of the chain The CMG DM24 offers a single causal FIR filter which can be connected at any point in the decimation chain to provide a lower latency output To enable the causal FIR filter ensure that the CMG DM24 is in normal operation mode not strong motion mode and then click Enable causal filtering Scroll to the bottom of the page and click
2. az law oO gt fe fF Ft he i i Digitiser fic ii id USB ane Ane eee a Ann mE mm Input Signal onditioner GPS gi y a bE EE eb et es es se ns se se en sn sn se a hs T gt lt 3 OQ C aD ab Q Breakout An Bana 4 Input Signal Conditioner i i 15 4 Instruments with integrated CMG EAMs G ralp Systems digital instruments such as the CMG 5TDE shown below have an integrated digitiser and EAM The internal connections between the CMG DM24 modules and the CMG EAM module are identical to those in an Cylindrical Digitiser as described in section 15 1 on page 250 MAN EAM 0003 259 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Technical operation For more information on the ports see section 2 5 on page 14 The connector pinouts are the same as those for the Cylindrical Digitiser and are are given in 16 5 on page 273 and listed in the table below Section 16 5 11 on page 283 Section 16 5 4 on page 276 Section 16 5 8 on page 280 Section 16 5 6 on page 278 Section 16 5 10 on page 282 MAN EAM 0003 260 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Appendices 16 Appendices 16 1 Appendix A Setting the System Identity Hostname The system identity is pre set at the factory to contain a device type identifier and the system s serial number such as EAM2010 It should not be nec
3. Clicking the button on any row will open a new row In the same way rows can be deleted by clicking the corresponding button Channels which do not appear in the mapping table will be transmitted unmapped in Semi automatic mode and not transmitted in Manual mode 12 3 1 4 Heartbeats tab EarthWorm has a heart beats facility which can be used for monitoring connections Heartbeats are generated both by the client and by the server A heartbeat is a small packet sent at regular intervals so that an alert can be raised if a heartbeat packet does not arrive within a configurable time Heartbeat packets contain configurable messages The following fields can be configured Export heartbeat timeout This parameter controls how often this sender instance will broadcast heartbeat packets to the EarthWorm installation Export heartbeat message This field allows the user to set the message contained within outgoing heartbeat packets Import heartbeat timeout This parameter controls how often this sender instance should expect to receive heartbeat packets from the EarthWorm installation Import heartbeat message This field allows the user to set the message that this sender instance should expect to see within incoming heartbeat packets MAN EAM 0003 190 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Transmitting Data Heartbeat debug messages If this check box is ticked debugging messa
4. Any other output indicates a problem with your firewall consult your network administrator or see the trouble shooting advice in section 16 4 on page 270 Once the network has been checked you can proceed to upgrade the unit by following the instructions in section 5 4 on page 61 5 3 2 Upgrading from a local mirror Setting up a mirror involves three steps 1 Downloading the mirror content 2 Setting up a local rsync server 3 Configuring the client acquisition devices to use the new server MAN EAM 0003 55 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Platinum Firmware Upgrades 5 3 2 1 Downloading the mirror content The mirror can occupy a significant amount of disk space depending on which architectures you need to support See the sections for each architecture below for the current space requirements You should pick a file system with ample space in which to store your own copy In order to simplify the download we recommend that you start with an empty directory each time If you wish to make a fresh copy after a new firmware release it is much easier to create this in an empty directory than to update an existing mirror You can keep multiple simultaneous versions of the firmware if you wish and tell each acquisition device which version to use when upgrading The server on which you create the mirror should have access to the Internet during the download step but does not need Internet a
5. Exit minicom reset modem If macros changed and were not saved you will have a chance to do so Paste a file Reads a file and sends its contents just as if it would be typed in Pop up the help screen 269 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Appendices 16 4 Appendix D Troubleshooting This section of the manual comprises answers to the questions most frequently asked of our support team 16 4 1 Upgrades report Temporary failure in name resolution If an attempt to run the upgrade process produces error messages like rsync getaddrinfo rsync guralp com 873 Temporary failure in name resolution rsync error error in socket IO code 10 at clientserver c 122 receiver 3 0 2 the Domain Name Service DNS client is misconfigured If you are running DHCP this may be a problem with your DHCP server not providing a nameserver or providing an incorrect one If you are using static addressing check and correct the 16 4 2 Upgrades report Network is unreachable If an attempt to run the upgrade process produces error messages like rsync failed to connect to rsync guralp com Network is unreachable 101 rsync error error in socket IO code 10 at clientserver c 122 receiver 3 0 2 the network routing is misconfigured If you are running DHCP this may be a problem with your DHCP server not providing a default route or providing an incorrect one If you are using stat
6. MAN EAM 0003 178 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Transmitting Data 12 2 can be populated with a path name which will then be used for dedicated logging If left blank logging occurs via the standard Linux syslog facility to var log messages Log level The drop down menu controls the level of detail present in log messages whether to syslog or to a dedicated log file Not all of the standard syslog logging levels are available The menu offers a choice in order of decreasing detail of e Debugging information e Informational messages Important notices Warnings Audit log size The GCF Scream sender keeps its own audit log independent from the system log The contents of this log are available using the GCF Audit Log viewer facility as described in section 14 4 5 on page 241 The amount of data retained is controlled by the drop down menu where the choices are 64Kib small e 256Kib medium 2MiB large e 16MiB huge GDI multiplexer In most configurations all data for all transmitters is taken from a single multiplexor as described in section 6 1 on page 65 For more complex configurations it is possible to configure multiple multiplexers each with their own set of input and output services In these situations the drop down menu can be used to select a multiplexer instance with which to associate this transmitter The menu offers a list of currently configur
7. The gdi base and gdi record programs are designed to be stateless so that the data on the mass storage device are always consistent This means the system is tolerant of power interruptions and of the mass storage device being removed without notice Any number of input modules can be configured to acquire data in any supported format from any source simultaneously These modules convert their data and pass it to the multiplexor Data can be acquired in any of the following formats from multiple sources BRP via serial lines Scream via Ethernet or ppp GDI link via Ethernet or ppp CD1 1 The architecture has been designed to support the addition of extra formats simply by adding input modules Please contact G ralp Systems if you have requirements which are currently unsupported Any number of output modules can be configured to send data in any supported format to any destination The following data formats are supported e GCF output via serial port or TCP stream GCF output via Scream TCP or UDP SEEDlink CD1 1 GDI G ralp Data Interconnect GDI link e WIN format output e QSCD Quick Seismic Characteristic Data designed by KIGAM output e GSMS G ralp Seismic Monitoring System output In the default factory configuration the acquisition module is configured to receive serial GCF input on all of its serial ports except Data Out There is a single chain of data through the multiplexor
8. 2200 BHN G9S 06 22003 BHE Gos UG 2400s BHX Gos Database directory The drop down menu is used to select which gdi2miniseed compressor instance serves as the data source each has its own ring buffer Filename If left blank the extracted data are made available through the web browser s file download facility and will typically be saved to the operator s PC s hard drive details vary between browsers and the exact location can typically be configured by the user If this field is populated with a file name the data will be written to that file on the EAM Any existing file with the same path name will be overwritten This functionality is also available from the command line with the extract miniseed command A usage message is displayed if the command is invoked with a h argument 14 4 5 GCF Audit Log Viewer Detailed information about every GCF packet sent or received are stored on the GSL EAM and can be viewed with the GCF Audit Log Viewer To access the GCF Audit Log Viewer from the web interface select Tools GCF audit log viewer To access the same information from the command line enter the command gcflogview The initial screen displays all GCF data sources and sinks in a table together with some summary information In the example given it can be MAN EAM 0003 241 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Monitoring Operations seen that Ports B and F are inactive Port A was recei
9. 32 for IPV6 Gateway Enter the IP address of the host which serves as the gateway to the specified destination ip route args This field field can be used to modify the invocation of the associated ip route add command in order to e g set the route metric The options that can be set here are mostly highly technical and should rarely be required Please see http linux die net man 8 ip for more information MAN EAM 0003 81 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Networking Configuration 1 3 Virtual network VLAN interfaces Platinum firmware supports the use of Virtual Local Area Networks VLANs to partition network traffic on the same physical subnet Virtual interfaces can be created and assigned to a particular VLAN tag ID and a particular physical interface A full discussion of VLANs is beyond the scope of this document To configure a virtual network interface from the web interface select Configuration Networking Interfaces or Configuration All options Networking The following screen is displayed Networking configuration Select a network interface to configure ethO Primary wired network interface e Create a new VLAN interface wlan Wireless interface wlan0 or a network service e Network Time Protocol NTP daemon e Mail Transfer Agent e mail service To configure a VLAN interface from the command line start gconfig and select Networkin
10. View details settings button produces the following screen Home Control Digital O Details Data Out Line details Data Out power Line ID Data Out I O control Pinlevel Output high on Output only Low output Setto input _ Set output low switch off Set output high switch on Properties voltage Read onl 15 57 Bus Voltage V y current Read only 0 080 Current A y power Read onl 1 24 Power W y low voltage threshold Read write 0 000 0 000 Set Low voltage cut off threshold V cutoff hysteresi ee ee ee ee Read write 0 000 0 000 Set Cut off hysteresis V isles Read only false True if this line is internal to the system Property Current value Change Refresh r Return to front page Generated at 2041 03 09T15 59 242 by ioline cgi 1 0 8 Portions of output copyright 2014 Guralp Systems Ltd The first part of the page duplicates the information shown on the main screen The remainder of the page provides a more detailed report Note The user must be in the Peripheral control gpio group to make any changes All other users will only be able to view the settings Low voltage cut off threshold It is possible to protect attached devices from under voltages by setting a value If the monitored voltage falls below this value it is automatically turned
11. gdi link rs receives samples in the native protocol of the Platinum software suite called Guralp Data Interconnect This is a lowlatency realtime transmission protocol which sends encoded state of health with samples Servers Enable at Channel filter Startup Remote Peer name Remote host ii Max sample rate Channel names No filler Mmcenve eventing Ho filter receive averting Ho filter recanve averting For each client you should set e Peer name Should match the server name configured in the client receiver at the remote end of the link Remote host The DNS name or IP address of the GDI link server MAN EAM 0003 209 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Building Networks Remote service port The default is 1566 but if you have configured a different port on the GDI link client you should enter the same port here e Enable at startup Controls whether the service is enabled at start up e Channel filtering The drop down has three options No filtering By sample rate or By channel names e Max sample rate Enter the maximum sample rate you with to receive from the client e Channel name Enter the channels names for the data streams you wish to receive Clicking the button on any row will open a new row In the same way rows can be deleted by clicking the corresponding button 13 1 2 2 Configurable parameters in expert mode The follow
12. 5 1 1 Systems installed in remote locationSs eesssesesseesssseessssrresserressrrrsseresssersees 51 5 1 2 Procedures for upgrades spanning build 10 000 ss ssssesssesssessserseresersserssees 52 5 2 Determining the current firmware level ssnnsessssesesssseerssssrersssssrerssssrrrssserssersses 52 Bigot UPEN PO Clic a EE E TOTA 53 5x0 Up erading via the A CEPI ee a A AE meen ae 54 5 3 1 Upradine Om A local MINOT anenee E tennant 55 5 3 2 Upgrading irom a USB Storage d viCesssernncna n a Cowal eiereness 59 MAN EAM 0003 3 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Doro WO USB MGUN MMS Proble Seniorii i nns ARE E EAER 61 Dk Uporide TYDES raon e E TE EO IT O EN 62 540 Standard WP OTAC Ea E E ae 62 541 Uperade atid restore delou liS enaren E A 63 5 4 2 Upgrade and force factory defaults ccccccssessccccceesseeceeeensesecseseseuseeeeeens 64 Do Uporade NOS rioei recycles atcha es nate eo Sasa oa luni eg ete Naw aanloae Sain coe TO ened Saale 64 6 Data Handing encina nE cance owen easier ave A ETEO ook 66 rT OAC ON eaea E E E ae tie sececmnsttnade avast asian aaaataay 66 6 2 COME CUTING vdr HISE nesa aN ENE EAA OANA 69 6 2 0 Conngurabple parameters iiini EA E T T E N 69 6 3 USME CONDITE S SOTS aer a O E N 70 7 Networking Cont curanOn isseire ei aa 72 7 1 Configuring physical network interfaces rennir a 72 7 1 0 Configurable parameters in simple MOE cceccccccceseeeceeneee
13. Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Networking Configuration 7 7 2 2 IP The IP addresses and routing section handles the network configuration In active client mode or when connecting to an ISP the remote PPP daemon will set these parameters in which case this section can be left blank Data Out PPP settings Authentication IP addresses and routing This section can be left empty if the remote end of the link performs all the configuration Otherwise some or all options may be supplied If the remote link is also the router you should use the Default route option Local IP address Sets the local IP address Omit if remote end assigns one Remote IP address Sets the remote IP address Generally omitted Local IP address IPv6 Sets the local IP address Omit if remote end assigns one Remote IP address IPv6 Sets the remote IP address Generally omitted Default route CMsancec PPP cdaaman ta nrovicle the cleafault rata If you are using PPP between say two acquisition modules one should be designated the client and the other the server The IP addresses and routing parameters for the client should be left blank and those for the server completed as follows IPv4 networking the Local IP address field should be populated with an IP address from an otherwise unused reserved class C network address range such as 192 168 123 1 with no CIDR postfix and the Remote IP address field should be populate
14. E A Vs ve TA OC yi nite tae oh tapas Gutta oh Sadia netstat eases vaste E Santer AT coins 221 TEL AAC OT WS LAU rora A T E A tue sunn uate eate eens 221 14L SOltware OWING MUM DET iiss coh Aitsstercvestaxsdacane des esenddebiosdvia E NE 222 142 Warming oand error MOM OLS erea a EA EEE 222 14 2 0 Configurable parameters in simple MOdE ccccccceesseesceeeeeeeneeceaeseeseeees 222 14 2 1 Configurable parameters in expert mode ssssessssssrrresssrreresssrerssrrssrrsserss 223 143 The Conto Mem Ui ncara EOT 223 14 3 0 Digital I O power control and anti tamper monitoring eeeessereserrssrees 223 14731 Dieser Sensor Con lerce e a sea yaenedeesuaneaenietacewanee 226 14 3 2 Upgrading digitiser HTINWaATE sonocaor oar ea aE AAE E 232 R DOE A E AEN 236 E S E E CS antes act retest E TE E E T A see 236 1A 3A ATI Sel VICES maana e E E TAT 236 TAA Tools Menisin a E A 237 144 0 CD1 1 10g analyst is ccaderinesiesenncsinencosuses En a E EEEE E EEE 237 144 T Env ronmenl LOSS enei a E A GOT 237 14 4 2 Retrieving environment log data ss ssssenessseerssseerssserssserssrssrrserssrssersees 238 TAA Exacte MINS ELD TeCOrd Sonner A 240 T444 GOP Adil Cog Vie WED creien Ta E T antes E AAA 243 MAN EAM 0003 6 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware 1434 5 GID Chiamnels DIS Day cece tavaicecaasicdeaeteadannscaceteabanuteseetetuesmiasaoamtaneatocamennsancededs 245 14 AG REMOVaDIC CISK sirrien e EA cidade test
15. H E Decimation chain FIR FIR The DM24 uses the calibration information from the InfoBlock see section 8 1 1 3 on page 102 to compute values such as minima maxima averages and two and three dimensional resultants in ground units all of which are contained in the strong motion packets The InfoBlock must be correctly populated for this to work The acquisition system demultiplexes the strong motion packets and generates individual GCF streams for each type of data Because GCF streams can only carry integer values the floating point values from the strong motion packets are each multiplied by 32767 before being packed as GCF data MAN EAM 0003 103 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Digitiser Configuration Strong motion mode requires that the highest tap the one with the fastest sample rate is set to 200 samples per second The 200 sps data are passed through a fast response divide by ten IIR filter in order to produce the low latency 20 sps data which are used for the calculations This 20 sps low latency stream can be enabled for direct output it s stream ID will have the suffix E Strong motion mode can be configured using buttons on the web page If the highest tap is configured for 200 samples per second operation the following is displayed Normal operations mode Enable strong motion operation Enable causal Filtering If the highest tap is not set to 200 samples
16. In Simple server mode the converter opens the serial port and creates a TCP server socket Whenever a client connects to the socket the converter reads raw data from the serial port and writes it to the client and reads raw data from the client and writes it to the serial port The serial port hardware control lines cannot be read or altered in this mode Simple server mode has two relevant options the list of addresses to listen to and an optional list of addresses to filter The server can listen on multiple simultaneous local ports and addresses although only one client can be active at a time The Bind host option is usually left blank If specified it is the name or IP address on which this server socket will listen For example if you specify localhost here then this socket will only listen for incoming connections on the loopback address and not on the external Ethernet port Leave it blank to listen to all addresses The Bind service option must be specified It is the TCP port number 1 65535 or service name such as tcpserial for the socket This can be MAN EAM 0003 98 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Networking Configuration anything you choose although we recommend that you use the names tcpserial tcpseriall tcpserial2 and so on through to tcpserial115 which are pre defined to correspond to port numbers 10002 10003 through to 10017 The mapping from po
17. Set the appropriate Baud rate from the drop down menu Click on the GCF input settings link Port A block recovery protocol settings Disable rewind Disable BRP rewinding for DM24s in adaptive mode etc In simple mode the only option available is to disable BRP rewinding In some modes some digitisers will not allow BRP to rewind to earlier blocks In these modes missed packets will instead be sent at a later time However the log file will accumulate many entries about sending NAKs and giving up These may be avoided by telling the receiver that its digitiser is using one of these modes and that rewinding will not work The log messages are harmless so leave this check box clear if unsure MAN EAM 0003 129 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Receiving Data 10 1 2 Configurable parameters in expert mode The following additional options appear in expert mode Port A block recovery protocol settings Disable rewind Disable BRP rewinding for DM24s in adaptive mode etc Timing from GCF Set system clock from GCF status block timestamps Transmission delay 5 Transmission delay in fractional seconds used for NTP Log file Path to log file Leave blank to use syslog Log level Important notices ia Minimum severity level of messages to record in log Audit log size 256KB medium Debug port TCP port number or ser
18. Simply select the required saved configuration from the list of saved backups and click on the Restore this backup button The following screen will be displayed om Back up current configuration Tf you have previously downloade PER ic meee a upload a copy te this device Restore sytem configuration Choose File Mo file chosen Please confirm that you wish to restore the system s configuration Filename 2013 04 12 1131 eam2243 fish Saved at 2015 04 12T11432 Filename Dati Description Test backup for documentation 2013 04 anj 7 12 1131 eam2243 fish 127 M Restore network settings After the backup is restored the system wall reboot auto 00000000 aij Cancel Restore from backup eam e43 fish llre RESLUTE ITIS DAURI The date and time at which the backup was saved is shown in the example above this is the 12th of April 2013 at 11 43 The file name and description of the backup are also given The Restore network settings check box allows you to choose whether or not to restore the network configuration or not You should select this if for MAN EAM 0003 45 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Platinum Overview example you are configuring a spare unit to replace an existing system that has been damaged You should leave it unselected if for example you are cloning a configuration across an array of systems where each would need their own unique network s
19. Socket Allows specification of the inter process communication socket used by this instance This should not normally be changed Log file It may sometimes be desirable for debugging purposes to separate log messages for this transmitter from the standard system log The text field MAN EAM 0003 68 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Data Handling 6 3 can be populated with a path name which will then be used for dedicated logging If left blank logging occurs via the standard Linux syslog facility to var log messages Log level The drop down menu controls the level of detail present in log messages whether to syslog or to a dedicated log file Not all of the standard syslog logging levels are available The menu offers a choice in order of decreasing detail of e Debugging information e Informational messages Important notices Warnings Metadata directory Allows specification of the directory where this instance stores intermediate information This should not normally be changed Using compressors The two compressors mentioned at the beginning of section 6 on page 65 convert from GDI to GCF and from GDI to miniSEED format They provide channel filtering channel name mapping and data buffering for the gdi record module which writes GCF and miniSEED files to the mass storage device One instance each of gdi2gcf and gdi2miniseed are present in the default configuration Additi
20. available to external USB host devices such as laptop computers The connectors are significantly different from other packages The analogue connectors are grouped at one end of the cylinder and correspond to similarly labelled connectors on a standard CMG DM24 MAN EAM 0003 250 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Technical operation The illustration shows a four channel unit the seven channel unit has an additional connector for sensor B The digital connectors are arranged at the other end of the cylinder For more information on the ports see section 2 50n page 14 The connector pin outs are given in section 14 1 1 on page 218 and listed in the table below Section 16 5 10 on page 282 MAN EAM 0003 251 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Technical operation 15 1 1 Internal Connections Internally the digitiser module and acquisition module are connected using three serial lines The exact connections depend on the synchronisation mode determined by the service running on Port C of the acquisition module In all cases the GCF data output from the digitiser module is connected to Port A of the acquisition module which should be set to GCF in at 38 400 Baud It is currently possible to set the Baud rate of the digitiser s data output port and of the EAM s Port A independently leading to a loss of data communication between the two modules if the two
21. dm24 upgrade PortA will upgrade the firmware of the digitiser attached to Port A of the acquisition module if necessary The latest digitiser firmware for each type of digitiser is included in the Platinum distribution so no Internet connection is necessary Note The currently loaded DSP firmware version is identified from the label that was entered when the firmware was last upgraded Because this label is not checked any text could have been entered which may confuse the upgrade command If this is the case please use the force option described below to over ride the version checking For more advanced uses the following options are available Multiple options can be separated by spaces and the command should always end with a port specifier This can be in the form Port A or PortA or dev ttyS0 the Linux port name trashfram Performs a hard factory reset on a CMG DM24 digitiser Note that the values of all configuration parameters will be lost Some of the following options allow basic reconfiguration following the reset ids sys ser A hard reset will normally erase the system ID and serial number of the digitiser The dm24 upgrade command when invoked with trashfram attempts to discover these values and reinstate them after the reset This option allows you to specify new values for the system ID and serial number to be used instead of the discovered values The argument sys specifies the new System ID t
22. e Port F GCF in 38400 baud To configure a GCF input port from the command line start gconfig and select Serial ports from the top level menu Each port on the system is listed along with its function and line speed Any port can be used for any function with the exception of the console port which is dedicated to the terminal function and the internal ports used for inter module communications in CMG DAS units Select the link for the serial port you wish to configure for GCF input MAN EAM 0003 128 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Receiving Data Note When configuring units without a dedicated console port such as the CMG DCM take care not to lock yourself out of the system by eg configuring all serial ports for non terminal functions before completing network access configuration 10 1 1 Configurable parameters in simple mode The configurable parameters for GCF input ports are contained in a single form in simple mode Port A serial configuration Name PotA Port name Fixed Port function GCF in Inbound GCF data gathering x Function the port currently supports Port speed 230400 Baudrate at which the port operates NMEA output settings i e GCF output settings e PPP network configuration e TCP serial converter settin e Modbus device settings Port Function Select GCF in Inbound GCF data gathering Port speed
23. from the Recording destination drop down menu on the Disk recording menu see section 11 2 on page 138 DCM The DCM is a fully functional Linux based computer system especially designed for handling seismic data It can collect and store data from several sources and if required output it in your preferred format to other locations on your network or on the Internet The CMG DCM receives data from one or more of the following sources e Digitizer connected through a serial link Computer running a Scream server CD1 0 or CD1 1 transmitter optionally Another DCM or AM All the received data are stored in files in the on board Flash memory There are two banks of Flash memory available which are accessible as nandO and nand1 in the Linux file tree Data are normally stored as GCF G ralp Compressed Format files As an option you may be able to configure the DCM to use the miniSEED or sac formats instead In automatic mode when the Flash memory becomes more than 75 full the oldest data files are moved to the DCM s primary hard disk until it is less than MAN EAM 0003 256 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Technical operation 50 full If you prefer you can configure the DCM to write to the hard disk at set intervals Writing to the hard disk is performed robustly so that no data will be lost if a write is aborted This means that you can safely swap hardware in and
24. i e 10 0 0 1 If your network has a DNS domain name service server sometimes called a name server use the y key or on some systems the mouse to move to the Primary DNS server field and enter the address of the name server in standard dotted quad notation i e 10 0 0 5 Note If your network is connected to the Internet but you do not know the name of your DNS server ask your Internet Service Provider for the correct address to use or enter 8 8 8 8 which is a free public DNS server operated by Google Inc Use the ENTER key to confirm your choice and reconfigure the network If you do not wish to make a change use the P4 key to select Cancel and then key ENTER to close the net setup tool and return you to the command prompt MAN EAM 0003 24 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Initial set up 3 2 3 2 Assigning a static IP address using the ip command The ip command is an alternative to net setup You may wish to use it if you want to configure a temporary address without updating the configuration files you cannot use the net setup utility for any reason you are very familiar with the linux command line Log in as normal and then issue the following command eam999 ip addr add 192 168 0 1 24 dev eth0 replacing the example IP address 192 168 0 1 24 in the example above with the required value It must be specified in CIDR format where the actual addres
25. lt Submit gt The gconfig interface can be navigated entirely using the keyboard but if you use xterm or your terminal emulator supports an xterm mode you can use MAN EAM 0003 36 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Platinum Overview your mouse to select menu items input fields and items from drop down menus The scroll wheel is not currently supported so you need to use the keyboard to access second and subsequent pages of multi page forms The gconfig interface displays menus and forms The screen shot above is an example of a menu The following table shows the navigation keys that are available for use with menus Keystroke Used for Cursor to next item Cursor to previous item Or Select item under cursor eo or Move to the next page of a multi page menu SH or Move to the previous page of a multi page menu Go to the home menu or if there already exit gconfig ae The four words enclosed in chevrons at the bottom of screen act as push buttons J lt Quit gt lt Help gt lt Expert lt Subm t They are always present at the bottom of each gconfig screen although they change slightly according to the context To invoke the action associated with any of them move the cursor to it and press In the example all options other than lt ai are disabled and this is indicated by the colour coding If you select an item from a
26. this has the additional benefit of providing a graphical explorer like interface for browsing files on the acquisition module WinSCP can be downloaded for free from http winscp net The screen grab below shows a complete session recorded from a Linux PC The operator connects to a acquisition module powers up the mass storage devices downloads all recorded files powers down the mass storage devices and then disconnects MAN EAM 0003 153 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Recording and Retrieving Data fishafish desktop tmps ssh root S1 187 130 165 dcem105 rdisk mount Connected to server Powering up disks and requesting details Select disk to mount lt Cancel gt Requesting disk with UUID SOAD F5p8 The disk 1s mounted at media SOAD F508 A new bash session has been created When you exit from this bash session which you can do with exit or Ctrl D the disk will be unmounted It will remain mounted and thus powered up until you exit Then you will be returned to your original shell dcm105 Z suspend ssh 1 Stopped ssh root S51 187 130 165 fisha fish desktop tmp scp r root S1 187 130 165 media S0AD F5D8 2009336T 10302 gct 100 1886KB 314 3KB s 00 06 2009336T 11002 gct 100 l B1KB 356 2KB s 00 05 2009336T 11302 qct 100 1910KB 382 O0KB s 60 05 2009336T 12007 gct 100 1928KB 385 6KB s5 00 05 2009336T 12307 gct 100 1957KB 326 2KB
27. you can proceed to download files by entering commands like eam2010 sx path to file and then immediately typing followed by RI to activate minicom s receive file function Select xmodem from the resulting menu and then enter a name for the downloaded file The transfer should start immediately with a progress indicator displayed TAIE Fish Fish desktop Docum File Edit View Search Terminal Tabs Help The disk is mounted at media 50AD F5D8 A new bash session has been created When you exit from this bash session which you can do with exit xmodem download Press CTRL C to quit remain you wiL rx ready to receive 2009336710302 gcf Bytes received 154112 BPS 5978 eamZ01 Transfer complete READY press any key to continue HyperTerminal users should flush the buffers mount the mass storage device type the command eam2010 sx path to file and then immediately select Receive File from the Transfer menu A dialogue asking for the destination directory name is followed by another asking for the destination file name MAN EAM 0003 159 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Recording and Retrieving Data amp EAM HyperTerminal Elle Edit wiew Call Transfer Help Requesting disk with UULD 69BR 6282 lhe disk 1s mounted at media H new bash session has been created When you exit from this bash session which you can do with ex
28. 10 000 and ab0OVe s ssssssesessssrerssssree 11 23 Pla Gnun s ysl EN Sao r hia aan urdarnilea nee cansenuawnee ein Come Rea mandation 12 2 3 0 Embedded Acquisition MOdule cccccccccccsssssccceeeescccsesesccsseseesseeseseeeeeeesens 12 2 3 1 Data Communications Module ssseeessersesseeressrresserresssrresseresssreesseresserserss 12 2 352 Network Appliance Mod le rmenaenien anie e AAEE 12 27039 Data ACQUISILION Systems nrs aiae E E OT E O ON 12 23A Integrated 10SEC eea a N N O gous iaaa Ragan aks 13 24 Typical Acguisitgn Modules rrsan OETA 13 De FOT a E A A A TE O a 14 DoF POr AB Gurania aaa aa a AT A a es 14 ZA S ENDOR PON Saranan na R N A O E E N 14 202 ECNO eaa a E E easontonds 14 eE o E rn T A N N A NA N AENA AA A A E A E EA 15 2d UO Dasein a T eon a aa mene hae CAMA ma ta Suaeuelaaians 15 Zs 5 WT Osa Blaha tae E ETEN TO E EEN O asa A eae MA eas 15 250 POWT Dataa n a aa Veceneaiataeie 15 DO POWE Ressa E E N A ER 15 AO isa esters ia 0 0 Ulersi 0 orem ee ema a A A T A OTON OE 15 2 6 0 Autonomous remote Cata lOGger ccccecccccsssscccccsecccsseecceusesesecsecesseeseueeaeees 15 2G TLOLOCO I COU CELT ria oe T vacate eta eaten ce wadnianmiaeaeanaaaes 16 Z O22 WaT AY GONCCMUFALOL aiseaasecesdueicearntigeiad aeaatenine Ronin lociaw diana Minera A 16 ZOS PPP IN GLW Ori mernin Tan r a T na Row a as 17 2 OA Resilient INGLW ORK IDO errana i whan E E ae aos kali tng ated deren ous tose cases 17 2 655 DTD
29. 12 d 2 digit day of month 01 31 j 3 digit ordinal day day of year 001 366 H 2 digit hour 00 23 M 2 digit minute 00 59 I 4 digit ISO year number for use with ISO week W 2 digit ISO week number 01 52 w 1 digit ISO day of week 1 Monday 7 Sunday Forward slashes will cause subdirectories to be created If using recycle mode be sure to start the file name template with the date in either year month day year ordinal or year week weekday format so that the sorting algorithm can identify the oldest files correctly Flush threshold Files from var spool to rdisk are copied to the mass storage device when their total size exceeds the threshold size defined in Mebibytes in this field Enable syslog recording If this checkbox is ticked the system log var log messages is also copied to the mass storage device This option consumes very little space and can be a significant help when debugging any problems 11 2 1 5 NFS Platinum systems can write to external network accessible NFS storage systems such as NAS systems This option is primarily intended for use with CMG NAMs and CMG NAM64s in data centre applications GSL can supply suitable NAS systems for this purpose To use external NFS storage select Remote NFS mount in the Storage device drop down menu of the Storage device tab see section 11 2 1 1 on page 140 and complete the fields in the NFS tab a
30. 8mR etc as determined by interrogating the digitiser In either case the program uses a lexical sort to determine which file contains the most recent firmware buid The argument file should be the path to a valid firmware image dsp file This option specifies an alternative source file for DM24 Mk3 DSP firmware If not specified the upgrade command will look in usr share firmware CMG DM24mk3 for files with names of the form dm24mk3 dsp img and use the most recent version that it finds It uses a lexical sort to determine which is the most recent The argument file should be the path to a valid DM24 DSP firmware image auto baud Scan the digitiser output to attempt to determine the Baud rate and adjust the configuration of the relevant serial port to match verbose Show most of the digitiser dialogue while the command is running debug This option turns on the production of some additional debugging information The dm24 upgrade command is the fastest and simplest way to upgrade the firmware on GSL manutfactured digitisers MAN EAM 0003 233 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Monitoring Operations 14 3 4 Rebooting The Reboot item on the Control menu allows acquisition modules to be rebooted CMG NAMs can be both rebooted and powered off To reboot from the command line prompt use the reboot command eam999 reboot 14 3 5 Services To control the service from
31. A signal ground Optional SENSOR B auxiliary Optional SENSOR B calibration channel ve Mux channel M6 Optional SENSOR B signal ground Optional SENSOR B Mux channel M3 Optional SENSOR B Mux channel M4 Optional SENSOR B Mux channel M7 Digital ground pole gt F not connected SENSOR A Mux channel MB SENSOR A Mux channel MC T SENSOR A Mux channel MF not connected Optional SENSOR B Mux U SENSOR A Mux channel MD channel M5 SENSOR A auxiliary calibration channel ve SENSOR A auxiliary calibration channel ve V SENSOR A Mux channel ME e sfe 2 px fol Wiring details for the compatible socket _14 19S as seen from the cable end i e during assembly MAN EAM 0003 285 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Appendices 16 5 14 DM24S24EAM Sensor Inputs This is a standard 32 pin mil spec plug conforming to MIL DTL 26482 formerly MIL C 26482 A typical part number is O02E 16 32P although the initial 02E varies with manufacturer Suitable mating connectors have part numbers like _16 32S and are available from Amphenol ITT Cannon and other manufacturers funcion Pia Function Vertical mass position Te N S mass position b Powero0V Busy indicator LED E W mass position d Channel 3 ve o no connec Pe crams Calibration signal g Channel4 ve A Z OTIO i Dio mi 5 B H D B s
32. BRP network server and a GCF Scream network server All of these take their input from one or more GCF compressors These servers are described in the next section 12 1 1 The GCF compressor The GCF compressor gdi2gcf converts from GDI to GCF format It provides channel filtering channel name mapping and data buffering for the gdi record service which writes GCF files to mass storage device One instance of gdi2gcf is present in the default configuration Additional instances may be created as required This will be necessary if you have different channel filtering requirements for say recording and transmitting or if you need different transmitters to send different sets of channels The configuration page for every transmitter has in the Expert mode options a drop down menu which allows the operator to select which compressor instance to use for its input The gdi record configuration page has a similar facility Instances of the GCF compressor are dependant services meaning that they do not need to be and should not be configured to start automatically when MAN EAM 0003 162 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Transmitting Data the system boots They will be started whenever a client service such as a connected transmitter starts To configure a GCF compressor on the acquisition module select Configuration Services GCF Or Configuration All Options System servic
33. Help Simple Submit Kill command The command which the watchdog should use to attempt to restart the PPP daemon if it is determined that the link has failed Force kill count If the watchdog determines that the Kill command is not working after this number of attempts it will try the Force kill command Force kill command The command which the watchdog should use to attempt to restart the PPP daemon if it is determined that the link has failed and several attempts to restart it with the Kill command have failed to have a positive effect Reboot command The command to use to reboot the system if repeated Force kills have been ineffective Force reboot command The command to use to reboot the system if the normal reboot command fails to shut down the system MAN EAM 0003 96 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Networking Configuration 1 8 Configuring TCP to serial converters The acquisition module can act as a TCP to serial converter effectively transporting data between one or more of its serial ports and a TCP connection There are two different modes of operation as detailed below Any number of serial ports can be configured as TCP converters as long as the TCP port numbers do not clash In Simple server mode the acquisition module listens for incoming TCP connections and should it receive one that matches its configured rules accepts the connection and begins copying data betw
34. Hostname box and set the port number that the remote machine will listen on in the Service box Max delay The WIN sender will buffer up data before it is sent so that outgoing packets have a second s worth of data from all channels If no data are received from some channels within a certain time limit the data from other channels will be transmitted anyway This limit is specified by the value in the field and defaults to five seconds Early transmit size If a packet in construction exceeds the size specified the packet will also be sent early UTC Offset The WIN Format uses the local time in order to time stamp packets The offset of the local time zone from UTC used in the GCF data is specified in the box MAN EAM 0003 200 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Transmitting Data Channels WIN format transmitter Channels oo chanel namo wain shannl number lt F w oo A LW 105E2 Clicking the button on any row will open a new row In the same way rows can be deleted by clicking the corresponding button 12 6 2 Configurable parameters in expert mode The following additional configuration parameters are available by clicking the Expert button at the bottom of the form and selecting the Advanced tab WIN format transmitter Advanced options Log file Path to log file Leave blank to use syslog Log level Important notices Minimum se
35. Log level The drop down menu controls the level of detail present in log messages whether to syslog or to a dedicated log file Not all of the standard syslog logging levels are available The menu offers a choice in order of decreasing detail of e Debugging information e Informational messages Important notices Warnings Audit log size The GCF BRP sender keeps its own audit log independent from the system log The contents of this log are available using the GCF Audit Log viewer facility as described in section 14 4 5 on page 241 The amount of data retained is controlled by the drop down menu where the choices are 64Kib small e 256Kib medium 2MiB large e 16MiB huge MAN EAM 0003 173 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Transmitting Data Debug port It is possible to copy all incoming data verbatim to a network port which can be specified in the text field This is an advanced debugging technique which is beyond the scope of this manual GDI multiplexer In most configurations all data for all transmitters is taken from a single multiplexor as described in section 6 1 on page 65 For more complex configurations it is possible to configure multiple multiplexers each with their own set of input and output services In these situations the drop down menu can be used to select a multiplexer instance with which to associate this transmitter The menu offers a list of
36. Platinum Firmware Building Networks 13 13 1 Building Networks GDI link The GDI link protocol provides the most efficient means of exchanging data between two systems running Platinum firmware GDI is the native data format of the central data multiplexer the gdi base module and GDI link allows highly efficient low latency data exchange between two such multiplexers without the overhead of any additional protocol conversion State of health information is attached to samples before transmission GDI links have transmitters which send data and receivers which receive it These terms do not refer to the direction of initiation of the network connection a receiver can initiate a connection to a transmitter and vice versa A single GDI link receiver can accept data from multiple transmitters and a single transmitter can send data to multiple receivers allowing maximum flexibility in configuring seismic networks A Caution The GDI link transmitter generates back fill files which it does not delete If ignored these files will accumulate and eventually fill the file system It is necessary to configure a directory cleaner to remove these files See section 13 1 1 3 on page 207 for details 13 1 1 The GDI link transmitter To configure a GDI link transmitter via the web interface select Configuration Services GDI Or Configuration All options System services GDI Now select gdi link tx GDI link t
37. Refresh display Submit changes amp Reboot digitiser The first check box enables the transmission of Unified Status Packets Unified Status Packets are a machine readable representation of the data carried in the normal human readable status streams and allow programs such as Scream to access complete and consistent state of health information regardless of any status stream customisations MAN EAM 0003 113 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Digitiser Configuration 8 2 The second check box allows the one time re synchronisation of the digitiser to the EAM s system clock The third toggles display of the underlying dialogue with the digitiser as described at the beginning of this section Note that as with all web interfaces options selected on this screen will not take effect until the page is submitted An extra button at the bottom of this page Refresh display causes the system to re query the digitiser for its current configuration settings allowing the refreshing of the web page display with up to date information Configuring digitisers from the command line Platinum provides two command line tools to allow configuration and control of digitisers and the instruments connected to them adc command see section 8 2 1 on page 114 and data terminal see section 8 2 2 on page 114 The adc command feature allows specific instrument control commands to be sent to digitisers while dat
38. Some networks need manual configuration normally referred to as static addressing others use the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP to allow a DHCP server to automatically assign network addresses If no DHCP server is present many systems will fall back to a randomly generated link local address known by Microsoft as Automatic Private IP Addressing or APIPA Before you can access an acquisition modules over a network you must set for static addresses or discover if you use DHCP its IP address Note If you are setting up a unit in the laboratory for subsequent deployment in the field you can set up the final network address using the web interface and over ride it with a temporary static network address using the command line The web configured address will take effect when the unit is next rebooted 3 2 1 DHCP assigned addresses Acquisition modules are supplied configured for DHCP If your network uses DHCP to assign addresses simply connect the acquisition module to the network and wait a few minutes for the process to complete Your network administrator should then be able to tell you the address that has been MAN EAM 0003 20 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Initial set up assigned to the acquisition module If your module has an LCD status display CMG NAMs and some integrated instruments the assigned address will be displayed in it The LCD display shows lots
39. This should never be changed Note that in this mode the external GPS socket is disconnected it cannot be used as an output for additional digitisers 15 1 2 Variable Gain Inputs The cylindrical digitiser is fitted with a programmable gain differential input amplifier which can be set to x1 X2 X4 X8 X16 X32 or X64 gain operation The gain can be set individually for each input channel either using the Platinum web configuration interface or directly from the digitiser s command line In either case the digitiser module must be re booted before the new value will take effect The gain settings are reported in the status stream at boot time ADC 1 Version 760303 ADC o s nulls 0 0 0 0 4 channel system MAN EAM 0003 253 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Technical operation Gain Control E8 Gain settings Ch 0 1 Ch 1 1 Ch 2 1 Ch 3 1 In the example above all channels are set to unity gain channel O is the vertical component and 1 2 and 3 are the North South East West and auxiliary calibration channels respectively On a seven channel digitiser channels 4 5 and 6 are the vertical North South and East West components for the second instrument If variable gain aware firmware v106b42 and above is loaded on a digitiser without variable gain hardware the text No gain stage will appear in this position in the boot status stream The selected gain setting is encoded into the GC
40. a CMG EAM or CMG DCM is used with an external GPS synchronised GSL digitiser the digitiser can emit special synchronisation packets called RTSTATUS packets These are transmitted along the same link as the data packets Platinum units can use these as a time source for NTP see section 7 4 on page 84 for more details GPS Receiver GPS Port Digitiser Clock RTSTATUS Packets DATA Packets Note RTSTATUS packets are available with MkII DM24 units Earlier units such as MklIIs are not capable of generating these packets With MklIIs however the system clock can be set from GCF status block timestamps by enabling this feature on the expert settings of the appropriate serial port GCF input page MAN EAM 0003 121 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Digitiser Synchronisation 9 3 This is also the recommended configuration for CMG DAS units where GPS reception is available Using NTP with CMG NAM units 9 4 Where GPS reception is not practical but an internet connection is available NTP can be used to synchronise the Platinum clock which can then generate NMEA output This NMEA data stream can be fed to the GPS input of the digitiser module using an external cable from a serial port Note This technique is only applicable to CMG NAM and CMG NAM64s where the Linux kernel can correctly handle the incoming PPS from the GPS receiver The data flow when Internet NTP is used is illu
41. a E Bm BP e jab e amp olg lt gt O 5 5 Ilo o I5 a ep D S Wiring details for the compatible socket _16 32S as seen from the cable end i e during assembly MAN EAM 0003 286 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Appendices 16 6 Appendix F Open source software and the GPL 16 6 1 Introduction Platinum firmware contains open source programs covered by the GNU Public License GPL The exact details vary from release to release but full current details are always available from our web site at http www guralp com platinum opensource 16 6 2 Physical copies of source code Under the terms of the GPL GSL has an obligation to offer to ship the source code for such programs and associated build scripts on a physical storage medium customarily used for information interchange such as a CD If you would like the source code in physical format please contact support guralp com A small charge will be made for administration the medium and postage 16 6 3 The GNU General Public License The license itself is available on the web at www gnu org licenses MAN EAM 0003 287 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Revision history 1 Revision history February 2014 E Added GPL information and warnings about back fill with gdi link tx November 2013 D Significant rewrite to cover many new features and revised user interf
42. a stored configuration backup simply click the Delete this backup button next to the unwanted backup as highlighted in the screen shot below Configuration backup Please note DM24 CD24 ADC module configuration is not saved or restored by this program even if the ADC module is integrated internally into this system Back up current configuration Upload backup file Ifyou have previously downloaded a backup file perhaps from another Platinum umt you may upload a copy to this device Choose File No file chosen gt Upload backup file Saved backups show differences between selected backups i s Show Filename Date saved Description Actions differences Download copy 2013 04 2013 04 Test backup for 0O 12 _1131_eam2243_fish 19711437 documentation Pre gtii as Delete this backup Automatic backups Automatic backup due to changed files auto 00000001 2013 04 fete gdi record gdi Download copy 0O eam ed3 Tish 12T14402 record local Restore this backup reter init local net eth auto 00000000 2013 03 l l Download copy eam2243 fish 12T12 207 First automatic backup Restore this backup show differences between selected backups t Backup file comparison Stored configuration backups can be deleted from the command line by simply deleting the relevant file in var lib config backup for user generated backups and var lib config backup auto for automatically saved
43. achieved most easily through the web interface SSH is shipped as standard with most Linux distributions and is available for Windows as part of the free terminal emulation package PuTTY which is available from http www chiark greenend org uk sgtatham putty 3 2 5 1 SSH connections using the ssh program To use SSH you must know or discover the IP address of the unit as described in the previous section Once you have the IP address issue the SSH command on the PC you are using mypcS ssh root 192 168 0 1 Replace 192 168 0 1 with the IP address of the acquisition module The first time you use SSH to connect to a host you will be asked to verify the host key This is normal but if you are ever asked this again it means that either the host key of the acquisition module has changed perhaps because of a firmware upgrade or there is a network address conflict or worse a security problem on your network MAN EAM 0003 a7 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Initial set up user mypc S ssh root 192 168 0 1 The authenticity Of host 192108014 197 16820 1 can t be established RSA key fingerprint is 62 46 707292042 latdo 5e3 75766 96713754 157a0 d9 Are you sure you want to continue connecting yes no yes Warning Permanently added 192 168 0 1 RSA to the list of known hosts root 192 1608 0 1 sS password eam999 You will be prompted for a password the defaul
44. all three commands at the terminal 2 Connect the firmware pod If you are upgrading a CMG EAM CMG DAS or CMG DCM the supplied cable CAS DCM 0038 should be attached to the 6 pin bayonet USB connector of the module The firmware pod is then connected to the end of this cable A CMG NAM unit has standard USB sockets and these can be used to directly connect the firmware pod You may use the USB socket on the front or any on the rear of the module MAN EAM 0003 59 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Platinum Firmware Upgrades 3 Wait for the device to be scanned and registered by the operating system You can confirm this by looking for USB mass storage registration entries in the system log file var log messages 4 Mount the file system by entering the following command mount t ext2 o ro dev disk by label Pt firmware mnt Note Some early Platinum releases only had ext3 file system support If this is the case the above command will result in an Invalid argument error message If this occurs simply change ext2 in the above command to ext3 5 Run the upgrade script This is not the same script that is used for network upgrades but it takes the same optional arguments These arguments are documented in section 5 4 on page 61 which should be read before proceeding Once you have decided which argument if any you wish to use run the script with the command mnt upgrade
45. and keys or on some systems the mouse select whether you wish to use DHCP or static addressing You can alternatively key Di to select DHCP or to select static addressing Use the ENTER key to confirm MAN EAM 0003 23 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Initial set up your choice If you do not wish to make a change use the key to select Cancel and then key ENTER to close the net setup tool and return you to the command prompt If you select static addressing the following screen is displayed Configure static address for eth Enter IP address gateway router if present and DNS server if present IP addresses are entered in CIDR notation e g x y zZ w 24 These correspond to netmasks as follows 16 55 255 0 24 255 255 28 255 255 29 255 255 30 255 255 255 2752 IF address MARRJE Gateway router if present Primary DNS server if known ee DNS server ae ae lt OK gt lt CanceL gt The IP address field must be populated with a valid IP address in CIDR notation If you know the netmask but not the corresponding CIDR notation use the information on screen as a guide or search the web for an on line converter If your network has a router which acts as a gateway to the Internet or to other networks use the a key or on some systems the mouse to move to the Gateway router field and enter the address of the gateway in standard dotted quad notation
46. and will persist only until the acquisition module is rebooted or powered off Refer to section 7 1 on page 70 for information about configuring permanent static IP addresses and routes MAN EAM 0003 25 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Initial set up If you wish your acquisition module to initiate connections with remote systems across the Internet or to be able to access firmware upgrades you need to configure a DNS server also known as a name server If you do not know the address of your DNS server your Internet Service Provider ISP will be able to tell you You can also use 8 8 8 8 which is a free public DNS server operated by Google Inc Enter the command eam999 echo nameserver 8 8 8 8 gt gt etc resolv conft substituting the address of the required DNS server in place of the example address 8 8 8 8 shown in the example above 3 2 4 Connecting to the web interface The Platinum firmware on all acquisition modules provides a web interface for configuration and control of the module and connected equipment While there are other methods of connecting to the modules the web interface is recommended Once the IP address of the acquisition module has been set or determined enter the it into the address bar of a web browser to connect to the module s web interface The examples below are for an EAM address entered into Firefox and Internet Explorer E pozean OAE heep 192684
47. as a communications router forwarding individual connections as required The initial link is established from a GSTM client to a GSTM server 13 2 1 The GSTM Client To configure a GSTM client from the web interface select Configuration Services Network or Configuration All options System services Network Now select gstm client Giiralp secure TCP multiplexor client The screen shows a list of all GSTM client instances that have been configured on the acquisition module To create or edit a GSTM client click the appropriate link MAN EAM 0003 211 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Building Networks 13 2 1 1 Configurable parameters The configurable parameters for the GSTM client have three tabbed pages General Server and Link General tab GSTM client General settin User description Guralp secure TCP multiplexor client instance 1 User label for this GSTM client instance Enable Enable the GSTM client at system startup Delete Delete this GSTM client instance User description Allows you to enter a mnemonic description of this instance which may be useful if you intend to run multiple instances Enable Causes this service to start automatically when the system is re booted If this check box is cleared the service will need to be started manually from the Control Services menu Delete Causes the configuration for thi
48. at the GPIO port the Flash memory is available to the system as if it were a standard removable mass storage device All of the mass storage device recording options described above in section 11 2 on page 138 will apply to this device as will the other data access options described in section 11 3 1 on page 149 MAN EAM 0003 161 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Transmitting Data 12 Transmitting Data 12 1 Received data may be re transmitted in near real time in one or more of a number of different formats By default a GCF Scream server and GDI Link transmitter are instantiated both configured to forward all received data Any other desired transmitters must be configured and enabled before use The following transmission services are currently available GCF BRP serial server see section 12 1 2 on page 166 GCF BRP network server see section 12 1 3 on page 169 GCF Scream network server see section 12 1 4 on page 174 e SEEDlink see section 12 2 on page 179 EarthWorm see section 12 3 on page 186 CD1 1 this is covered in a separate manual MAN EAM 1100 GSMS Giralp Seismic Monitoring System see section 12 4 on page 192 QSCD Quick Seismic Characteristic Data see section 12 5 on page 196 WIN sender see section 12 6 on page 198 GCF Three GCF servers are available a GCF BRP serial server which can output data over any available serial port a GCF
49. be transmitted should be entered into the table below The exact name of the channel must be given in the format SYSID STRID Output type The drop down menu offers a choice of All blocks filtering by block type is disabled Only status blocks no data blocks are transmitted Only blocks below a certain sample rate the threshold inclusive rate is specified in the following text field MAN EAM 0003 167 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Transmitting Data Only blocks matching a list of channel names offering the highest granularity of control Max sample rate If the output type is set to Only blocks below a certain sample rate the text field is used to specify the inclusive threshold above which data are not transmitted If the Output type field is set to Only blocks matching a list of channel names the channel names must be specified in the channel name table Channel name 12 1 2 2 Configurable parameters in expert mode The following additional configuration parameters in expert mode Advanced Data Out block recovery protocol settings Advanced options Log file Path to log file Leave blank to use syslog Log level Important notices Minimum severity level of messages to record in log Audit log size 256KiB medium GCF convertor GCF compressor Default instance Select which GCF convertor instance to send data fro
50. by clicking the corresponding button If the form is submitted when the table is full extra blank lines are appended 12 4 1 4 Channels The GSMS server need not send all data from all channels to its clients It is possible to select which channels are transmitted GSMS sender Channels Select which channels to transmit See help for more details Naming mode Automatic all channels are transmitted and named automatically Select how channels are selected for transmission a named GSLA 1061Z3 1061 HHZ GS 03 aa ea GSLA 1061Z2 1061 HHZ GS 02 GSLA 1061N2 1061 HHN G3 02 GSLA 1061E2 10617 HHE GS 02 GSLA 1061N3 1067 HHN GS 03 p GSLA 1061E3 1061 HHE GS 03 Select one of the three different naming modes e Automatic all channels are transmitted and named automatically e Semi automatic all channels are transmitted and names can be mapped using a configuration table e Manual only channels named in the configuration table are transmitted MAN EAM 0003 194 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Transmitting Data The software will attempt to populate the table based on incoming data streams so it is a good idea to configure all input sources and run the system for a few minutes before completing this table Clicking the button on any row will open a new row In the same way rows can be deleted by clicking the corresponding button 12 4 2 C
51. can be deleted by clicking the corresponding button Channels QSCD sender Strong motion data channels Select the instrument being used for OSCD packets here The instrument must be a CMG DM24mk3 set up for strong motion mode including SI output Instruments which seem to be configured for strong motion No suitably configured instruments found Instrument Enter instrument name SYSID SER here Omit last two digits from channel name Instrument The acquisition module scans all incoming data and prepares a list in the correct format of the names of instruments which are sending strong motion results Enter one of these names in the field MAN EAM 0003 197 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Transmitting Data Note The QSCD protocol only supports a single instrument If you need to transmit results from multiple instruments you should configure multiple QSCD sender instances one for each instrument 12 5 2 Configurable parameters in expert mode The following additional configuration parameters are available by clicking the Expert button at the bottom of the form and selecting the Advanced tab QSCD sender Advanced options Log file Path to log file Leave blank to use syslog Log level Important notices 7 Minimum severity level of messages to record in log GDI multiplexor Default data transport daemon Select which GDI multiplexo
52. command line use the data terminal command to connect to the digitiser as described in section 8 2 on page 114 and issue one of the following two commands To simultaneously set all channels to the same gain enter the command MAN EAM 0003 254 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Technical operation gain gains where gain is one of 1 2 4 8 16 32 or 64 For example to select X8 gain on all channels enter the command 8 gains The digitiser must be rebooted before the change will take effect To set the gain for an individual channel enter the command channel gain gain where channel is one of O vertical 1 North South 2 East West or 3 auxiliary calibration On seven channel digitisers this parameter can also be one of 4 vertical 5 North South or 6 East West referring to the components from the second instrument gain is one of 1 2 4 8 16 32 or 64 For example to select X16 gain on just the vertical channel enter the command 0 16 gains The digitiser must be rebooted before the change will take effect Software developers working with GCF packets can decode the selected gain setting from the GCF header as follows If the most significant bit of the System ID is zero variable gain is not used If the most significant two bits of the System ID are 10 or 11 the next three bits encode the gain using this code Bits 2 3 amp 4 Gain 00
53. compressor instance Enable Enable the compressor at system startup Delete Delete this compressor instance Buffer size 64 MiB Ring buffer size in MiB Block size 4K bytes Size of the Mini SEED data block recorded User description Set to a meaningful name for the data the compressor will handle Enable Disable The server can be enabled or disabled at boot up Buffer size Data converted by the compressor are written to a ring buffer which is read by both the miniSeed recorder and the SEEDlink transmitter The size of this buffer can be set using the text entry field which accepts an integer number of mebibytes Records can be extracted from this buffer to a file see section 14 4 4 on page 238 for more details Block size The SEED block size is set in the compressor and can not be changed by subsequent software modules This has the important implication that if data are to be transmitted using the SEEDlink server this parameter must be set to 512 bytes The size is controlled by the drop down menu and the possible choices range from 256 bytes to 8K bytes doubling at each step The default value is 4K bytes this is chosen as the optimal for mass storage device recording MAN EAM 0003 181 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Transmitting Data Channels Mini SEED compressor Channels Select which channels to compress See help for more details Naming mode Automati
54. copied from the i386 directory of the Windows XP CD if you have one available The two files you will need are hypertrm dll hypertrm exe To use Hyperterminal with Windows Vista or Windows 7 1 Copy the two files into your windows system32 directory 2 To access HyperTerminal use Windows R on your keyboard Enter hypertrm and click on OK 3 If Windows open a security warning window click on Run You may also be asked if you wish to use HyperTerminal as a the default terminal window 4 Now follow the instructions given in section 16 2 1 above 16 2 3 Using PuTTY for Windows PuTTY is a free terminal package for windows which is useful if HyperTerminal is not available It can be downloaded from www chiark greenend org uk The easiest package to use is the windows installer Install PuTTY by following the on screen instructions 1 Start PuTTY by clicking on the desktop icon or Start menu entry 2 Click on Serial at the bottom of the category menu on the left MAN EAM 0003 264 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Appendices is PuTTY Configuration Category B Session Options controlling local serial lines Logging B Terminal Keyboard Serial line to connect to Bell Features B Window Speed baud Appearance Behaviour Translation Stop bits Selection Colours E Connection Flow control Data Prox Telnet Alogin 3 Select a serial line to connect to This is usually COM1 Sel
55. currently configured multiplexers State directory The GCF BRP protocol requires the transmitter to store some state information By default this is held in the directory var lib gcf out brp n where n is the instance number counting from zero for the first instance The text field can be used to cause this information to be stored elsewhere typically on another device This may be useful for managing storage utilisation in complex configurations 12 1 4 GCF Scream Server The GCF Scream network server transmits G ralp Compressed Format GCF data in the native Scream protocol over an Ethernet network To configure a GCF Scream network server from the web interface select Data transfer recording Services Or Configuration All options System services To configure a GCF Scream network server from the command line start gconfig and select System services from the top level menu Now select gcf out scream from the System Services menu The next screen shows a list of all GCF Scream server instances that have been configured GCF Scream network server instance selection Select the GCF Scream network server instance you wish to configure e Scream server GCF network sender starts automaticall Create new service instance You can reconfigure any existing service by clicking on its menu entry To configure a new GCF Scream server instance select Create new service instance The following
56. down list All output lines are displayed so care should be taken to choose a suitable output line 14 2 2 Configurable parameters in expert mode An additional field is displayed in expert mode Log level Important notices Minimum severity level of messages to record in log Log level The drop down menu controls the level of detail present in log messages Not all of the standard syslog logging levels are available The menu offers a choice in order of decreasing detail of e Debugging information e Informational messages Important notices Warnings The Control Menu The Control menu of the web interface is a dynamic menu with content that changes depending on the which devices are attached Two items on this menu are always present Reboot and Services CMG NAM units fitted with RAID arrays will also have a RAID array services menu item Other items will appear as required depending on both the underlying hardware and attached devices 14 3 1 Digital I O power control and anti tamper monitoring The acquisition module hardware can be fitted with optional sensors to monitor and switch the voltages and currents being supplied to the CMG EAM and also to devices connected to the CMG EAM ports such as digitisers A program on the CMG EAM runs constantly in the background and monitors the sensors if they are fitted The same program can monitor the anti tampering lines where fitted To control
57. down once the flush is complete If you wish to work with data on the removable drive it must first be powered up This is done automatically when using the web interface but must be done manually when working from the command line If you wish to work with recent data a manual flush should first be performed in order to move the data from the buffer memory to the drive Facilities exist to aid automation of data downloads See section 11 3 1 3 on page 156 for details 11 3 1 Retrieving data from the removable drive Note Older removable hard drives had internal heaters and temperature sensors It can take several seconds to pre heat and power up one of these drives Be prepared for short delays when using some of the following commands with these drives Data from the removable drive can be retrieved using the web interface using network file transfer tools or over a serial port The web interface is most convenient if you only want to download one or two files It is not suitable for large numbers of files or for automated downloads Using the serial interface is slow and also not suitable for large numbers of files or for automated downloads The use of network transfer tools such as scp sftp or rsync is recommended in most cases If large numbers of files are to be downloaded or if the process is to be automated a special user can be created to simplify the process When this user logs in over ssh as used by rsync sc
58. for IPV6 For more information about CIDR please refer to http en wikipedia org wiki Classless Inter Domain Routing The Default route gateway field should be populated with the IP address of the default router for this VLAN If more complicated routing configurations are required these can be entered in expert mode 7 3 2 Configurable parameters in expert mode A set of additional parameters are available when in expert mode These are identical to the additional parameters on the physical interface configuration screen as described in section 7 1 2 on page 72 and are not discussed further here 1 4 Network Time Protocol NTP The Network Time Protocol NTP is a method of synchronising the clocks of computer systems over networks including those with variable latency such as packet switched networks Platinum firmware include a fully featured NTP implementation which can be used to keep the system clock synchronised to external time sources such as Internet NTP servers connected digitisers and connected GPS receivers Most acquisition modules include a battery backed real time clock RTC module which can retain system time with tolerable accuracy during periods of power loss CMG DCMs will revert to January the 1 1970 after each power cycle The system clock is used to provide time stamps for log file messages and can also be used to generate NMEA and PPS signals emulating a GPS receiver in MAN EAM 0003 84 I
59. it will serve by populating the text field User Label Can be filled in with a name which will then be used to identify this instance in log files Enable Causes this service to start automatically when the system is re booted If this check box is cleared the service will need to be started manually from the Control Services menu Delete Causes the configuration for this instance to be removed from the system when the form is submitted 12 4 1 2 Network GSMS sender Network parameters Bind host The hostname or IP address the server will bind to Leave empty for all 1 Service port 9001 The TCP and UDP port number or service name to listen on Bind host configure the server to listen for incoming data requests only on a specific IP address By default it will listen on all configured interfaces Service Port Set the port port number or service name that you want the server to listen on in the text field 12 4 1 3 Push Push allows the server to pro actively send data to remote GSMS receivers MAN EAM 0003 193 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Transmitting Data GSMS sender Push hosts Protocol Select TCP or UDP this must match the receiver s setting Push host Enter IP addresses or host names Service Enter port numbers or service names Clicking the button on any row will open a new row In the same way rows can be deleted
60. must be reconfigured from its default setting 4 Kbytes if the SEEDlink server is to be used see the previous section for details The system will prevent you from configuring a SEEDlink server unless the chosen compressor is set to prepare 512 byte blocks The system does not stop you from subsequently reconfiguring the compressor but if you change the block size the SEEDlink server will fail If you want to write miniSEED data with a block size other than 512 bytes and run a SEEDlink server you should instantiate different compressors for each A single SEEDlink server instance takes data from a single compressor instance and can serve multiple simultaneous clients If it is required to serve different channels to different clients multiple server instances should be configured each receiving data from a different compressor instance the channel selection is controlled by the compressor not the server A server has a configured Organization name if data are to appear to come from multiple organizations multiple server instances should be configured they can share a compressor instance if they will be serving the same channels or a number of compressor instances can be used To configure a SEEDlink server from the web interface select Data transfer recording Services or Configuration All options System services To configure a SEEDlink server from the command line start gconfig and select System
61. number of samples in the data block A hexadecimal display of the block header is shown in the final column 14 4 6 GDI Channels Display It is often useful particularly when configuring a acquisition module for a complex array to see a list of the Stream IDs or channel names which the CMG EAM is receiving The GDI Channels Display feature allows you to view a list of all active channels together with some additional detail about each To access the GDI Channels Display from the web interface select Tools GDI Channels Display Similar information is available from the command line via the command gdi dump 1 but the format is optimised for automated processing rather than human consumption Giving the help option provides usage details Use of the web interface however is recommended MAN EAM 0003 243 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware The following summary screen is displayed GDI status List of channels Namo Sample rate Activo segments Actions Monitoring Operations The first two columns show the names information about the data format Text stream View details Dump data Text stream View ae Gaara Te 7 100 SENE T dl 1 realtime View details Dump data 100 samples cna 1 realtime View details Dump data 100 sanipesysconnd 1 realtime View details Dump data 100 samples second 1 realtime View details
62. of 6 007 KiB of 51 665 KiB in 3 of 29 F2 Rename F4 Edit 23 F5 Copy 3 F Move c F7 Create Directory 3X F8 Delete f Fa Properties IF F10 Quit 8 SCP T 0 03 59 When the transfer is complete return to the ssh session and power down the mass storage devices with the exit command or by keying D Using rsync is very similar simply replace the invocation of scp in the above instructions with an appropriate rsync command For Linux users the simplest usage is me mypc dl rsync avz root 51 187 130 165 media This will copy all files from all removable drives to the current directory on the invoking computer Only the differences are transferred making this particularly efficient when used regularly For more advanced usage please see the rsync manual available on line at http man wiki net index php 1 rsync 2006 11 06 Windows users can download a free port of rsync using the cygwin library see http www cygwin com for more information or use one of several free graphical interfaces such as ersync available from http sourceforge net projects grsync win files The following screen shot shows grsync about to download all data from a removable drive Note the password prompt appearing in the separate console window MAN EAM 0003 155 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Recording and Retrieving Data oo Grsync hee Ae root 51 187 138 165 s pz Sessions eam2
63. optional argument 6 Ensure there are no error messages and then reboot the device Once the unit has rebooted the upgrade process is complete Note Certain upgrades depending on the initial version number make it difficult or impossible to reboot the system via the web interface In these cases the system can be rebooted from the command line with the reboot command or by power cycling 5 3 4 U3 USB mounting problems U3 was a method of launching Windows applications from special USB flash drives A U3 flash drive presents itself to the host system as a USB hub with a CD drive and standard USB mass storage device attached Reformatting the drive will remove some of the software the hidden SYSTEM folder but not all of it The virtual CD ROM drive cannot be removed by reformatting because it is presented to the host system as a physical device attached to a USB hub U3 Tool is an open source management tool for Windows and Linux that allows the locked U3 partition to be removed The U3 tool is available from http resourcelessness projects u3 tool files MAN EAM 0003 60 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Platinum Firmware Upgrades 5 4 5 3 4 1 MS Windows Open a command prompt and change the directory to that where the U3 tool was installed To see all options enter the command us toolmaker To repartition the device enter the command u3 coolmaker m 0 E replacing E wi
64. or Linux Miquel van Smoorenburg s minicom terminal emulator more details from http alioth debian org projects minicom is recommended although most terminal emulators can be used An extract from Minicom s user manual is reproduced in section 16 3 on page 267 MAN EAM 0003 266 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Appendices 16 3 Appendix C Using Minicom The acquisition module includes the Linux program minicom as a terminal emulator for use with serial devices including Guralp digitisers The following is part of the minicom man page Minicom is window based To pop up a window with the function you want hold the key while typing from now on we will use a EN to denote this and then the function key a z or A Z By pressing a Al first and then F a help screen comes up with a short summary of all commands For every menu the following keys can be used DOWN LEFT RIGHT CHOOSE CANCEL The screen is divided into two portions the upper 24 lines are the terminal emulator screen In this window ANSI or VT100 escape sequences are interpreted If there is a line left at the bottom a status line is placed there If this is not possible the status line will be showed every time you press fee N On terminals that have a special status line it will be used if the termcap information is complete and the k flag has been given Possible commands are listed next in alphabetical o
65. or double clicking on its icon You will be presented with the following screen MAN EAM 0003 28 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware PuTTY Configuration Category E Session Logging B Terminal Keyboard Bell Features Initial set up a Basic options for your PuTTY session Specify the destination you want to connect to Host Hame or IF address Port 22 Connection type B Window OBa Telnet Alogin SSH Serial Appearance Behaviour Translation Saved Sessions Load save or delete a stored session Selection Colours Connection Default Settings Load Proxy Telnet Delete Rlogin H SSH Serial Close window on exit Always O Neve Only on clean exit Enter the IP address of the acquisition module into the Host Name or IP address field check that SSH is selected as the Connection type and then click the button The first time you use SSH to connect to a host you will be asked to verify the host key Pul TY Security Alert have no guarantee that the serwer is the computer Yau think it is The server s rsaz key Fingerprint is ssh rsa 2046 abs FOSS do eF2bicd se Od blebs Fe Sb Sa co Ge TF you trust this host hit Yes to add the key to The server s host key is nok cached in the registry You PuTTY s cache and carry on connecting TF you want to carry on connecting just once without adding the key to the
66. or service name to listen on Organization Name of organization if blank Guralp Systems Ltd will be used User description Set to a meaningful name for the server data Enable Causes this service to start automatically when the system is re booted If this check box is cleared the service will need to be started manually from the Control Services menu Delete Causes the configuration for this instance to be removed from the system when the form is submitted Server hostname IP address To configure the server to listen for incoming data requests only on a specific IP address set this or the associated host name in the text field By default it will listen on all configured interfaces Server Port service name Set the port port number or service name that you want the server to listen on in the text field Organization The server identifies itself to clients with an organization name this should be entered into the text field If left blank the value will default to Guralp Systems Ltd MAN EAM 0003 185 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Transmitting Data 12 3 12 2 2 2 Configurable parameters in expert mode The following additional configuration parameters are available by clicking the Expert button at the bottom of the form and selecting the Advanced tab SEEDIink server Advanced options Log file Path t
67. possible to configure multiple multiplexers each with their own set of input and output services In these situations the drop down menu can be used to select a multiplexer instance with which to associate this transmitter The menu offers a list of currently configured multiplexers State directory The GCF BRP protocol requires the transmitter to store some state information By default this is held in the directory var lib gcf out brp PPP where PPP is the port name The text field can be changed to cause this information to be stored elsewhere typically on another device This may be useful for managing storage utilisation in complex configurations 12 1 3 GCF BRP Network Server The GCF BRP network server transmits G ralp Compressed Format GCF data using the Block Recovery Protocol BRP over an Ethernet network To configure a GCF BRP network server from the web interface select Configuration Services GCF or Configuration All options System services GCF To configure a GCF BRP network server from the command line start gconfig and select System services from the menu MAN EAM 0003 169 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Transmitting Data Now select gcf out brp The screen shows a list of all GCF BRP configured server instances You can reconfigure any existing service by clicking on its menu entry To configure a new GCF BRP server instance select Cre
68. screen in separate rows 8 1 1 2 Connected devices Connected devices Sensor type CMG 3T ESPC es NMEA protocol GPS GPS power cycling Disabled anaia Disabled Device info blocks info block 1 is empty Display device info blocks Sensor type Has no effect on the acquisition module s operation and acts as a memo field Timing source Set to NMEA protocol GPS which should be used for all GPS devices or None for situations where there is no timing source GPS power cycling GPS units can be turned off to save power in battery powered environments In order to keep the internal clock synchronised the GPS unit is regularly turned on for long enough to obtain an accurate time and then turned off The GPS power cycling drop down allows you to select the intervals at which this happens 1 2 3 4 6 8 21 or 24 hours or whether to leave the GPS constantly powered up Mass auto centring The drop down menu can be used to configure or disable a digitiser function which automatically initiates a round of centring when the mass position averaged over several minutes drifts further than the specified distance from zero The excursion required to trigger centring is expressed as a percentage of full scale MAN EAM 0003 101 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Digitiser Configuration 8 1 1 3 InfoBlocks InfoBlocks information blocks are one kilobyte areas
69. services from the top level menu Select gcf in scream GCF Scream network client The screen shows a list of all Scream network client instances that have been configured To configure a Scream receiver select Create new service instance MAN EAM 0003 134 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Receiving Data 10 3 1 Configurable parameters The configurable parameters for Scream network clients have three tabbed pages General Network and Servers 10 3 1 1 General Scream network client General setting User description GCF Scream network client instance 1 User label for the convertor instance Enable Enable the convertor at system startup Delete Delete this convertor instance Please note this page has additional descriptions for the sections below press the Help button to view them User description Sets the name of the service This should be set to a meaningful name for the data that it will be receiving such as the IP or hostname of the Scream server Enable Causes this service to start automatically when the system is re booted If this check box is cleared the service will need to be started manually from the Control Services menu Delete Causes the configuration for this instance to be removed from the system when the form is submitted 10 3 1 2 Network Scream network client Network options Local address Local inter
70. strings Link tab Watchdog interval If a configured link carries no traffic for an extended period the client will send watchdog packets to the server This serves two functions it reassures the client that the link is still usable and it defeats any automatic disconnect on idle mechanisms which may be active on some links The time in seconds between such watchdog probes can be configured by entering a value in the Watchdog interval field Restart interval If the GSTM link fails for any reason it is automatically restarted There may be situations where the link cannot be restarted so to prevent almost continuous restart attempts and consequent processor thrashing a time delay is implemented between a link failure and a restart attempt This defaults to thirty seconds but a different value can be configured if desired by entering it in the Restart interval field Link settings Watehde interval a0 Period in seconds between watchdog messages Restart interval Number of seconds to wait on exit before restarting Fallover services Sernices to start when link fails Link established command Command ta sue when a goed link is established Confighome Help Submit Generated al AMSA GATIS OR TI hy SCS AALI Pariin of outil ceppriph 4013 Girip Slana Lirih Failover services If the watchdog packets do not elicit a response from the server the link is assumed to have failed and optionally an addit
71. the Digital I O from the web interface select Control Digital I O MAN EAM 0003 221 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Monitoring Operations The screen displays the current digital I O status for each monitored line I O line status 1 0 line status and control w pe p Data Out Data Out power Disk_heater Removable disk heater power Disk power Removable disk power system temperature Chassis temperature sense MAN EAM 0003 Output Output high on Last changed never voltage Bus Voltage V current Current A power Power W Output Output low off Last changed 2011 03 08715 13 387 voltage Bus Voltage V current Current A power Power W Output Output low off Last changed 2011 03 087T15 13 387 voltage Bus Voltage V current Current A power Power W Input Input high on Last changed never temp Temperature in Celsius S231 22 View details setings Set to input Set output iow switch off Set output high switch on View details settings Set to input Set output low switch off Set output high switch on View details settings Set to input Set output low switch off _ Set output high switch on None permitted Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Monitoring Operations Clicking the
72. the remote server IP address and port The format of this option is host service The host may be a hostname or an IP address The service may be a TCP port number or a service name from etc services MAN EAM 0003 99 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Digitiser Configuration 8 8 1 Digitiser Configuration Configuring digitisers using the web interface The configuration interface can be used to configure the digitiser module in a DAS or any serially attached G ralp digitiser such as CMG DM24 or CMG CD24 The internal digitiser module in a CMG DAS is effectively serially connected so both internal and external digitisers are handled identically To configure a digitiser using the web interface select Configuration Instruments Port A instrument The list alters dynamically to reflect the system s embedded and attached devices For every digitiser detected an entry appears which allows you to configure the digitiser T Note To control as opposed to configure the digitiser and its attached instrument sensor locking mass centring etc see section 14 3 2 on page 224 The information shown on this screen is retrieved from the digitiser using a sequence of background commands over a serial communications line and may therefore take a few seconds to display A progress indicator is displayed during this process It is possible to display this sequence of commands toge
73. to rdisk directory to 2011068 dircopy Completed copying var spool to rdisk directory to 2011068 dircopy Commiting output tree Tree commit completed Releasing storage Flush complete Child exited with status 0 Normally interpreted as success Once the flush process has completed as shown above return to the main disk menu by clicking on Removable disk on the Tools menu You can now click the Viewfles button This will power up any connected mass storage devices and after a short delay present a list of attached devices and their details filesystem free space etc View filesystem details Filesystem details F9CC 39BB vfat 55 9GiB 43 5GiB 77 9 2009240 gcfraw i View files Clicking on any of the Viewfiles buttons takes you to the Removable disk file index screen which displays folders and files within the selected filesystem Subdirectories folders have a Follow button next to them and files have a Download button MAN EAM 0003 151 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Recording and Retrieving Data Removable disk file index Filesystem UUID F9cc 39BB Path 2009210 gcfraw Choose a su bdirectory to follow or file to download 2 File or directory name Follow or download up to parent directory 2009210T1030zZ gcf 0 0MiB 2009210T11002Z gcf 0 4MiB If the displayed directory contained subdirectorie
74. to reboot the system via the web interface In these cases the system can be rebooted from the command line with the reboot command or by power cycling 5 4 3 Upgrade and force factory defaults The third upgrade option effectively wipes everything other than files on any connected hard drive or USB drive while installing the new firmware revision leaving the unit as it would be delivered Avoid using this option if you have made any customisations to your unit or installed any scripts If in doubt please consult G ralp Systems Ltd technical support for advice before proceeding Conversely if you have made changes which you believe have adversely affected the unit but are having trouble undoing them this option lets you start with a clean slate MAN EAM 0003 63 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Platinum Firmware Upgrades 5 9 To invoke this option from the web interface select Firmware from the Tools menu and then click the Advanced options button From the resulting screen press the Upgrade force factory settings button Watch the screen for any error messages and then reboot the unit to complete the process Note Certain upgrades depending on the initial version number make it difficult or impossible to reboot the system via the web interface In these cases the system can be rebooted from the command line with the reboot command or by power cycling To perf
75. use it as an NTP clock source see section 7 4 on page 84 or alternatively the acquisition module module can be synchronised to another time source such as Internet NTP and provide NMEA signals to the digitiser module In either case the digitiser module s GPS port and the acquisition module module s Port C must use the same Baud rate If a stand alone digitiser or digital instrument is fitted with a Lantronix Ethernet or WiFi option it uses the Data out port settings for its internal communications with the digitiser Changing the associated Baud rate requires making a network connection to the Lantronix unit s web interface and selecting the matching baud rate from its control page 8 1 1 13 Miscellaneous features and Submission The final section of the digitiser control web page is entitled Miscellaneous features This section displays a warning in red if a discrepancy is detected between the EAM s time and the digitiser s own clock If the two clocks have reasonable synchronisation this message is suppressed A typical warning looks like this Digitiser clock is displaced by more than 5 minutes from the system clock Plus 7 minutes This section of the page is shown here without the warning m Miscellaneous features Transmit Unified Status Packets Recommended Set the digitiser clock from the system clock on next form submission Show full digitiser dialog in future form submissions Help
76. use the global hostname Postmaster alias The mail address all system mail should be directed to Enable MTA Used to control whether the mail transfer agent is started automatically at boot time If this check box is left clear the MTA can still be started manually from the services menu see section 14 3 5 on page 234 Smart host Most email configurations use a smart host to route mail This can greatly simplify the administration only one node on a network the smart host needs to be configured to know about any intricacies of the system and all other machines need only know the location of the smart host If the Smart host text field is populated with the name or address of of such a host all mail is sent directly to that host for further routing If this field is left blank the MTA will attempt to use DNS to discover the mail host s for any given address and then deliver mail directly Mail host identity Specifies the hostname from which outgoing emails should appear to originate If this field is left blank the real hostname is used Postmaster alias Specifies the address to which all internally generated mail should be sent This should be set to the email address of the acquisition module s administrator MAN EAM 0003 89 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Networking Configuration 1 6 Configuring the SSH Server The acquisition module has an ssh server running on its Etherne
77. variable automatically PuTTY will default to xterm emulation allowing the mouse to be used within gconfig Minicom under Unix Minicom emulates a vt100 style terminal and automatically maps the keystrokes and display sequences for the actual terminal you are using so the default TERM setting of vt100 is correct HyperTerminal under Using the File menu option Settings ensure Windows that the terminal type is set to VT100 HyperTerminal will then emulate a vt100 style terminal which will match the default TERM vt100 on the acquisition module Scream Scream versions before 4 5 did not support the required screen drawing control codes so an upgrade to version 4 5 or later is recommended These settings will provide the best results for the listed applications Note that when connecting with SSH from an xterm window for example use of the mouse for menu navigation is supported 4 3 2 Using gconfig When you enter the gconfig command the initial screen looks like this File Edit View Terminal Help EAM Configuration System Welcome to the Guralp Systems EAM Configuration System Please select an area of the system to configure from the menu provided below System identity hostname Serial ports Networking System services Routine tasks Disk data recording GPIO Labels and power switch settings Version and serial number information lt Quit gt lt HeLp gt lt Expert gt
78. you wish to use UDP packets or TCP connections With UDP packets the GCF protocol keeps track of which packets have been received and automatically requests retransmission of any missing data TCP on the other hand is a connection orientated protocol which handles packet sequencing and retransmission itself at the cost of a little extra network overhead MAN EAM 0003 136 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Recording and Retrieving Data 11 Recording and Retrieving Data 11 1 Data can be recorded to internal and external storage in raw GCF format or in miniSEED format Data can be browsed via the web interface or copied to external computers for further processing Preparing removable mass storage devices When a new removable mass storage device is to be used with a acquisition module it must first be formatted for use The mass storage device can be formatted by any computer but the acquisition module also has the capability of formatting the mass storage device itself The acquisition module accepts mass storage devices formatted in either ext3 format which is faster and more reliable but can only be read under Linux systems or VFAT format slower and arguably less reliable but can be read under all operating systems To prepare the mass storage device on a PC simply format it with a single partition containing either of the above file systems it can then be inserted directly into an
79. 0 MAN EAM 0003 7 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware 160 6 0 Tia GEOG CIO cererea EEE EN O O EO TO 290 100 t Physical Copies ol Source CONG sron i E TNA 290 16 6 2 The GNU General Public LICENS nmrccneinrn oni E N SASS 290 17 Revision Nistor ecssase a 291 MAN EAM 0003 8 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Preliminary Notes 1 Preliminary Notes 1 1 Proprietary Notice 1 2 The information in this document is proprietary to G ralp Systems Limited and may be copied or distributed for educational and academic purposes but may not be used commercially without permission Whilst every effort is made to ensure the accuracy completeness and usefulness of the information in the document neither G ralp Systems Limited nor any employee assumes responsibility or is liable for for any incidental or consequential damages resulting from the use of this document Cautions and Notes 1 3 Cautions and notes are displayed and defined as follows Caution A yellow triangle indicates a chance of damage to or failure of the equipment if the caution is not heeded Note A blue circle indicates indicates a procedural or advisory note Manuals and Software 1 4 All manuals and software referred to in this document are available from the G ralp Systems website www guralp com unless otherwise stated Conventions Throughout this manual examples are
80. 0 unless clipping is observed in which case it should be reduced until an undistorted output is observed 14 3 2 2 Instrument Control Command line Platinum provides both a high level and a low level interface to connected digitisers The low level interface involves interacting directly with the command line of the digitiser and is described at the end of this section The high level interface is provided by the adc command command which takes a number of sub commands as described below Each command must be directed to a specific sensor and this must be specified as the first argument When invoked with no arguments or with the help argument a list of available targets referred to as modules is displayed eam2010 adc command help usage adc command lt module gt lt command gt options Available ADC modules CIL4As IRIS CIL4 Sh56 This is followed by a list of available sub commands In the descriptions below module should be replaced by a name from the list provided by invoking adc command help MAN EAM 0003 227 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Monitoring Operations adc command module mass centre Perform a centring operation on the sensor s masses This sub command takes no options adc command module mass lock Lock the masses for transportation This sub command takes no options adc command module mass unlock Unlock the masses for d
81. 0 not fitted 001 x1 010 x2 011 x4 100 x8 101 x16 110 x32 111 x64 15 1 3 USB operations The Cylindrical Digitiser can behave as a USB storage device via the GPIO connector or as a USB host via the USB connector MAN EAM 0003 255 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Technical operation 15 2 15 1 3 1 USB device mode The Cylindrical Digitiser is fitted with an internal Flash memory device which is accessible via USB It can be written to by selecting Internal USB storage from the Recording destination drop down menu on the Disk recording page see section 11 2 on page 138 When a USB host such as a laptop or PC is connected to the GPIO port who s pin out is given in section 16 5 6 on page 278 internal circuitry detects the USB power and automatically connects the Flash memory to the GPIO socket causing it to behave identically to a standard USB memory stick When no power is detected at the GPIO port the Flash memory is available to the system as if it were a standard removable mass storage device All of the mass storage device recording options described in section 11 2 on page 138 will apply to this device 15 1 3 2 USB host mode If a USB storage device is connected to the USB port see section 16 5 8 on page 280 for the pin out it will be mounted under media It can be used to store seismic data by selecting External USB drive on mil spec connector
82. 000 or later is not interrupted The upgrade mechanism has until now been extremely tolerant of interruptions and it has been normally sufficient to simply restart an interrupted upgrade process This will also be true for future upgrades once build 10 000 or higher has first been installed For upgrades from build 3801 to build 10 000 or later however it is highly recommended that an upgrade to an acquisition module only be carried out in a situation with a stable power supply a reliable internet connection and where you have physical access to the unit 5 1 3 Procedures for upgrades spanning build 10 000 5 1 3 1 CMG EAMs An extra step must be taken when upgrading from build 3801 to the latest build and special attention must be paid to the amount of free disk space available Please see this article on our web site for complete information and detailed instructions www guralp com articles 20110309 EAM EABI upgrade 5 1 3 2 CMG NAMs and CMG NAM64s After upgrading from build 3801 to the latest build you may see several FATAL kernel too old messages In order to resolve this issue please log in to the command line as root and run the command sbin manual post upgrade If despite all precautions the upgrade is interrupted at a crucial time attempt first to restart the upgrade If this fails please follow the recovery instructions available from our web site at www guralp com articles 20110318 NAM recovery 5 1 3 3 CMG DC
83. 010 sf ada 8 Delete Source and Destination directones need a trailing root 51 187 130 165 media Browse a C Documents and Settingsifish My Docum Browse Basic options Advanced options Extra options Preserve time L Preserve permissions O Preserve owner C Preserve group C Delete on destination O De not leave filesystem Verbose Show transfer progress O Ignore existing O Size only O Skip newer O Windows compatibility cet Quit t Simulation Execute 11 3 1 3 Automating network downloads If data are to be repeatedly downloaded from a Platinum system it is possible to automate the mounting and dismounting of the storage device which considerably simplifies the operation This is accomplished by means of a special user identity the special user is configured so that the storage device is mounted automatically when the user logs in and dismounted automatically when the user logs out Network file transfer protocols such as scp sftp and rsync all involve a hidden login so as long as they authenticate as the special user they can be invoked at any time without the need for a command line session to handle device operations To create the special user run the command Pt storage adduser followed by the desired username this command will prompt interactively for a password for the new user The password will not be echoed to the screen Note If the system is to be connected permanently to the Inte
84. 014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Platinum Firmware Upgrades etc conf d upgrade local on each acquisition devices will not be disturbed by the upgrade process and so only need to be created once 5 3 3 Upgrading from a USB storage device For situations where it is either impossible or undesirable to upgrade over a network G ralp Systems Ltd can supply the latest Platinum firmware on a USB memory stick along with an appropriate adaptor cable part number CAS DCM 0038 The adapter cable is required when upgrading the firmware of most acquisition module units but not when upgrading a CMG NAM You will need both physical access and command line access to the device being upgraded Command line access may be via ssh or a serial connection To upgrade the firmware from a USB storage device 1 Power up the USB ports CMG EAM only The hardware for other acquisition modules do not have control over the 5V USB supply and power is always provided to the USB ports Depending on the revision of CMG EAM firmware installed before the upgrade there are three possible commands for powering up the USB ports Ignoring any error messages enter these commands at the terminal echo 1 gt sys class gpio USBpowerB level 10line L USBA power o l 10oline L USBB power o I Note Using the wrong command is completely harmless and merely results in an error message so it is easiest and perfectly safe to simply enter
85. 04 15711 41 197 by GCS 2 0 11 Portions of output copyright 2013 G ralp Systems Limited Enabled MiniSEED recording will be enabled if this check box is ticked and disabled otherwise File period This drop down menu offers a choice of file periods the options are 15 or 30 minutes and 1 2 3 4 6 12 or 24 hours If set for example to 15 minutes four files will be generated each hour whereas if set to 24 hours MAN EAM 0003 141 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Recording and Retrieving Data only one file will be generated per day The files may contain a single component or multiple components see the next field description for details The default file period is 30 minutes File name The contents of this field determine how the data files are named Tokens within the field are replaced by parameters derived from the data while all other characters are coped verbatim into the resulting file names It is possible to organise files into hierarchical directories by using forward slash characters in this field Please see section 11 2 2 on page 146 for details of the tokens that can be used Note that if this field contains any token that identifies a stream individual files will be created for each stream If no such token is present multiple streams will be recorded into each file Flush threshold This drop down menu allows control over the percentage utilisation of the miniSEED ring buf
86. 11 1 on page 137 When using shell scripts all of these menu functions can be accessed by passing the function name as an argument to Pt storage For example eam999 Pt storage mount performs the same function as selecting mount from the Pt storage menu Note Older removable hard drives had internal heaters and temperature sensors It can take several seconds to pre heat and power up one of these drives Be prepared for short delays when using some of the following commands with these drives Once the mass storage device is powered up and the relevant file system mounted the recorded files can be browsed with standard Linux shell commands such as cd and 1s They can be copied to a remote PC using the network or over the serial port as described in section 11 3 1 4 on page 157 To copy files over the network the use of scp or rsync is recommended The scp program is most convenient to use and can copy single files or recursively copy directories The rsync program is more complicated but is ideal when a remote copy of the data is to be updated regularly since it minimises the traffic over the network by only copying new or changed files The same rsync syntax can be reused regardless of changing filenames For Linux users scp is installed by default or available as an optional package in most distributions Consult your operating system documentation for more details For Windows users the WinSCP package is recommended
87. 14 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Networking Configuration a new row In the same way rows can be deleted by clicking the corresponding button Network interface wianO Extra routes The following routes are added to the interface after it has come up This is in addition to the default route added above f ae Type The drop down menu offers the following choices e unicast Normal setting for a host or network route The route entry describes real paths to the destinations specified in the Destination column e Unreachable Destinations are unreachable Packets are discarded and the ICMP message host unreachable is generated An EHOSTUNREACH error may appear in var log messages e Blackhole Destinations are unreachable Packets are discarded silently An EINVAL error may appear in var log messages e Prohibit Destinations are unreachable Packets are discarded and the ICMP message communication administratively prohibited is generated An EACCES error may appear in var log messages e Local Destinations are assigned to this host The packets are looped back and delivered locally e Broadcast The broadcast addresses The packets are sent as link broadcasts Destination The host or network to which this route offers access should be entered here in CIDR format where the address is followed by a slash and then the number of bits defining the netmask e g 192 168 0 1 24 for IPV4 or 2001 db8
88. 2 09 SR A ea a A2260 ACC2N4 pane ene ri AZ 04 A2260 ACC2E4 ACC HHE A2 04 wal Config home Help Expert submit Generated at 2013 04 16715 22 537 by GCS 2 0 1 Portions of output copyright 2013 G ralp Systems Limited MAN EAM 0003 189 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Transmitting Data The channels tab contains a drop down menu and a table which allow the operator to control which channels are transmitted and optionally rename them Naming mode The drop down menu offers three choices e Automatic all channels are compressed and named automatically Offers no filtering and uses the system generated names for each channel as forwarded by gdi base e Semi automatic all channels are compressed names may be mapped below One or more of the channels may be renamed by adding entries to the mapping table If you wish to use this mode it may be useful first to run the system in automatic mode for a short while this will populate the mapping table with an entry for each currently known channel which can serve as the basis for your own mapping table e Manual only channels named below are compressed Offers both channel filtering and name mapping If you wish to use this mode it may be useful first to run the system in automatic mode for a short while to populate the mapping table with an entry for each currently known channel this can serve as the basis for your own mapping table
89. 2 TEST1 BHE NN LL mseed It is often required to separate the data into sub directories by network and station prefix In this case it is recommended that the network and station id are still included in the file name so that the contents of the file are still recognisable even if it is moved to a different location sn 8 Y j TSH3MZ s c n 1 mseed will store the data like this NN TEST1 2008315T1442Z TEST1 BHE NN LL mseed 2008315T1452Z TEST1 BHE NN LL mseed 2008315T1502Z TEST1 BHE NN LL mseed NN TEST2 2008315T14422Z TEST2 BHE NN LL mseed MAN EAM 0003 148 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Recording and Retrieving Data 11 3 2008315T14522Z TEST2 BHE NN LL mseed 2008315T15022Z TEST2 BHE NN LL mseed Retrieving data Data are recorded first to buffers held in flash memory There are separate buffers for GCF and miniSEED data and their sizes are defined in the configuration pages for their respective compressors See section 12 1 1 on page 162 for the GCF compressor and section 12 2 1 on page 180 for the miniSEED compressor When the buffer utilisation exceeds a configurable percentage as specified in the relevant tabs of the Configuration gt Storage and recording page a process is triggered to flush the data to the hard drive In low power applications the hard drive will normally be powered down and so must be powered up and mounted before use It is then dismounted and powered
90. 2110 amp 1 TE ts a a et he On versions of Platinum from release 10 000 the web interface will initially show a status display and a brief menu There is an option to log in on that menu Click on the link and enter the default user name of root and password of rootme If you are connecting to the acquisition module over a network that you consider insecure such as the internet it is recommended that you use the HTTPS secure HTTP protocol which uses TLS to encrypt the link Simply change the http prefix to https in the browser s address bar Most browsers will complain that the certificate cannot be verified This is not a problem simply press the accept button to proceed The link will then be encrypted and nobody will be able to sniff the wire in an attempt to discover passwords and other data Once connected and logged in you will be presented with the main summary screen and a much larger menu The summary screen contains general information about the status and health of the connected modules and equipment The exact contents and layout of this screen will vary depending on the configuration of both the acquisition module and of any attached devices See section 4on page 33 for information on using the web interface MAN EAM 0003 26 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Initial set up 3 2 4 1 Connection trouble shooting If the browser fails to connect
91. 4 CMG EAM MAN EAM 0003 16 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Equipment Overview If the output link is over a network all external serial ports of a standard CMG EAM including the DATA OUT port are available for connection to digitisers or digital instruments allowing up to eighteen channels to be ageregated An arbitrary number of CMG EAMs may be chained together allowing for even more extensive arrangements 2 6 4 PPP Networking A serial output from the CMG EAM can be used for point to point protocol PPP networking This protocol allows full internet access to the device over a serial link Operators can access the web page of the acquisition module for configuration and monitoring If other Ethernet devices are present at the deployment site the CMG EAM can function as a router passing their traffic over the PPP link The output from other serial devices can also be passed over the PPP link by use of the built in serial to TCP converter see section 7 8 on page 97 for details NA NAN ING ATED TTA Modem ay A TEL ALINA 2 6 5 Resilient Networking Platinum firmware includes a number of ways to implement network resilience For example the GSTM protocol for communication between Platinum units allows data to be routed over a low cost but unreliable DSL network with automatic switch over to a higher cost satellite link only when the DSL network is unavailable
92. 42 135 192 168 42 98 and 192 168 42 139 These are the addresses of all GCF servers listening on port 1567 on the local network faa Network Control A E Ed Hu Client hu S Eff TCP server active P y arver erver DU er E scream Eq JEMES 7 Command Ping acknowledged From UDP 255 255 255 259 1567 Block Fix Control 10704 2013 16 16 04 Added Server UDFP 255 255 255 255 1567 10042013 16 16 23 WSAStartup success v2 0 100472013 16 16 26 CMD GCFPING to 2 aAA rann 10 04 2073 16 16 26 CHD GCFACKN bm 192 168 422 135 Br 10 04 2013 16 16 26 CMD GCFACKN Psg iw Receive UDF Data Port used for all network communications 1567 3 2 2 Link local addresses Many systems when configured for DHCP will generate a random address if no DHCP server is present This is known as a link local or APIPA address For IPv4 networks it will be in the range 196 254 0 0 to 196 254 255 254 i e on the 196 254 0 0 16 network For IPv6 networks it will be in the fe80 10 network The random host specific part of the address is derived from the unique MAC address so there are unlikely to be conflicts between addresses of systems in networks with small or medium numbers of hosts This is useful when for example visiting a remote EAM A laptop can be plugged directly into the network port of the EAM using a cross over cable if MAN EAM 0003 22 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Initial s
93. 5 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Monitoring Operations The next part of the screen provides controls to initiate calibration The step calibration section provides controls for selection of components duration and amplitude Not all instruments support calibration of individual components Calibrate sensor by injecting a step signal Causes the digitiser to inject a step function of the specified amplitude and duration into the sensor The function consists of a DC component of the specified duration followed by a positive going step another DC component of the specified duration a negative going step and finally another DC component of the specified duration Exact behaviour may vary slightly depending on digitiser firmware version and parameters Sensor component axis All components simultaneously Duration in seconds minimum 60 BO Amplitude of signal as a percentage of full scale deflection range 0 1 100 Calibrate sensor by injecting a step signal Calibrate sensor by injecting broadband noise The broadband noise calibration section provides controls for selection of components duration and amplitude Not all instruments support calibration of individual components Calibrate sensor by Injecting a step signal Calibrate sensor by injecting broadband noise Causes the digitiser to generate and inject into the sensor a calibration signal whose frequency content is uni
94. 50 gcf If you need one file per stream include the 3C sequence Using the format Y SjTSHSMZ C gcf would produce files like 2008315T1445Z 406N2 gcf 2008315T1445Z 406E2 gcf and 2008315T1445Z 40622 gcf Adding a S would add the system ID so SY3jTSHSMZ S C gcf would produce files like 2008315T1445Z EKA 406N2 gcf MAN EAM 0003 147 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Recording and Retrieving Data The miniSEED default Y jT H MZ s c n 1 mseed includes the date the time and the complete SCNL identification The date format matches that used by the GCF recorder This will produce file names like 2008315T14422Z TEST1 BHE NN LL mseed To combine all the channels from a given station simply omit the channel marker from the file name format string 6Y6 TSCHsMZ ss tn 3l mseed 66 99 It is recommended that the is left in place to highlight the omitted channel id This will produce file names like 2008315T1442Z TESTI1 NN LL mseed If you specifically want to include a marker to identify that it contains all channels the use of a lower case string will differentiate it from a regular channel name which is always presented in upper case oLo ll choMA eo all cn olL msecd yields file names like 2008315T1442Z TEST1 all NN LL mseed If you prefer human readable dates rather than using the Julian date oP SY sm 0 H M sSs c sn 1 mseed yields file names like 2008 08 14 14 4
95. 6 55 022 00000003 00000000 LW DEVOE3 100 Signed 32 bit integer samples 100 sps Z2011 03 08T16 55 032 00000003 00000000 LW DEVOES 100 Signed 32 bit integer samples 100 spa 2011 03 08T16 55 04Z 00000003 00000000 LW DEVOE3 100 Signed 32 bit integer samples 100 sps 2011 03 08T16 55 052 00000003 00000000 LW DEVOES 100 Signed 32 bit integer samples 6 100 sp3 2011 03 08T16 55 062 00000003 00000000 LW DEVOES 100 Signed 32 bit integer samples 100 sps Z2O011 03 08T16 55 072 O0000003 00000000 LW DEVOES 100 Signed 32 bit integer samples 100 spa 011 03 08T16 55 082 00000003 00000000 LN DEVOES 100 Signed 32 bit integer samples 100 spa 2011 03 08T16 55 092 00000003 00000000 LW DEVOES 100 Signed 32 bit integer samples 100 sps 2011 03 08T16 55 102 00000003 00000000 LW DEVOES 100 Signed 32 bit integer sampies E 100 sps For sample data each line displays the sample s time stamp the segment ID the channel name in parentheses the sample type and the actual sample value A button at the bottom of the screen allows the display to be refreshed with current data There is also a button which when clicked returns the user to the main GDI Channels Display index page so that another channel can be inspected 14 4 7 Removable disk Use of the mass storage device is described in chapter 11 on page 137 Routine tasks MAN EAM 0003 14 5 1 The directory cleaner The directory cleaner is used to delete files which would othe
96. Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Technical Manual Document No MAN EAM 0003 Designed and manufactured by G ralp Systems Limited 3 Midas House Calleva Park Aldermaston RG7 8EA England Proprietary Notice The information in this document is proprietary to G ralp Systems Limited and may be copied or distributed for educational and academic purposes but may not be used commercially without permission Whilst every effort is made to ensure the accuracy completeness or usefulness of the information in the document G ralp Systems Limited nor any employee assumes responsibility or is liable for for any incidental or consequential damages resulting from the use of this document Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Contents Table of Contents T Prenminar YN LES aranan dock Coenen eee apes amet etn cme eee eee ea 9 Ted HPO Petar y IN OU CG sate setectne N dane deveidy detade ante tetam ones RAA 9 F2 Gon 2 CINQUE S rrara A EA E TEA OEE 9 13 Mama Sand SONATO ra eE E E OOOO 9 VA GON VCMUOUS aisa A A E E E AR 9 Lo ANo on CETMM NOLO CY vissisnaharireirornseotasiedinotuihin e e a a ENO 10 ESO OCHS SO eee a a a maecnema etna 10 For AMS TUe Eei E E A N a ae ea N 10 ko DIe MISE oae a E dk nce E E E E O EE 10 2 Equipment Overview sininen n E E EER 11 De ET SOAK STO e GUO Mg races yd te ec EE PR AEN E Cae AE EEE T A E E 11 Aa Plan mu ENNA G E T O 11 2 2 0 Important information about build
97. C New file Browse No File selected Hide device info blocks A file containing the desired InfoBlock text can be uploaded by clicking the Browse button the web browser s normal upload facility is used Clicking the Hide device info blocks button returns the display to the previous state MAN EAM 0003 102 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Digitiser Configuration 8 1 1 4 Causal filtering low latency and Strong motion mode The next section of the screen controls the filtering mode of the digitiser and optionally enables strong motion calculations Causal filtering mode previously called low latency mode is intended for use with strong motion calculations In this mode the last stage of the digital filtering is changed from finite impulse response FIR acausal to infinite impulse response IIR causal and packets are output each second at twenty samples per second in order to achieve very near real time data These modes cannot be selected unless the first decimator output is set to two hundred samples per second The _ Enable causal filtering button is enabled only when this condition is satisfied CMG DM24 digitisers can operate in normal mode or strong motion mode In strong motion mode additional strong motion packets are generated these carry derived and resultant data Samples 200 sps il i E j E i
98. Dump data 100 ee 1 realtime fi View details T Dump data 100 amann i realtime View details Dump data of the channels together with The Active segments column shows details of data currently being received A segment is a contiguous sequence of blocks so any data being back filled always requires separate segments For each channel you have the option of viewing detailed information about the data or the data itself by use of the View details and Dump data buttons MAN EAM 0003 244 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Monitoring Operations 14 4 6 1 View details The View details button displays the following screen Channel LW DEVOE2 details Channel information GDI channel name LW DEVOE2 Sample format Signed 32 bit integer samples Sample rate 100 samples second Segments Segments are continuous runs of time series sampled data Segments never contain gaps A segment is considered Realtime if it has the most recent timestamp of all segments and if the last data for it was received less than 5 minutes ago according to the system clock Otherwise the segment is considered to be Backfill List of active segments gment time 2011 03 087T16 51 197 il Realtime Realtime Locked Differential Jus Last update at 2011 03 08T16 51 197 Clock status Fix 3D Location 51 360858 N 1 163516 W elevation 119 000m GPS status
99. Extra ip addr arguments Used to tune the operation of the network interface A non standard broadcast address can be specified by entering broadcast broadcast address For other settings that can be used here please see http linux die net man 8 ip MAN EAM 0003 73 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Networking Configuration Nameserver Used to specify the IP address of the DNS server for your network This field must be set correctly before internet firmware upgrades can be used A secondary DNS server s address can be added in the Backup nameserver field Default route gateway Populate with the IP address of the gateway router for access to other networks or to the Internet This field must be set correctly before internet firmware upgrades can be used IP route arguments Used to modify the invocation of the ip route add command in order to e g set the route metric The options that can be set here are mostly highly technical and should rarely be required Please see http Alinux die net man 8 ip for more information 7 1 2 4 IP aliasing IP aliasing is used to add extra addresses to this interface a technique known as multi homing By default the table displays three blank rows but should you need more complete the first three and submit the form it will be re drawn with extra blank rows Alternatively clicking the button on any row will open a new row In the same way rows can be d
100. F headers by appropriating bits from the System ID which must therefore be chosen to be five or fewer characters long See the note at the end of this section for more information The InfoBlock should be changed to reflect the amended System ID but the gain figure taken from the calibration document should be used unchanged regardless of the variable gain setting chosen Similarly the calvals file in Scream should not be changed other than to reflect the System ID Scream can deduce the variable gain settings in use from the GCF block headers and automatically take account of these during calibration operations To change the gain using the web interface select Configuration System setup Now select the digitiser from the list Once connected scroll down to the Connected devices The following section appears Input gain settings 2 input gain x1 unity N input gain x1 unity E input gain x1 unity x input gain x1 unity Device info blocks This table is extended to show three additional components when a seven channel digitiser is detected From here the gain can be set individually for each component If the Submit button is clicked the changes will be stored in the digitiser module s configuration but will not take effect until the module is rebooted If an immediate change is required the Submitchanges amp Rebootdigitiser button should be used instead To change the gain using the
101. Firmware Platinum Overview File Edit View Terminal Help EAM Configuration System Changes have been made Changes have been made to the previous form You can choose to discard the changes and continue with the next form or you can return to these changes in order to save them Make your selection with the buttons below che Thanges gt lt Discard changes gt Return Select discard changes to ignore any parameters that you have altered and continue to the home menu or select lt return to changes to review the form and if desired submit it before navigating away from it The following table provides a summary of all keystrokes that can be used when filling or navigating forms MAN EAM 0003 40 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Platinum Overview Keystrokes used in forms Keystroke Used for Cursor to next field or if in an activated drop down menu field next item in drop down menu 5 i Cursor to next field or if in a text field move edit cursor one character to the right Cursor to previous field or if in an activated drop down menu field previous item in drop down Cursor to previous field or if in a text field move edit cursor one character to the left Activate or deactivate list field or bottom line button space Toggle check box Go to the home menu or if there already exit gconfig p afol z C E D Iy Z O 5 E a
102. ING RWOP KAM O rcii o EEE re datrounaceuh daavhendeactandensbanteasedeenatdet 18 SMITA SOLU Daancestncuwentarceea tee vies sie tae cited a tat ouetie sie atntien aa senmuntadeuaw teased OA 20 Soul Nona ya iG hic alo s SoM re ten Rr err an E ee Teena Mee NTEN Nee Marton Cn Renn any ir meni y re en 20 MAN EAM 0003 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware 3 2 Connecting to the Network PoOTt ccceesceccssseecceeeeececeecceeseesecesaeeseesaeseseuseaeeenens 20 372 0 DHGP dssienhed addis eS ense sud ceca a T EEE 20 22t Eink localaddress OS crno n a a a 22 322 ASSEN ea Stalic IP addes Sate a A E A NETO 23 323 GONNECINE tothe WED NTETACEs asisscaeisacveuinndeneiara E ET 26 3 2 4 Connecting to the command line using SSH ss sesseessssrersssrerserssesserserssessees 27 3 0 CONNeCINEG to tie oeral POPU aa ENSE OON 30 330 MUSING DS CRC AM aaa a a a alee alecertnnca 31 a1 Usines a ermine mt ALOT ee E E AAR 31 Dea LOCODE II ainan A S TATE E T E ETE 32 4 Planum VOR VIC WW arocciosnano a a E ER 33 Al VA TOO UCU OM eene a EEEE EREE TEE 33 AD USME EVO WV CD FINE OL ACC aE T A suGdeielawasabacalen tye 33 AAO NIVE On AIGCS sian vigncdmsisectsseueas anes vediauedt arenarius E teas 33 4 2 1 Display Options and form submission sssssesssssseseessssrerssssrrresssreressseeressees 34 4 2 2 Navigation instructions in the manual s ssesseesesseesssersersserserserssersersereseess 35 4 3 Using the com
103. IPv4 as in the above example 3 2 1 2 Address discovery Scream s Detect servers tool Start with the EAM turned off Then from Scream s Network control window select the My Client tab Right click in the server list box and select Detect servers Scream will then start monitoring DHCP traffic on the local network Power up the EAM and allow it a minute to boot When Scream notices a DHCP negotiation with an appropriate MAC address it will display the allocated IP address in the window You can add the EAM to Scream s list of servers by clicking the appropriate button MAN EAM 0003 21 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Initial set up 3 2 1 3 Address discovery GCFPing Scream s GCFPing feature sends a specially formatted broadcast packet to all hosts on the local network Any GCF servers that see this packet should respond with a GCF acknowledgement packet GCFACKN Scream displays the IP addresses associated with all acknowledgement packets that it receives To use this feature add a new UDP server with an IP address of 255 255 255 255 Right click the server and select GCFPING from the context menu A window will appear as shown below if the ping packet is acknowledged In the control pane at the bottom right of the main window a GCFACKN line will be printed for every address that responded to the GCFPING In the example below you can see responses from 192 168
104. L i Bi hy ot ae ae i Enable interface x lt a t 14 Firid When the value is no disabled or otherwise de selected the field is shown as blank dij wW i hi LIS LWI i atl Enable interface i 4 3 5 Drop down menus Drop down menus are where the operator must choose one option from a list Drop down menus are identified by surrounding chevrons lt and gt MTU Configuration method lt DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol RUC nnti ree To change the setting of a drop down menu field move the cursor on the field and activate the menu by using the key Enact on submi Media speed ty Static MTU DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Configuration Unconfigured but powered up possible VLAN trunk ea DHCP options Powered off Extra dheped arguments j MAN EAM 0003 38 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Platinum Overview While the menu is active you can move between options using the the al a l gt and keys the currently selected option is shown highlighted When the desired option is selected press the key again to confirm the choice and de activate the menu 4 3 6 Using forms Most of the configuration forms have on line help available This can be turned on for the current page by using the lt ip button displayed at the bottom of the form The help text will appear in blue interleaved with the form itself Help can also be a
105. Last update at 2011 03 08T16 51 197Z Channel flags clear Channel flags anne ae Last update at 2011 03 08T16 51 192Z i Metadata is provided by the acquisition software module Any metadata field may be overridden in the configuration of the goi_base module List of channel metadata sample units digital counts 4 terminal LW DEVO acquisition device Port B com ponent E gcf digitiser type CMG DM24mk3 instrument type high gain seismometer instrument id LW DEVO gcf tap ttable lookup 27 Name The top section shows the channel name sample format and sample rate as seen on the previous screen The centre section shows detailed information decoded from the packet header for each active segment The final section shows the metadata associated with the stream derived from the configuration parameters of the relevant input module MAN EAM 0003 245 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware 14 5 Monitoring Operations 14 4 6 2 Data dump Check boxes are available to toggle the display of both metadata and sample data These can be changed at any time and the Restart dump button used to refresh the display GDI status Channel dump for LW DEVOES Please note if this is a status channel there may be little or no data shown here Show meta data Showsamples Restart dump Hew chanmel ID 00000003 Signed 32 bit integer
106. Ms When upgrading a CMG DCM the upgrade process should be carried out twice The second run will resolve problems with broken symlinks During the first upgrade run you may see several errors about Directory not empty and references to broken files These are normal and the second upgrade invocation is designed to resolve these problems and leave the system in a consistent state Determining the current firmware level To determine the current firmware version from the web interface select Summary System status MAN EAM 0003 52 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Platinum Firmware Upgrades 5 3 and click on the Linux system tab The screen displays the current version information GCF compressor Default instance g NETDM C728 NTP Linux system Jump to top Linux system 100 D System uptime 22 days 02 58 _ Load Average 0 06 2 Som PIANINA nea 132 100 allt ee aie 8 100 _ Software olideliony label nue stable D Software build number 12642 ma UME a ieee bork pill r F 108 GPIO sangs peli3 system temperature 35 062 C 100 2 System voltage 12 82V 100 system current 0 0984 100 system power 1 26W 100 In the example above the version is 12642 The same information can be obtained at the command line by using gconfig and selecting Version and serial number information If you j
107. NTP subsystem can provide NMEA output via a serial port which can then be used to synchronise an additional digitiser This however is optional and no serial port is dedicated to this use To configure the NTP subsystem see section 7 4 on page 84 To configure NMEA as an NTP clock source see section 9 6 on page 124 To configure NMEA output see section 9 7 on page 125 9 5 Using NTP with Cylindrical Digitisers T Note Where GPS is available you should always synchronise the EAM to GPS via the digitiser s RTSTATUS packets rather than to NTP Please see the discussion of synchronisation options available with Cylindrical Digitisers in the previous section MAN EAM 0003 123 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Digitiser Synchronisation 9 6 The data flow when NTP is used as the primary clock source is illustrated below HOd 4JOMJON To configure the NTP subsystem see section 7 4 on page 84 To configure NMEA output see section 9 7 on page 125 Note The external GPS connector is disconnected when Port C of the EAM is set to NMEA Out and connected to the digitiser s GPS input in all other cases Configuring NMEA as an NTP clock source To configure NTP to use NMEA as a clock source two steps are required First tick the Acquire time from connected GPS check box in the NTP configuration page as described in section 7 4 on page 84 Secondly configure the relev
108. Platinum Firmware Receiving Data Debug port It is possible to copy all incoming data verbatim to a network port which can be specified in the text field This is an advanced debugging technique beyond the scope of this manual Port name override Allows the operator to specify a descriptive name for this data source If left blank it will be labelled with the IP address and service number of the source device and this label will appear in for example the GDI channels display and the network tree in Scream GDI multiplexer In most configurations all data from all inputs is sent to a single multiplexor which then feeds all outputs as described in section 6 on page 65 For more complex configurations it is possible to configure multiple multiplexers each with their own set of input and output services In these situations the drop down menu can be used to select a multiplexer instance with which to associate this receiver The menu offers a list of currently configured multiplexers 10 3 Data from Scream servers The acquisition module has the ability to receive data over the network from Scream servers Data can be received from a number of Scream servers using a single Scream client To set up a Scream client on the acquisition module select Configuration Services GCF Or Configuration All options System services GCF To configure a Scream client from the command line start gconfig and select System
109. Platinum Firmware Transmitting Data General Data Out block recovery protocol settings General settings ACK NAK timeout 150 ms Time to wait for ACK NAK before transmitting next block in milliseconds Mode Direct simple transmission with link error correction but no backfill Block transmission mode Allow terminal v Allow access to configuration terminal through this link ACK NAK timeout Populated with an integer value which specifies the number of milliseconds the server should wait for an acknowledgement packet before transmitting the next block Mode The drop down menu controls the BRP transmission mode of the server At present the only available choice is Direct simple transmission with link error correction but no backfill Future implementations will offer additional options Allow terminal If checked the server will allow remote clients access to the source digitiser s command line for configuration purposes Filtering Data Out block recovery protocol settings Filtering Output filtering This section allows you to choose whether to transmit all GCF blocks as they are received from the GCF convertor or only a subset Output type All blocks Select which types of block to transmit Max sample rate samples per second lf filtering by sample rate the maximum sample rate to send if filtering by channel name the channels to
110. Submitchanges amp Rebootdigitiser MAN EAM 0003 105 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Digitiser Configuration Once the digitiser has rebooted a new section appears on the screen as Decimate Output mz Nie x za nalee shown below m Causal filter eaves oo fo fo of 0 o eames The Source drop down menu allows you to select the tap that will be used as the input to the causal filter which need not therefore be the final filter in the decimation chain The Decimate by drop down menu allows you to select the divisor implemented by the filter The Output check boxes allow you to select which components to output via the causal filter The causal filter may be disabled by clicking the Disable causal filter button then scrolling to the bottom of the page and clicking Submitchanges amp Reboot digitiser 8 1 1 6 Compression mode Compression mode Compression mode Controls how samples are packed affecting both data latency and line utilisation GCF packets contain a 32 bit starting value and then a series of differences between consecutive samples When the input signal is relatively quiet these differences can often be expressed as 8 bit quantities When the input signal includes large transients the differences are transmitted as 32 bit quantities For intermediate level signals 16 bit values can be used This is know
111. The failed link is regularly re tried and when communication is re established the data are re routed back to the lower cost link The CMG NAM acquires data from Scream servers e g CMG 6TD or CMG 3ESPCDE and the data are stored locally on an optional RAID disk array with up to 2 TB capacity MAN EAM 0003 17 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Equipment Overview CMG NAM PTT A AO The CMG NAM can also act as a data server to remote clients supporting GCF SCREAM server EARTHWORM via scream2ew ANTELOPE via Guralp2orb CD1 0 CD1 1 and SEEDLINK It is also possible to use data filtering by channel name and or sample rate in such a way that should it become necessary to use the higher cost link only high priority data e g samples resulting from an activated trigger are sent across this link while lower priority data are enqueued until the low cost link becomes available again 2 6 6 CD1 1 Networking authenticated signed data Internet CMG EAM eo ar CMG NAM CMG DM24SxEAM MAN EAM 0003 18 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Equipment Overview Platinum firmware has support for CD1 1 frame generation and forwarding with strong authentication provided by an optional embedded Spyrus hardware encryption device allowing CMG EAMs and CMG NAMs to form the basis of a secure CD1 1 network Data transmitted in CD1 1 format use stro
112. To configure this PPP connection monitor from the web interface select Configuration Services Network pppd watchdog PPP link watchdog or Configuration All options System services Network pppd watchdog PPP link watchdog To configure a PPP connection monitor from the command line start gconfig select Services from the top level menu You must create a separate watchdogs for each PPP connection if you are running multiple PPP instances This screen allows you to select any of the existing watchdog services for re configuration or to create a new watchdog service 7 7 4 Configurable parameters in simple mode The configurable parameters for the PPP daemon watchdog are contained in a single form MAN EAM 0003 94 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Networking Configuration PPP daemon watchdog User PPP link watchdog instance 1 description User label for the service instance Enable r Enable the service at system startup Delete Delete this service instance Daemon startup 30 5 Length of time in seconds for the PPP daemon to start i delay Test bin ping c 5 gstm guralp com command Command to run to test the link is active Time 30 5 between f i Length of time in seconds between test runs Reboot fail 30 count No of failures before system is rebooted empty for never 4 User description If you are config
113. UL TXL form string start 2011 03 13T12 40 302 form string end 2011 03 14T12 40 302Z form string value Data Out power power form string value Data Out power voltage form string action Get data digest user root rootme http eam3057 cgi bin envirolog cgi In this example the device serial number is eam3057 The data are output as text The start and end times are 24 hours apart There are two environmental values selected The username and password are set to the system defaults Copying the generated code into ta erminal emulator connected to the EAM will output the file in the same way that the Get data button does on the environmental log page If the cURL command is to be used for automated scheduled data extraction some editing is required Contact G ralp Systems for assistance on how to tailor the command for your specific requirements 14 4 4 Extract MiniSEED records The MiniSEED compressor gdi2miniseed uses a ring buffer to store miniSEED records after conversion from GDI The default size of the buffer is MAN EAM 0003 238 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Monitoring Operations 64 M but can be changed from the compressor s configuration screen as described in section 12 2 1 on page 180 Records are never erased from the ring buffer the oldest records are over written when the buffer becomes full In a steady state configuration therefore a fixed num
114. a and v keys and Enter to select from the list that is presented This will launch a minicom session see section 16 3 on page 33 allowing you to communicate with the digitiser terminal For example Welcome to minicom 2 5 OPTIONS Compiled on Nov 11 2011 16 08 39 Port dev tts 0 Press CTRL A Z for help on special keys NETDM C72800 CMG STDCommand Mode blocks in buffer 256 blocks free Guralp Systems Ltd DM FW v 106 mgs 28 05 13 Build 579 Bh 1 Minicom 2 5 If the session closes due to a time out or you close it manually by issuing the GO command then you will see the message Killed by signal 15 and minicom will exit shortly thereafter MAN EAM 0003 229 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Monitoring Operations 14 3 3 Upgrading digitiser firmware The latest digitiser firmware for each type of digitiser is included in the Platinum distribution so no Internet connection is necessary for the following tasks You may wish first to upgrade the Platinum firmware see section 5 on page 51 so as to be sure that you have the latest digitiser firmware available 14 3 3 1 Upgrading via the web interface To upgrade the firmware of a digitiser using the web interface select Configuration Instruments Port A instrument or any other page under Configuration Instruments The system will check the version of the firmware currently loaded If a newer version is available an alert
115. a storage devices They can prevent the loss of data in the event of a single drive MAN EAM 0003 234 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Monitoring Operations failure The RAID array item on the Control menu will only be displayed on CMG NAMs with RAID fitted It displays a page which reports the status of and allows simple control of the fitted RAID array The status of swap partitions are also reported on this page RAID array control RAID status Personalities raidi raidid mai active raidi sdbi ij sdai 0 15936 blocks 2 2 UU mast active raidi sdb3 ij sda3 0 956959808 blocks 2 2 UU unused devices lt none gt Swap status Filename Type Size Used Priority fdev sdaz Partition 249000 O0 1 fdev sdb2 Partition 249000 O Disk management m Fail disk This option allows you to mark a disk as faulty It will be removed from active use and you can then physically unplug and replace it Note that some CMG NAM systems are not capable of detecting newly inserted disks and you will need to reboot after inserting the new disk WARNING Only fail a disk if you are sure of your action as it could render the system irrepairable Only fail one disk at a time and allow the RAID array to rebuild itself onto a newly inserted disk before failing another dev sda Select disk to fail Faildisk 14 4 Tools Menu 14 4 1 CD1 1 log analyser The CD1 1 log analy
116. a terminal exposes the digitiser s console allowing arbitrary commands to be sent In addition the dm24 upgrade tool see section 8 2 3 on page 115 allows the firmware of attached digitisers to be upgraded from the command line of the acquisition device 8 2 1 adc command The adc command tool allows a number of instrument mass control commands to be issued to attached digitisers For further details see section 14 3 2 2 on page 227 8 2 2 data terminal Platinum provides a tool data terminal which allows direct access to the command line of any serially attached digitiser This gives the greatest level of control but also involves the most complexity Interactions with the digitiser s command line are beyond the scope of this document please consult the relevant digitiser manual for information on this topic This section discusses use of the data terminal tool only To invoke the tool enter the command data terminal You will be presented with a menu listing all digitisers to which a connection can be made MAN EAM 0003 114 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Digitiser Configuration File Edit View Terminal Help Select instrument for terminal mode W DDDD LW EEEE lt CanceL gt Select the required digitiser from the menu The data terminal program will suspend any service running on the associated port and start a minicom session with the correct communications parameters al
117. able displays three blank rows but should you need more complete the first three and submit the form it will be redrawn with extra blank rows Alternatively clicking the button on any row will open a new row In the same way rows can be deleted by clicking the corresponding button Network interface wlanO IP aliasing IP aliasing or multihoming can be configured by supplying additional IP addresses in this table les IP and CIDR The address should be entered in CIDR format where the address is followed by a slash and then the number of bits defining the netmask e g 192 168 0 1 24 for IPV4 or 2001 db8 32 for IPV6 Broadcast Enter the broadcast address to be associated with this address on the interface IP addr arguments This field can be used to tune the operation of the network interface For settings that can be used here please see http linux die net man 8 ip 7 2 2 4 Extra routes Routes are used to add extra network and host routes to allow access to networks other than those connected via the default router specified earlier or to force packets to traverse a particular route despite the default router setting By default the table displays three blank rows but should you need more complete the first three and submit the form it will be redrawn with extra blank rows Alternatively clicking the button on any row will open MAN EAM 0003 80 Issue E February 20
118. ace August 2011 C Revised firmware mirror server instructions Added PPP watchdog expert mode details May 2011 B Hardware information updated Update of Platinum overview System status details updated New section on U3 USB Formatting updates Dec 2010 A New document MAN EAM 0003 288 Issue E February 2014
119. ackup backup ssh root platinum2 config backup restore no network from the target system ssh TOOPeSOUrCEe Conltig backup b config Dackup N where source is the hostname of the system to be cloned The argument N prevents the network configuration on the target machine from being over written 4 4 9 Technical details Stored configuration backups are gzipped tar volumes containing all configuration files from the host system They are each around 33 kilobytes in size MAN EAM 0003 49 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Platinum Overview Automatically saved configurations are stored in the directory var lib config backup auto and a system supplied directory cleaner instance deletes all but the most recent fifty files Manually saved configuration backups are stored in var lib config backup The command line interface config backup displays full usage details if invoked with help Program susaGge config backup backup options filename config backup restore options filename config backup examine options filename config backup diff filenamel filename2 OPCIONS D help Display this screen V version Display program version number D backup Perrorm a configuration backup r restore Restore configuration from a backup X examine Examine a backup file prints comment 7 SSCL cE Compare differences between 2 backups GuULeL Inh
120. acquisition module Note When using removable mass storage devices from acquisition modules and CMG DCMs with PCs you may need to provide a power supply for the mass storage device When using a six circuit powered IEEE1394 FireWire interface the mass storage device can draw its power from the host PC When connected to a four circuit un powered FireWire interface such as Sony i Link external power needs to be applied as described below Power also needs to be supplied when using the USB interface A power supply of between 4 5V and 30V DC should be connected to the 2 1 mm barrel connector uppermost in the picture The central pin of the connector should be connected to the positive supply line IMPORTANT Do not connect anything to the larger barrel connector if fitted This was used for the heater and temperature sensor on units manufactured before 2013 On later units it is replaced with a clear plastic window which allows easy viewing of the internal diagnostic LEDs MAN EAM 0003 137 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Recording and Retrieving Data 11 2 To prepare a mass storage device using the web interface select Tools Removable disk Format disk After a delay while the mass storage device powers up the following screen will appear Removable disk Format and partition disks If you have accessed the disk within the last minute or so or if it is in use b
121. act G ralp Systems for further information Platinum Firmware All acquisition modules use G ralp Systems Platinum firmware for configuration and control of the following Data acquisition Data processing Data recording e Data forwarding via serial port or over IP networks using a variety of protocols such as SEEDlink CD1 1 WIN QSCD Quick Seismic Characteristic Data and GSMS G ralp Seismic Monitoring System Network communication over Ethernet Modem Wireless and Bluetooth as required The firmware is accessed through a web interface or command line interface as detailed in section 3 on page 20 2 2 1 Important information about build 10 000 and above Different versions of Platinum firmware are identified by their build number This manual covers builds numbers greater than 10 000 Build 10 000 and all subsequent builds differ significantly from previous versions and the important notes in the firmware upgrade chapter section 5 1 on page 51 should be read before upgrading from earlier versions Users choosing to remain at an earlier build should continue to refer to MAN EAM 0001 which describes the operation of Platinum build 3801 MAN EAM 0003 11 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Equipment Overview 2 3 Platinum systems 2 3 1 Embedded Acquisition Module The Embedded Acquisition Module EAM range consists of data recording communications and control
122. ameters are used only in a static configuration IP address ii in IPv4 or IPv6 format with CIDR format netmask see help Default route gateway The IP address of the gateway router for access to other networks IP address Only used if the Configuration method drop down menu is set to Static The address should be entered in CIDR format where the address is followed by a slash and then the number of bits defining the netmask e g 192 168 0 1 24 for IPV4 or 2001 db8 32 for IPV6 For more information about CIDR please refer to Default route gateway Should be populated with the IP address of the default router If more complicated routing configurations are required these can be entered in expert mode 7 1 2 Configurable parameters in expert mode When in expert mode new fields are available on the Interface and Static IP tabs and there are three new tabs DCHP options IP aliasing and Routes 7 1 2 1 Interface Expert Media type speed This drop down menu offers the following options for controlling the communication speed and duplex mode of the network link MAN EAM 0003 I2 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Networking Configuration Automatically detected and set Restrict speed to 10Mbps Recommended to save power Fixed 100baseTx full duplex Fixed 100baseTx half duplex Fixed 10baseTx full duplex Fixed 10baseTx half duplex MTU Allows the Max
123. an be added if required Enter the user name and password Note that nothing will display on the screen when typing the password You will then be presented with a shell prompt which will accept commands as shown in the image below eam999 login root Password eam999 The output may vary slightly due to the configuration of the unit In particular the acquisition module name as displayed in the prompt eam999 in this example will be different MAN EAM 0003 32 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Platinum Overview 4 4 1 Platinum Overview Introduction 4 2 All key acquisition module configuration and control tasks can be carried out either from the web interface or from the command line The web interface presents some additional options not available from the command line Some of these are merely short cuts into the main configuration system while others offer additional monitoring and diagnostic facilities Configuration of attached digitisers can be carried out using the web interface but not from the command line although access to the digitiser s command line is available The command line interface also supports a number of advanced facilities which are not available via the main configuration system these are mostly diagnostic tools which are not required for normal operation Using the web interface The web interface is split into two frames Main menu Home S
124. and other manufacturers Sa 4 E e Powerin s00 s38v0 OSS D External switched power oupa Wiring details for the compatible socket _08 04S as seen from the cable end i e during assembly MAN EAM 0003 281 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Appendices 16 5 10 Cylinder Ethernet This is a standard 6 pin mil spec plug conforming to MIL DTL 26482 formerly MIL C 26482 A typical part number is 02E 10 06P although the initial 02E varies with manufacturer Suitable mating connectors have part numbers like _10 06S and are available from Amphenol ITT Cannon and other manufacturers Data transmit ve RJ45 pin 2 Wiring details for the compatible socket _10 06S as seen from the cable end i e during assembly MAN EAM 0003 282 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Appendices 16 5 11 Cylinder Data This is a standard 10 pin mil spec plug conforming to MIL DTL 26482 formerly MIL C 26482 A typical part number is O2E 12 10P although the initial 02E varies with manufacturer Suitable mating connectors have part numbers like _ _12 10S and are available from Amphenol ITT Cannon and other manufacturers e B Power mpu s1010 33606 OSS piroees SOS Wiring details for the compatible socket _12 10S as seen from the cable end i e during assembly MAN EAM 0003 283 Issue E Februa
125. ant serial port as an NMEA input To do this using the web interface select Configuration Serial ports Or Configuration All options Serial ports To configure an NMEA input from the command line start gconfig and select Serial ports from the top level menu Select a serial port from then click NMEA output settings MAN EAM 0003 124 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Digitiser Synchronisation 9 7 9 6 1 Configurable parameters Port function Set to NMEA in Receive GPS data for NTP Port speed Set to 4800 Click Submit to save the changes Configuring NMEA output Platinum can generate simulated GPS data NMEA 0183 to synchronise a connected digitiser s clock In this case the internal clock of the acquisition module is used as a reference for the digitiser In order to provide a sufficiently accurate time stamp the clock must be controlled using NTP See section 7 4 on page 84 To configure NMEA Output using the web interface select Configuration Serial ports or Configuration All options Serial ports To configure NMEA Output from the command line start gconfig and select Serial ports from the top level menu Next select the serial port from which you want to output NMEA Only one port can be used for NMEA output at any time the timing constraints are such that a single processor cannot produce the pulse per second PPS signal on t
126. ap 1 50sps carats v Sl continuous vl Delete Tap 3 1sps Refresh Enable triggers Add new output Streams from the second sensor are enabled or disabled by ticking or clearing the check boxes in the columns labelled Z2 N2 and E2 An X2 stream will appear in this table when a seven or eight channel digitiser is detected but it is not available on a seven channel digitiser T Notes 1 The second sensor is assumed to be an accelerometer No provision is made for mass control locking unlocking and centring of SENSOR 2 2 The Sensor type drop down menu in the digitiser configuration page refers to the first sensor only SENSOR 2 is assumed to be an accelerometer 3 InfoBlock 1 refers to SENSOR 1 and InfoBlock 2 refers to SENSOR 2 Values entered in these InfoBlocks are passed to Scream which will apply them to the correct data streams 4 Multiplexor outputs M8 Z mass position M9 N S mass position and MA E W mass position refer to SENSOR 1 only 5 When configuring triggering input streams are available from both sensors at the selected tap When a trigger condition is detected configured outputs from both sensors are enabled regardless of which sensor generated the trigger MAN EAM 0003 118 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Digitiser Configuration MAN EAM 0003 119 Issue E February 2014 Acquisiti
127. applied to the specified tap output before being used for trigger input but does not affect the tap output if it is also used to generate continuous streams MAN EAM 0003 109 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Digitiser Configuration The periods over which the short term and long term averages are computed along with the triggering ratio itself can be altered by changing values in the table The check boxes next to each component are used to enable or disable the use of that component s output in the STA LTA triggering algorithm The tap to be used as input should be selected from the Trigger input drop down menu All configured taps are available regardless of whether they have been selected for continuous output or not The check boxes labelled with component designators are used to include or exclude the associated component from the triggering algorithm If one is ticked a trigger will be activated if that component s instantaneous output exceeds the value entered into the Triggering level field in the same row Full coverage of external triggering is beyond the scope of this manual and the interested reader is referred to the relevant digitiser manual The pre trigger time and post trigger time drop down menus control the amount of data transmitted around each trigger period The options offered range from 5 seconds to 4 minutes The 0 seconds setting disables the feature The Addnewtiggerta
128. aptive mode etc User description Sets the name of the service this should be set to a meaningful name for the data that it will be receiving such as the IP or hostname of the network digitiser User label Identify the particular client instance in log files optional Enable Causes this service to start automatically when the system is re booted If this check box is cleared the service will need to be started manually from the Control Services menu Delete Causes the configuration for this instance to be removed from the system when the form is submitted Remote Server Specify the hostname or IP address of the network digitiser Remote service Specify the port name or number that the digitiser is transmitting on Allow disconnects If checked the instance will attempt to automatically recover from lost connections by trying to reconnect to the server Disable rewind If checked no attempts will be made to request missing data blocks This should only be selected if the server is unable to fulfil such requests MAN EAM 0003 132 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Receiving Data 10 2 2 Configurable parameters in expert mode A number of additional configuration parameters are available by clicking the Expert button at the bottom of the form Log file Path to log file Leave blank to use syslog Log level important notices Minimum severity level of
129. are not compatible so the standard upgrade method cannot be used to move from build 3801 or earlier to the current build Performing a standard upgrade on a system running build 3801 will check and repair any corrupt files but will not install the latest firmware An extra step is required to install the latest firmware This is fully described in section 5 1 on page 51 Once you have performed this step subsequent upgrades will behave as expected 16 4 6 Regaining access when locked out It is on some units possible to configure the network and serial ports in such a way as to make reconfiguration apparently impossible This section provides directions for regaining control of such units On cylindrical digitisers and instruments with integrated DAS such as the CMG 5TDE the GPIO connector provides a dedicated serial console running at 38 400 Baud which cannot be reconfigured The GPIO connector on these units can therefore always be used to achieve command line access On peli cased acquisition modules the 9 pin D connector under the lid is intended as a dedicated console connector and is preconfigured to run at 38 400 Baud It is recommended that the port is not reconfigured for other purposes but there is nothing in the firmware to prevent this so it is still possible to inadvertently mis configure the system There are two common reasons why one might not be able to use a serial port incorrect port function and incorre
130. ate new service instance 12 1 3 1 Configurable parameters in simple mode The configurable parameters for the GCF BRP network server have four tabbed pages in simple mode General Network Protocol and Filter General Network BRP server settings General setting User description GCF BRP network server instance 1 User label for the server instance User label Network BRP out 0 Application label used for identification in logs Enable Enable this BRP receiver at system startup Delete Delete this BRP receiver instance User description Used to rename the service in configuration menus to something more indicative of its function User label Used to provide a shorter but still potentially more useful name for use in log files Enable Causes this service to start automatically when the system is re booted if checked If this check box is cleared the service will need to be started manually from the Control Services menu Delete Causes the configuration for this instance to be removed from the system if ticked when the form is submitted Network Network BRP server settings Network parameters Server hostname IP address The hostname or IP address the server will bind to Leave empty for all Server port service name 10002 The TCP and UDP port number or service name to listen on MAN EAM 0003 170 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Tran
131. ation shows the currently configured continuous and triggered outputs with components in columns and taps in rows The number of output columns increases when using seven channel digitisers Extra taps can be added with the Addnewoutput button The rates available at each tap are dependant on the rate selected at the previous tap the base sampling rate is 2000 samples per second and each tap can be configured to MAN EAM 0003 107 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Digitiser Configuration divide this by either 2 4 or 5 The available rates are shown in the table below along with a way to configure each although there are sometimes very many different ways to configure any given rate Desired Intermediate output rate steps 4 400 100 20 5 400 100 20 8 400 200 40 10 400 100 50 16 400 80 20 400 100 25 400 100 40 400 200 50 400 250 80 400 100 400 125 500 200 400 250 500 400 tap 1 500 tap 1 1000 tap 1 The triggering settings are normally hidden but can be revealed by clicking the Enable triggers or View trigger settings button The following extra dialogues are displayed MAN EAM 0003 108 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Digitiser Configuration m Output triggering STA LTA aioe ERREA Trigger input Tap 1 100sps 5Hz to 45Hz Enable Short Term Long Term Tri
132. ber of records covering a fixed time period are always present in the buffer If 512 byte records have been configured as required for SEEDlink a tool is available to extract some or all of these records and either download them using the operator s browser or write them to a file as a MiniSEED volume Such files can then be manually copied from the system to removable storage using the cp or mv commands or to another system over the network using scp or rsync for example To extract MiniSEED records using the web interface select Tools Extract MiniSEED records The following screen is displayed Extract Mini SEED Records Extract Mini SEED records into a file Start time 2011 05 06 T 00 00 002 Start time also accepts format YYYY MM DD HH MM S End time 2011 03 08 123 59 597 End time also accepts format YYYY MM DD HH MM 35 may be blank Selector list for unistation List of selectors separated by spaces Stream list for multistation Stream definition example format GB_LON HHZ HHE GB_WIN BH Compressor Mini SEED compressor Default instance Instance Select data source Filename tmp miniseed out Path of file to output records to will be created if it doesn t exist Leave blank for immediate download Start time and End time Used to prevent the extraction of records whose timestamps fall outside the specified interval The End time text box may be left blank in which case data up to the most re
133. c all channels are compressed and named automatically Select how channels are selected for compression and named GSLA 106123 1061 HH2 G8 03 GSLA 10612Z2 1061 HHZ GS 02 SLA 1061N2 1061 HAN GS 02 Bg GSLA 1061E2 1061 HHE GS 02 GSLA 1061N3 1061 HHN GS 03 GSLA 1061E3 1061 HHE GS 03 The Naming mode drop down menu offers three choices e Automatic all channels are compressed and named automatically This mode offers no filtering and provides system generated names for each channel forwarded by gdi base e Semi automatic all channels are compressed names may be mapped below In this mode one or more of the channels may be renamed by adding entries to the mapping table If you wish to use this mode it may be useful first to run the system in automatic mode for a short while this will populate the mapping table with an entry for each currently known channel which can serve as the basis for your own mapping table e Manual only channels named below are compressed This mode offers both channel filtering and name mapping If you wish to use this mode it may be useful first to run the system in automatic mode for a short while this will populate the mapping table with an entry for each currently known channel which can serve as the basis for your own mapping table Clicking the button on any row will open a new row In the same way rows can be deleted by clicking the corresponding bu
134. cache hit Wo IF you do not trust this host hit Cancel to abandon the connection This is normal simply click to dismiss the dialogue but if you are ever asked this again it means that either the host key of the acquisition module has changed perhaps because of a firmware upgrade or there is a network address conflict or worse a security problem on your network You will now be prompted for a login name the default is root Type this at the prompt and press the ENTER key You will next be prompted for a MAN EAM 0003 29 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Initial set up 3 3 password the default password is rootme Note that no characters will be echoed to the screen as you type the password A 10 99 1 5 PuTTY login asi root roothiOo 99 1 5 s password Once connected you will be presented with a shell prompt which is ready to accept commands The shell prompt contains the serial number of the acquisition module When you are finished with your SSH session and want to disconnect type exit at the command line or Ctrl i p PuTTY allows you to save multiple sessions along with a default login identity and screen colours for each See the PuTTY manual for more details Note If you plan to use ssh regularly to communicate with a acquisition module you can configure the system to bypass the password prompt when logging in from a list of pre authorised computer us
135. cccsseeeeeceeeeeeeceeeaaaeeseeesaaaensees 126 9 6 0 Configurable paramettess ccccccssssscccccsseeecceceeesescceeeaeesccessueescesseaaseseeesaanees 127 O27 AGOMIC OUTING NMEA OPU aeran a EE 127 9 7 0 Configurable parameters in simple MOE ccccccccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeecaeeeeaeeseeas 127 9 7 1 Configurable parameters in expert mode sss sessssrrssssssersssssrrressresserssersses 128 T0 Rece me Dalazen E ameseanuseaniaenaees 130 T0 GCF Fon senal Ce VICES ecri O 130 10 1 0 Configurable parameters in simple MOdE cccccccessseeseeceeeeeaeseeaeeeesenees 131 10 1 1 Configurable parameters in expert mode sssssssesssrreessssreresssrerssrrssersserss 132 10 2 BRP GCF From Network De6ViICES ss cccsonessrndansiendean E 133 10 2 0 Configurable parameters in simple MOdE ccccccccssseeseeceeeeeneseeaeseesesees 134 10 2 1 Configurable parameters in expert mode sssssssssssrrersssereresssrerssrrssersserss 135 1023 Data rom SCCA Sry ers e a hate ad wcannesn sound comicbuian ots sand aceboes 136 10 3 0 Gonneurable Parameters ics si orscassaniadss aches E E 137 11 Recording and Retrieving Data cccssssscccsssssccceessccccesssccscesssccscaseceesceasceeaseeaes 139 11 1 Preparing removable mass storage COVICES cccecccceseesceceeeeceeceeesecaeseaeeeeeeeens 139 I 2 Recording CALA serieen can T E emus 140 120 Connguraple pararnel eT Surenen n E TEN 141 11 2 1 File name escape sequ
136. ccess while it is acting as an upgrade server It does of course need to be accessible by your networked acquisition devices It is possible to create the mirror content on a removable mass storage device attached to an Internet connected computer and then move the device to a different computer when performing the upgrades The removable mass storage device must use a Linux compatible file system such as ext3 FAT and NTFS formatted devices will not work properly for this purpose Create the mirror directory and use the cd command to make it your current directory As root enter one or more of the following command sequences to download the mirror content Each sequence downloads the files for a particular architecture If you know for example that you will never want to upgrade a CMG NAM64 you can omit the commands for this architecture CMG DCMs This architecture currently requires around 50MB of mass storage device space for the mirror The commands to download the content are GSLSRC rsync guralp com platinum stable CMG DCM mk2x rsync EgHloprtv exclude resolv conf rsync S GSLSRC CMG EAMs There are currently two sets of firmware available for the CMG EAM a frozen image of build 3801 for users who do not yet wish to upgrade to post 10 000 builds and the latest build If you do not wish to upgrade beyond build 3801 yet the files for build 3801 require around 53MB of storage space for the mirror Use the following c
137. ceeeeseeseeeeseeas 73 7 1 1 Configurable parameters in expert mode ssssssesesssseressssrerssssrrerssrrsrerseres 74 Tod NITO lOS S NEIWOTKIN O urran ari EE A T TAT A 78 7 2 0 Configurable parameters in simple mode sssssssnssssssrsesssserssersserssersserssess 79 7 2 1 Configurable parameters in expert mode sssssssssesssseressssrressssrrrrssrrsrressrss 80 7 3 Virtual network VLAN interfaces esseesesssesesssressesssrsssrrsreessrrsseessenssereeeserrseesees 84 7 3 0 Configurable parameters in simple MOE cceccccccseeeeeceeneeeeceneeeeesessesenas 84 7 3 1 Configurable parameters in expert mode sessssesesssserrssssrerssssrrrrssresrerssres 86 LA Network Tame Protocol NEP eea a E ada 86 7 4 0 Conipurible parameters cnau a EEE T 87 7 4 1 Configurable parameters in expert mode ssssssssesssseressssrerssssrrerssrrseressees 90 7 EMail conor eesriie T E T T tae Lavan 90 7 550 GOMUG UTA DIG para Meters uieii nT AE a E 91 40 Confic nne the SOSH OCiye ieo a A T E TETA 92 7 6 0 Configuring sshd via the web interfaCGis ssserirepei n 92 7 6 1 Configuring sshd from the command line ceeescccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeas 93 LA ANOT KDE aida ced corenn en err Te AA rer rere r rT meee ST A ht ret arrtT e 93 7 720 Seting upa PPP GOnM CC HOM oiai iniaa ean vasdan dois E EAO 93 77d COM SUPA DIE parameters arran n on iriaiie A E 94 7 7 2 NIOUMOTING a PPP CONNEC ON meena a jun terc ane E E a beaan
138. cent are included in the extraction Times may be specified in one of two formats YYYY MM DDThh mm ssZ or YYYY MM DD hh mm ss where YYYY represents the four digit year MM the two digit month January is month 1 DD is the two digit day of month counting from 1 and hh mm and ss are the two digit hour minute and second respectively The data and time are UTC and all numbers should be padded with leading zeroes to make up the required length The data can also be filtered to extract one or more specific streams The selection mechanism supports both the ubiquitous multistation mode and the MAN EAM 0003 239 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Monitoring Operations less common unistation mode Separate text fields are provided for specifying selections for each Selector list for unistation Accepts a space separated list of channel specifications The channel name can be given in full or wild cards and negations can be used A question mark character is a single wild card and will match any character in the same position an exclamation mark character can be used to deselect a channel so BHZ selects just channel BHZ BH selects channels BHZ BHN and BHE HH HHZ selects HHE and HHN but not HHZ HHE selects all channels except HHE Leaving this text field blank will select all channels Stream list for multistation Can be left blank to select all streams or populated with a comma separate
139. channel name table Channel name Channels should be specified by giving their system ID and their stream ID separated by a hyphen Clicking the button on any row will open a new row In the same way rows can be deleted by clicking the corresponding button MAN EAM 0003 172 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Transmitting Data If the form is submitted when the table is full extra blank lines are appended 12 1 3 2 Configurable parameters in expert mode The following additional configuration parameters are available by clicking the Expert button at the bottom of the form and selecting the Advanced tab Network BRP server settings Advanced options Log file Path to log file Leave blank to use syslog Log level Important notices hi Minimum severity level of messages to record in log Audit log size 256KiB medium GCF convertor GCF compressor Defaultinstance Select which GCF convertor instance to send data from State directory var lib gcfout brp 0 Directory in which application state is stored Log file It may sometimes be desirable for debugging purposes to separate log messages for this transmitter from the standard system log The text field can be populated with a path name which will then be used for dedicated logging If left blank logging occurs via the standard Linux syslog facility to var log messages
140. configuration backups For example the command rm var lib config backup 2013 04 12 1131 MyEAM tar bz2 MAN EAM 0003 48 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Platinum Overview will delete a backup performed at 11 31 UTC on the 12 of April 2013 on a system called MyEAM It is possible to examine the comments embedded in a manually saved configuration backup file using the command config backup examine path to file or in abbreviated form cont LO DaCkup x Path COT Le Either of the commands will display the comments which were entered by the user in the Description field of the web interface or using comment from the command line when the backup was created 4 4 8 Transferring backups between systems If the command line program config backup is invoked in save or restore mode without a filename argument standard input or standard output is used as appropriate This allows the command to be used in pipe lines as in the following examples A configuration file can be created on a Platinum system and immediately copied to a linux PC without being saved on the Platinum system with a single command ssh oot platinum Gonfig Dack p backup gt d cal backup where platinum is the hostname of the CMG EAM or other Platinum system Likewise the configuration of a running system can be copied to another with commands like from a Linux PC ssh root platinuml config b
141. ct baud rate This section may help in recovering from these situations Connect to the EAM via a serial port open a terminal emulator not Scream and observe the traffic appearing in the window Carry out the appropriate procedures depending on the traffic 16 4 6 1 Short repeated bursts of traffic If you see a constant stream of unreadable traffic it is likely that the output is set to GCF MAN EAM 0003 271 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Appendices 1 Connect the serial port to a PC running Scream and navigate to File gt Setup Select the COM Ports tab and use Auto Detect from the baud rate drop down menu Allow Scream to determine the baud rate and note the value that it uses 2 Close Scream and start your terminal emulator Configure it to the baud rate noted in the previous step using the appropriate commands 3 Interrupt the GCF data stream by quickly typing forcegetty It may take several attempts for this to succeed It can be quicker to copy the command from a text editor and repeatedly paste it into the terminal window 4 When the interrupt is accepted the the login prompt will appear 5 Login to the EAM as normal and then enter the command gconfig 6 You can now configure the EAM as required 16 4 6 2 A single burst of traffic If you see a short burst of unreadable traffic and no password prompt it is likely that the baud rate is wrong 1 Change the baud rate using
142. cted via a serial cable or via SSH over the network see section 3 2 5 on page 27 for details on how to do this and other features are only available via the web interface This chapter will describe both Diagnostics and the Summary screen 14 1 1 System Status To view the overall system status click on the Home link in the breadcrumb trail or the System status link in the main menu The top part of the status screen is a tabbed list of devices connected to the acquisition module Clicking on a tab will display a status report for that device The system has predefined warning and error levels which are displayed as coloured dots and are defined as Green Level is 70 or above system OK e Amber _ Level is below 70 system warning Red Q Level is below 40 system error malfunction Grey There is no status information Main menu Home Status dem105 System status GCFin PotA GCFin PotB GCF in Port F Scream server GCF network sender G Default data transport daemon GCF compressor Default instance Disk recording GSLA 1061 NTP Removable disk Linux system GCF in Port A 100 See eis ee Total number of blocks received 2292765 100 Servi D Total number of naks sent 0 Number of blocks received in last 5 minutes 278 100 Tor a Number of naks sent in last 5 minutes 0 100 Extract Mini SEED records GO Timestamp of last pac
143. ctivated using the key Many of the configuration forms have two modes simple and expert They display by default only the parameters most likely to be used For example the network interface form does not normally display IP aliasing parameters When access is required to these additional features they can be displayed by using the lt exert button displayed at the bottom of the form They can be hidden again by using the lt simie button It is also possible to toggle between simple and expert mode using the key Some forms are too large to fit in a single page In this case an indicator appears at the top right of the screen For example the network interface configuration form in expert mode takes three pages to display File Edit View Terminal Help Network Interface Configuration Page 1 of 3 a Network Interface etho To move to subsequent pages you can use either the or the F6 key Page To return to previous pages you can use or F5 When all required fields have been set to the desired values the changes can be enacted by using the suwmit button or the key It is possible to leave any form by using the om gt button or the key but if you have made changes to the contents of any fields the system will warn you that you will lose your changes if you continue It offers an opportunity to return to the form MAN EAM 0003 39 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum
144. d list of stream specifications Each specification is in the form NET_STA where NET is the network identifier and STA is the station identifier as used in S C N L notation optionally followed immediately by a colon and then a space separated list of channel selectors as described in the previous paragraph For example say a system is processing the following channels in S C N L notation Bo75 HHZ KA 04 BO lox CH2 KA 0G BO Se One RA s00 Bo75 HHE KA 04 Bo75 HHN KA 04 Bo 5 BHE KA OM Bo75 MME KA OA Bo75 MMZ KA 08 Z2200 BEN GS 06 22007 HHE GS 04 2200 HHN G9 04 2200s BHE yG 06 2200 SBH sGS9v06 2400s BHX GS s06 Z200 MMZ Go 08 2200 MMN GS 09 e Leaving both the unistation and multistation lists blank will select all data e A specification of GS_2200 would select all data from station 2200 MAN EAM 0003 240 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Monitoring Operations e To select all data for HHE channels from both stations you could either use a unistation selector of HHE or a multistation selector of GS 2200 HHE KA B675 HHE the second method would allow other streams to be selected in addition The specification GS 2200 HHE BH KA B675 HHE will select data from the following channels 2200 HHE GS 04 22 00a BAN GS U6 2200s BHE G9 s06 2200 BHZ GSs06 27200 BHX GoU Bolos HIEKKA 04 The specification GS 2200 BH BHZ will select data from the following channels
145. d select System services from the top level menu Now select gdi2miniseed Mini SEED compressor The screen shows a list of all Mini SEED compressor instances that have been configured Mini SEED compressor instance selection Select the Mini SEED compressor instance you wish to configure Although the default instance is marked as does not start automatically it will be started if a dependant service is started You can reconfigure any existing compressor by clicking on its menu entry To configure a new Mini SEED compressor instance select Create new service instance The following screen allows you to configure the parameters of the compressor The first part of the screen is shown below MAN EAM 0003 180 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Transmitting Data 12 2 1 1 Configurable parameters in simple mode The configurable parameters for the Mini SEED compressor have two tabbed pages in simple mode General and Channels General Mini SEED compressor General setting gdi2miniseed converts samples acquired through the system into Mini SEED Data only SEED blocks suitable for use with other 3rd party software Compressed blocks are written into a ring buffer for recording transmission and backfill User description Mini SEED compressor instance 1 User label for this Mini SEED
146. d with an IP address from the same network such as 192 168 123 2 this address is provided to the client at connection initiation IPv6 networking the Local IP address IPv6 and Remote IP address IPv6 fields should be populated Default route If selected the PPP daemon will modify the routing table on successful connection setting the remote end of the PPP link as the default gateway MAN EAM 0003 93 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Networking Configuration 7 7 2 3 Authentication Data Out PPP settings Authentication Authentication lf you are using authentication you may fill out this section Otherwise it can be left untouched User ID User identity to supply if requested PAP secret Optional secret that matches the user ID Require peer authentication Requires that the remote peer authenticate itself to the local PPP daemon User ID PAP secret Use those given to you by your service provider in the appropriate fields The standard Linux commands ppp on ppp off ip ping and traceroute are available from the command line for use in controlling and testing PPP connections but it is also possible to configure a watchdog service to monitor a PPP connection and automatically restart it should it fail This is described in the next section 1 1 3 Monitoring a PPP connection PPP connections can be monitored and should they fail for any reason automatically restarted
147. de The only difference between standard and expert mode on this screen is the addition of a Server options column to the NTP servers table Home Help Simple Submit This text field can be used to provide additional control over how the NTP daemon uses the server The options are described in the standard ntp conf manual page available on line at http linux die net man 5 ntp conf Email configuration Platinum firmware is capable of sending system alerts via email over the Internet or over a local area network This feature is currently unused but is provided for future expansion MAN EAM 0003 88 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Networking Configuration To configure email from the web interface select Configuration Networking Mail Or Configuration All options Networking Mail Transfer Agent e mail service To configure email from the command line start gconfig select Networking from the top level menu and then select Mail Transfer Agent e mail service 7 5 1 Configurable parameters The configurable parameters for email are contained on a single form Mail Transfer Agent These parameters control the Mail Transfer Agent MTA used to relay e mail between machines Enable MTA i Start the MTA at system startup Smart host Smart delivery host leave blank to attempt direct delivery Mail host identity Our identifying name leave blank to
148. do not match If you wish to have a higher transfer rate between the two modules both ends must have their Baud rates increased separately The digitiser module also exposes a dedicated console connection which is internally attached to Port B of the acquisition module This can be accessed from the command line of the acquisition module or if desired made accessible over the network If you wish to disallow network access set the service on the EAM s Port B to none To enable access over the network set the service on the EAM s Port B to TCP serial converter Serial data to TCP link converter and configure the converter according to the instructions in section 7 8 on page 97 It is currently possible to set the Baud rate of the digitiser s console port and of the EAM s Port B independently leading to a loss of data communication between the two modules if the two do not match If you wish to have a higher transfer rate between the two modules both ends must have their Baud rates increased separately The digitiser module s Baud rate must be changed first Port C of the acquisition module is used for synchronisation and can either provide NMEA to the digitiser module or share incoming GPS data from an external receiver Different internal connections are used in each case an analogue switch is controlled by the service selected for the EAM s Port C When the Port C service is set to NMEA In the connections are as follow
149. dress On pages where there are tabbed pages the number of errors is displayed on the first tabbed screen Network interface era Network interface ethO 2 errors found Throughout the remainder of this manual screen shots of the configuration system s web interface will normally omit the left hand pane as in the two illustrations above MAN EAM 0003 34 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Platinum Overview 4 3 4 2 3 Navigation instructions in the manual In this manual instructions on how to reach a particular screen are displayed like this Configuration Interfaces ethO Primary wired network interface In this example to reach the page indicated scroll to the Configuration section of the main menu then click on the Interfaces link From the list that appears in the main frame click on the ethO Primary wired network interface link In some cases there are two possible paths to a particular screen Both are shown in the manual Using the command line configuration system All of the configuration facilities available under the All options item in the main menu of the web interface are also available from a text based GUI tool called gconfig G ralp Configurator This can be accessed either by using a serial link or over the network by using ssh Connection via a serial link is discussed in section 3 3 on page 30 and connecting over Ethe
150. dvanced To configure an instance from the command line start gconfig and select System services from the top level menu Now select gdi base Data transport and channel manager The screen shows a list of all gdi base instances that have been configured Select the appropriate link to edit an existing instance or to create a new one 6 2 1 Configurable parameters The configurable parameters for gdi base are contained in a single form Data transport daemon and channel manager gdi base Guralp Data Interconnect is responsible for transporting samples from acquisition modules to encoding modules It also allows the metadata of each channel to be modified User description Data transport and channel manager instance 1 User label for the multiplexor instance Enable Enable the multiplexor at system startup Delete a Delete this multiplexor instance Socket var run qdi base 0 sink IPC socket for communication with the multiplexor read only Socket var run gdi base 0 sour IPC socket for communication with the multiplexor read write Log file Path to log file Leave blank to use syslog Log level Important notices Minimum severity level of messages to record in log Metadata directory etc gdi base metadata Directory in which per channel metadata files are stored User description Sets the name of the instance this should be set to a meaningful name for the function it will be performing
151. e options are e Download as text tab delimited fields Download as CSV comma delimited text file e Download as XML View as table HTML e View as graph plot PNG e Download PNG graph plot MAN EAM 0003 237 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Monitoring Operations Clicking on Get data performs out the selected query If the selected format is PNG extra configurations options are available by clicking Configure graph setup 14 4 3 1 Build CURL query It is possible to schedule environmental data extraction using cron the system job scheduler When the job is scheduled the data are extracted from the server using a set of CURL instructions cURL is an open source project for transferring data from a server using a command line At a very basic level all you need to do is type curl at the command line followed by the output to retrieve For example curl output test html www example com would take the contents of the URL www example com and output it to the filename test html There are a whole range of arguments you can insert between the command and the URL These are all explained in the cURL manual available at http curl haxx se docs manual html When you click on Build CURL query Platinum generates a cURL query based on the options you have selected on the environmental log page For example curl output eam3057 2011 03 13T12 40 302Z txt TOrm String OUEp
152. e top level menu 11 2 1 Configurable parameters The configuration screen for recording data has five tabbed pages Storage device MiniSEED GCF Non seismic data NFS and Advanced No expert mode screens are required Selecting Configuration Storage and recording displays the following screen Home Configuration Storage and recordin Storage and recording Sra wine 66F Nereida NFS Aone Storage device Storage device External USB storage Select the device to which the recording subsystem will write Recycle space MiB Space in MiB to leave free on device recycle mode Empty or O to disable Format filesystem FAT32 recommended for compatibility Select the type of filesystem to use when formatting disk based storage Continuous power Always keep storage device powered Increases power consumption Config home Help Submit Generated at 2013 04 15T11 41 197 by GCS 2 0 11 Portions of output copyright 2013 G ralp Systems Limited MAN EAM 0003 139 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Recording and Retrieving Data 11 2 1 1 Storage device The Storage device tab has the following fields Storage device This drop down menu lets you choose from the storage options available on your system The options may include one or more of e Removable USB disk in internal tray this is the default setting for CMG EAMs and CMG DCMs Data are wr
153. e unit must have its networking properly configured In particular a DNS Domain Name Service server and a default gateway or default route must both be configured It is advisable to check these before proceeding or in the event of problems preventing a successful upgrade To check for correct configuration of both of these items issue the command ping c3 rsync guralp com This will send three echo request packets to the GSL upgrade server and listen for responses If both the DNS server and the correct gateway default router are configured the output will look like this eam2010 ping c3 rsync guralp com PING rsync guralp com 80 68 92 160 56 data bytes 64 bytes from 80 68 92 160 seq 0 ttl 55 time 58 280 ms 64 bytes from 80 68 92 160 seq l ttl 55 time 66 845 ms 64 bytes from 80 68 92 160 seq 2 ttl 55 time 56 413 ms gt PSyne vOulLa o CoMm Dang SEaCIS CIOS 3 packets transmitted 3 packets received 0 packet loss round trip min avg max 56 413 60 512 66 845 ms eam2010 If the DNS server is correctly configured but the gateway is not correctly configured the output will look like this eam2010 ping c3 rsync guralp com PING rsync guralp com 80 68 92 160 56 data bytes ping sendto Network is unreachable eam2010 If you are using DHCP it is advisable to correct this problem by reconfiguring the DHCP server to supply the correct route If you are using static addressing enter the addr
154. e up This is in addition to the default route added above e a eS Type This drop down menu offers the following choices e unicast This is the normal setting for a host or network route The route entry describes real paths to the destinations specified in the Destination column e unreachable these destinations are unreachable Packets are discarded and the ICMP message host unreachable is generated An EHOSTUNREACH error may appear in var log messages blackhole these destinations are unreachable Packets are discarded silently An EINVAL error may appear in var log messages e prohibit these destinations are unreachable Packets are discarded and the ICMP message communication administratively prohibited is generated An EACCES error may appear in var log messages e local the destinations are assigned to this host The packets are looped back and delivered locally e broadcast the destinations are broadcast addresses The packets are sent as link broadcasts Destination The host or network to which this route offers access should be entered here in CIDR format where the address is followed by a slash and then the number of bits defining the netmask e g 192 168 0 1 24 for IPV4 or 2001 db8 32 for IPV6 Gateway The IP address of the host which serves as the gateway to the specified destination MAN EAM 0003 75 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Networking Configura
155. e web interface choose the required configuration from the list of saved backups and click the associated Download copy button The backup will be downloaded using your browser s normal download mechanism Saved configurations can also be downloaded using file transfer tools like scp and sftp Manually saved configuration backups can be found in MAN EAM 0003 44 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Platinum Overview var 1lib config backup and automatically saved configuration backups can be found in var lib config backup auto 4 4 4 Uploading a saved configuration Backups that have been saved to a PC can be restored to any acquisition module not just the one from which it was originally downloaded This provides a useful mechanism for maintaining a centralised configuration library To upload a previously stored configuration backup click the Browse button Your operating system s standard file selection dialogue will open Navigate to the required file and select it then click the P vl4bewe tle button The uploaded configuration will then appear in the list of saved backups and can be restored if required as described in the following section Saved configurations can also be uploaded using file transfer tools like scp and sftp They should be copied to var lib config backup 4 4 5 Restoring a configuration The same screen in the web interface is also used for restoring a configuration
156. ea EE E E ns 248 TA 5 ROUTING task Snan a a a a 248 14 50 The directory cleane T mersaria OTA O 248 15 Technical operaio vescsussssccuscasiessnacecuson hannatenantctnea ERE 252 Tek VME CALDI CNTS OTS re aE A E T A ue aia aeons 252 15 L0 Internal Connections ssersoreeniienoioi o a T ERKE 254 DS clad Wear aol Gani MUS aE E 255 T3 L2 USB OPCAO Soei tiara etdcpanta tenant ceanuietauietaseatuien tina E ATE 257 12 DOM rannen T E A 258 15 3 2t Channel DAS enii A E tne errr 260 15 4 Instruments with integrated CMG EAMsBS sesssessssreresssrrsssrrssserressersserserssreseese 261 16 APO MIO IC CS u EEE A E EE E auntie aes 263 16 1 Appendix A Setting the System Identity Hostname ssssssssessssressssrresserese 263 16 2 Appendix B Using third party terminal emulatoTs cceeccccceesseeeeeeneeeeeees 264 16 2 0 Hyperterminal as provided with Windows XP ccccccccsseeeeceseceeaeeeenenees 264 16 2 1 Using Hyperterminal with Windows Vista or Windows 7 s0ceceseeeees 266 1022 Usine PUF TOP VWI OW Sida tiaesnecaaaasiedatatiatonais areas eaasctocansenaaiannoneuens 266 16 23 Minicom TOP aX eisie da riaameen tueeehads 268 16 3 Appendix C Usine Win COM ess a ceeesanctseatasinnseativanee vaca caesar eee ws aa tune 269 16 4 Appendix D Troubleshooting cccccsecceccessecccesseeccaeecceceescenecessuseeseesenseas 272 16 4 0 Upgrades report Temporary failure in name resolution 272 16 4 1 Upgrades repor
157. ect a serial line Configure the serial line Data bits Parity 4 Configure the serial line with the following settings Speed baud 38400 for DM24 115200 for DCM 19200 for CD24 Data bits 8 Stop bits 1 Parity None Flow control None A Caution If the port is re configured or the settings changed access may no longer be possible 5 Click on Session in the main menu 6 In the right hand part of the window use the radio buttons to select the Serial Connection type Check the Serial line and Speed fields are correct MAN EAM 0003 265 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Appendices i PuTTY Configuration Category E Session Basic options for your PuTTY session Logging Specity the destination you want to connect to Terminal Serial line Speed Connection type El Window O Baw P PREAIRIJGE Load save or delete a stored session H Behaviour Translation Selection ee aved Sessions ie Colours e Connection Save Delete elete Close window on exit OAwas Never Only on clean exit 7 To save the settings enter a suitable session name in the Saved Sessions field then click Save The next time you start PuTTY your saved session will appear in the list and you can simply double click it to open a new session with the same settings 8 Click the Open button to start the terminal emulator 16 2 4 Mincom for Linux Under Unix
158. ect which GDI multiplexor instance to compress data from Database directory Can be used to control the location of the ring buffer and associated files In most configurations the default location is adequate but if for example a very large ring buffer is desired and the optional extra flash memory module is fitted it may be desirable to use the extra memory for this purpose To do this enter into this field the path to a unique directory under media flash_module Log file It may sometimes be desirable for debugging purposes to separate log messages for this transmitter from the standard system log The text field can be populated with a path name which will then be used for dedicated logging If left blank logging occurs via the standard Linux syslog facility to var log messages MAN EAM 0003 165 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Transmitting Data Log level The drop down menu controls the level of detail present in log messages Not all of the standard syslog logging levels are available The menu offers a choice in order of decreasing detail of e Debugging information e Informational messages Important notices Warnings GDI multiplexer In most configurations all data for all compressors are taken from a single multiplexor as described in section 6 1 on page 65 For more complex configurations it is possible to configure multiple multiplexers each with their own set of inpu
159. ected backups E Backup file comparison To compare two saved configuration backups select the left hand side radio button next to one of them and the right hand side radio button next to the other and then click Show differences between selected backups The differences are displayed in Linux diff format with colour coding used to identify any lines that belong to one file but not the other Detailed explanation of the possible entries is beyond the scope of this document A simple introduction to the output from the diff command is available at http lowfatlinux com linux compare files diff html To compare two saved configuration backups from the command line enter the command contig backup diti path to fidel p ath to filez or in abbreviated form cont ig backu up d pach to iilel pach co fiseZz MAN EAM 0003 47 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Platinum Overview replacing path to filel and path to file2 with the full paths directories plus file name of the previously saved configuration backup files to be compared 4 4 7 Deleting saved configurations It is possible to delete configuration backups that have been manually saved as well as those that have been uploaded Automatic configuration backups cannot be deleted the system will retain the last fifty stored backups and delete any older ones using the directory cleaner see section 14 5 1 on page 246 To delete
160. ecting pins V and Y of the SENSOR A connector using a special cable These cables can be ordered from GSL as active high sensor cables for DM24SxEAM or manufactured by modifying standard GSL sensor cables Sensors can be controlled via the web interface or the command line The web interface is simpler and requires no detailed knowledge of the attached devices The command line interface is more powerful but requires detailed knowledge of the digitiser s command line interface and the manual for the digitiser in question should be referred to for further details 14 3 2 1 Instrument Control Web interface The main menu of the web interface adapts to include additional options when the system detects attached digitisers and or digital sensors Extra items in the Control menu are associated with digitiser serial numbers If a digitiser has two sensors attached to it it is recommended that an extra serial number be added to the digitiser See section 8 3 on page 117 or the relevant digitiser manual for information on how to configure this The sensors are listed in the following format Port A instrument C914 3K55 MAN EAM 0003 224 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Monitoring Operations and indicate the physical connection Port A to the attached device the device type instrument and its serial number C194 3K55 If the instrument is connected via TCP the EAM connection is shown as
161. ed manually can have arbitrary names the name is chosen by the user when the configuration is saved The default file name is generated from the date time and hostname in the form YYYY MM DD Ahmm hostname MAN EAM 0003 42 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Platinum Overview 4 4 2 Saving a configuration To save a configuration backup from the web interface select Configuration Save Restore The following screen is displayed Configuration backup Please note DM24 CD24 ADC module configuration is not saved or restored by this program even if the ADC module is integrated internally into this system ld Back up current configuration Upload backup file If you have previously downloaded a backup file perhaps from another Platinum unit you may upload a copy to this device Browse Upload backup File Saved backups Show differences between selected backups er F Show Filename Date saved Description Actions p differences Automatic backups auto 00000000 i First automatic Download copy eam2243_fish 2013 03 13T12 20Z backup Restore this backup Show differences between selected backups gt Backup file comparison This screen offers a back up button an upload facility and a list of stored configurations each with a download button and a restore button MAN EAM 0003 43 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Platinum Overview Clicking the back up b
162. ed multiplexers SEEDlink The Standard for the Exchange of Earthquake Data SEED is an international standard format for the exchange of digital seismological data developed by the USGS and adopted as a standard by the Federation of Digital Broad Band Seismograph Networks FDSN MiniSEED is a stripped down version of SEED which only contains waveform data without the station and channel metadata that are included in full SEED Incoming data in any format other than CD1 1 is converted first into GDI format In order to transmit SEEDlink data or record it to mass storage device MAN EAM 0003 179 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Transmitting Data it must be converted into miniSEED format this is done by the gdi2miniseed module known as the GDI Mini SEED compressor 12 2 1 The GDI Mini SEED compressor A default instance of the GDI Mini SEED compressor is provided Further instances can be created if required for complex implementations Although the default instance is not set to start automatically it is a necessary prerequisite for both SEEDlink transmission and recording so it will be started as a dependant service when required To configure a GDI Mini SEED compressor from the web interface select Configuration Services Mini SEED or Configuration All options System services Mini SEED To configure a GDI Mini SEED compressor from the command line start gconfig an
163. ed from any number of sources by creating multiple GCF BRP receiver instances To set up a GCF BRP receiver on the acquisition module select Configuration Services GCF or Configuration All options System services GCF To configure a receiver from the command line start gconfig and select System services from the top level menu Select gcf in brp GCF BRP network client The screen shows a list of all GCF BRP receiver instances that have been configured To configure a new GCF BRP receiver instance select Create new service instance The screen allows you to configure the parameters of the service MAN EAM 0003 131 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Receiving Data 10 2 1 Configurable parameters in simple mode The configurable parameters for GCF BRP receiver are contained in a single form in simple mode Network BRP client settings User description GCF BRP network client instance 1 User label for the receiver instance User label Application label used for identification in logs Enable Enable this BRP receiver at system startup Delete Delete this BRP receiver instance Remote server The remote server to connect to for data Remote service 10002 The remote service or port number to connect to Allow disconnects Attempt to reconnect broken TCP connections Disable rewind Disable BRP rewinding for DM24s in ad
164. een the serial port and the TCP connection CMG EAM gt connection i I Serial Port Toe E Serial 4 vi N device A E eri al i e ul ia da E T eTECET E E data flow The acquisition module can be configured to only listen on particular addresses and ports to only accept connections from certain addresses or blocks of addresses and to reject connections from certain addresses or blocks of addresses In Simple client mode the acquisition module will connect to an external TCP server on a particular address and port and then copy data bidirectionally between the serial port and the network port MAN EAM 0003 97 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Networking Configuration CMG EAM mE Serial Port client ee ae Serial device TCP Serial converter E E E E E Ey ab To configure the converter from the web interface select Configuration Serial Ports then choose the required port Set the function to tcp serial converter select the baud rate and save the settings You can then use the TCP serial converter settings button at the bottom of the page to configure the converter The converter s configuration page allows you to choose the mode at the top Operation mode The other options on the page are only required in certain modes see below for which modes require which options 1 8 1 Simple server mode
165. efault Instance for your requirements 13 1 2 1 Configurable parameters in simple mode The configurable parameters for the GDI link receiver have three tabbed pages in simple mode General Network and Servers General GDI link receiver gdi link rx receives samples in the native protocol of the Platinum software suite called Guralp Data Interconnect This is a low latency real time transmission protocol which sends encoded state of health with samples General settings User description System gdi link receiver User label for this receiver module Enable Enable the receiver at system startup User description Enter a descriptive name for the instance this is useful if you are configuring multiple instances but in most cases this can be set to the hostname of the acquisition module Enable Enables the receiver at system startup if selected Network GDI link receiver gdi link rx receives samples in the native protocol of the Platinum software suite called Guralp Data Interconnect This is a low latency real time transmission protocol which sends encoded state of health with samples Network settings Client name Used to identify this receiver to other transmitters Leave empty for default Local IP address IP address or host name to listen on Leave empty for default Local port service Service name or TCP port number to listen on Leave empty for default Client name O
166. eleted by clicking the corresponding button Network interface IP aliasing IP aliasing or multihoming can be configured by supplying additional IP addresses in this table IP and CIDR The address should be entered in CIDR format where the address is followed by a slash and then the number of bits defining the netmask e g 192 168 0 1 24 for IPV4 or 2001 db8 32 for IPV6 Broadcast Enter the broadcast address to be associated with this address on the interface IP addr arguments This field can be used to tune the operation of the network interface For settings that can be used here please see http linux die net man 8 ip 7 1 2 5 Routes Routes are used to add extra network and host routes to allow access to networks other than those connected via the default router specified earlier MAN EAM 0003 74 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Networking Configuration or to force packets to traverse a particular route despite the default router setting By default the table displays three blank rows but should you need more complete the first three and submit the form it will be redrawn with extra blank rows Alternatively clicking the button on any row will open a new row In the same way rows can be deleted by clicking the corresponding button Network interface DHCP options IP aliasing Extra routes The following routes are added to the interface after it has com
167. en tee 96 7 7 3 Configurable parameters in simple MOE ceeccccccseseeeeeeneeeeeeeeeseeseeseeeeas 96 7 7 4 Configurable parameters in expert mode sssssssesesssseressssrerssssrerrssreseressres 98 7 8 Configuring TCP to serial converters ociera EA 99 ToO SMP levSEnver MOG Csaiiinatecasan Paacess E a 100 FOr SmPC Hen NOE fates cintinise chanel ovenieate e aaa 101 8 Disitiser Configuratio eccere tee aaw basen a e 102 8 1 Configuring digitisers using the web interface ccccececcccessseeeeeeesaeeeceeesaaeeses 102 8 10 Gonetra ble Parameters oninia i a E 102 8 2 Configuring digitisers from the command line sssessssseessesssssrerssrrssrersseressersss 116 MAN EAM 0003 4 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware 8 2 0 Yai C COTMIMAING aE tinsteanaumeeneaenicsies 116 82 lial ae EPI aan a EC T OEN 116 8 22 AM2 Upar ad Esn A a N 117 8 3 Configuration for a second instr mentesian iona E en aE A 119 9 Digitiser Synchronisation sicsatescceaciasnsteowneunatcwevesceroudesenondesenaranontsenescusucenesioonmesenonsesedens 122 Od OVerview and Important MOES erior oar e e a T TE 122 92 ITS VAL US Pack pne E REEE EOE 123 9 3 Using NTP WHA CMG NAN UDS cenicero a E 124 9 4 Using GPS with Cylindrical Digitisers senessseeesseeessseerssrssrrserssesserserssessersee 124 95 Using NEP with Cylindrical D1e 1tisers mna E E 125 9 6 Configuring NMEA as an NTP clock SOUPLCE cc eeec
168. ences esseresssessessrrrsserrsssrrrersrrrssserserssreserssrssersees 148 TLS SROUPIOVIIIG dalani E TNO E 151 11 3 0 Retrieving data from the removable drive sss ssesssresessssrrrssssrrressssrressers 151 11 3 1 Reading the removable drive on other COMPUuteTS ccccsseeseceeeeeeeeeaeees 162 11 3 2 Accessing internal storage Cirectly cceeccccsseecccceesececceeececcseeececseeesessaness 163 12 Te ANS TOU AN ah Sveeea Newry set E E S 164 VDT E E AE EAEE A E T sduad ans dnnsided T AEA EEEE E E 164 1AL0 TheGCFCONMpDIOS SOT srair a a 164 12 11 GCF BRP Serial Serye ecane A E 168 1212 GOP BRE NeIWOIKk OGIVO ena T N 171 ZLS ASP SCPC all SCIVO T en a a E E E TT TETE E E 176 2 SEED Koea ar ETON TONETTE OEO 181 MAN EAM 0003 5 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware 12 2 0 The GDL Mini SEED COMpressOr acaruar a iaie E ON 182 12 21 Te SEBO WK SOVE reci T 186 T29 Pa DWO i erosin a a a 188 12 3 0 Configurable parameters in simple MOdEe ccccccccssseeeeeeeeeeeaeseeaeseesenees 189 12 3 1 Configurable parameters in Expert MOdEe cccccccccessseeceeeeaeeescceesaaeesceees 193 12 4 G ralp Seismic Monitoring System cccccceccccsssssccceeesccesaeescesseeeseessenesesseeeas 194 12 4 0 Configurable parameters in simple MOdE ccccccccssseeececeeeeeneseeseseeaeeees 194 12 4 1 Configurable parameters in expert mode ssssssssssssreesssereresssrerssrrssrrs
169. ent Remote service port The default is 1566 but if you have configured a different port on the GDI link client you should enter the same port here e Enable at startup Controls whether the service enables at startup Clicking the button on any row will open a new row In the same way rows can be deleted by clicking the corresponding button 13 1 1 2 Additional options available in expert mode The following additional configuration parameters are available by clicking the Expert button at the bottom of the form and selecting the Advanced tab GDI link transmitter gdi link tx transmits samples in the native protocol of the Platinum software suite called Guralp Data Interconnect This is a low latency real time transmission protocol which sends encoded state of health with samples Advanced options Log file Path to log file Leave blank to use syslog Log level Important notices Minimum severity level of messages to record in log GDI multiplexor Default data transportdaemon Select which GDI multiplexor instance to compress data from Log file It may sometimes be desirable for debugging purposes to separate log messages for this transmitter from the standard system log The text field can be populated with a path name which will then be used for dedicated logging If left blank logging occurs via the standard Linux syslog facility to var log messages Log level The drop down menu c
170. ently configured multiplexers G ralp Seismic Monitoring System GSMS is a protocol designed by G ralp Systems to send real time low latency strong motion data To configure a GSMS server from the web interface select Configuration Services Miscellaneous Or Configuration All options System services Miscellaneous To configure a GSMS server from the command line start gconfig and select System services from the top level menu Now select gsms out GSMS sender The screen shows a list of all GCF Scream server instances that have been configured You can reconfigure any existing service by clicking on its menu entry To configure a new GSMS server select Create service instance The following screen allows you to configure the parameters of the server 12 4 1 Configurable parameters in simple mode The configurable parameters for the GSMS server have four tabbed pages in simple mode General Network Push and Channels MAN EAM 0003 192 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Transmitting Data 12 4 1 1 General GSMS sender General settings User description GSMS sender instance 1 User label for the transmitter instance User label Application label used for identification in logs Enable Enable the transmitter at system startup Delete Delete this transmitter instance User description Set to a meaningful name for the data that
171. ents and Forwards General tab GSTM server General setting User description Guralp secure TCP multiplexor server instance 1 User label for this GSTM server instance Enable Enable the GSTM server at system startup Delete Delete this GSTM server instance User description Enter meaningful names here to help distinguish if several instances are to be created Enable Causes this service to start automatically when the system is re booted If this check box is cleared the service will need to be started manually from the Control Services menu Delete Causes the configuration for this instance to be removed from the system when the form is submitted MAN EAM 0003 214 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Building Networks Server tab GSTM server Server settings Bind host The hostname or IP address the server will bind to Leave empty for all Service port gstm The TCP port number or service name to listen on TCP keepalive Enable sending TCP keepalives enabling the watchdog is prefered Watchdog interval 30 Period in seconds between watchdog messages Bind host If the acquisition module has multiple IP addresses the GSTM server can be constrained to listen on only one of them by entering its address in the field If this field is left empty the server will
172. eployment This sub command takes no options adc command module calib sine arguments Perform a sine wave calibration according to the specified arguments which are given as a space separated list of key value pairs component ALL z N S E W specify the component s to be calibrated duration m specify the duration in minutes where m is an integer value For accurate results the duration should be significantly longer than the response time of the instrument amplitude a specify the amplitude where a is the integer percentage of the full output of the calibration signal generator This can normally be given as 100 but should be reduced if clipping is noticed freq n specify the frequency in integer Hertz or period in integer seconds of the calibration signal according to the setting of freq or period Hz sec specifies whether the value associated with freq is interpreted as Hertz or seconds adc command module calib step arguments Perform a step calibration according to the specified arguments which are given as a space separated list of key value pairs MAN EAM 0003 component ALL z N S E W specify the component s to be calibrated duration m specify the duration in minutes where m is an integer value The calibration signal will first go negative for this duration then back to zero for the same duration then go positive for this duration then return to zero again for the
173. er combinations This involves generating a unique key pair for the user and PC which will access the acquisition module and then copying the public half of the key pair to the acquisition module This can be more secure than passwords and is fully documented at http suso org docs shell ssh sdf For details about uploading your keys to the CMG EAM see section 7 6 on page 90 Connecting to the Serial Port A number of acquisition modules have dedicated a 9 pin D console port connector located under its lid It can be connected via a serial RS232 cable toa PC See section 16 5 5 on page 277 for the pin out Some acquisition modules without a dedicated console port connector are supplied with Y cables that connect to the DATA OUT port your PC and a power supply Acquisition modules with a GPIO connector are provided with a blue serial cable terminating in a female DE9 connector This gives access to the module s console Once you have connected the serial cable you can run either Scream or a terminal emulator to interact with the acquisition module MAN EAM 0003 30 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Initial set up 3 3 1 Using Scream Select Terminal from the File menu A window will open from where you can select the correct serial port t a Select Port to open Link Type Direct Seral Fot COM ul Baud Aate 38400 M Cancel Set the Baud Rate to 38400 as shown a
174. er deletion in the directory If the total size of the files in the directory is greater than the value specified here in mebibytes files are removed in the selected sort order until the threshold is no longer exceeded Maximum number of files Specifies a threshold in terms of number of files that will trigger deletion in the directory If the directory holds a larger number excess files are deleted in the selected order until the specified number remain Note At least one of Maximum used space MiB and Maximum number of files must be specified If both are specified they will both be respected Note Each directory cleaner instance checks its configured directory once per hour so if an application generates files rapidly the total size or number of files in the directory may grow to considerably more than the configured threshold values MAN EAM 0003 249 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Technical operation 15 15 1 Technical operation Cylindrical Digitisers G ralp Systems Ltd s cylindrical digitisers provide a CMG DM24 and a CMG EAM in a single package a stainless steel or aluminium cylinder with an optional carrying mounting bracket An internal Spyrus PC card provides authentication and digital signing of CD1 1 frames and subframes The system is fitted with variable gain analogue inputs tamper detection lines on all key connectors and an internal USB storage device which is
175. ern in the log file This search is case insensitive i flag grep is a very powerful tool for searching for patterns For more information see the section on Regular Expressions in the grep manual page at http man wiki net index php 1 gqrep 14 1 3 Incoming Data The status web page has one box for each GCF acquisition process This box will be updated every minute to reflect the number of packets that have been acquired To view details of incoming GCF format data using the command line enter the command gdi top This will displays real time information about each packet arriving until interrupted by the operator typing Q MAN EAM 0003 219 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Monitoring Operations 14 1 4 Software build number The Software build number as displayed on the Linux system tab of the status screen may be useful for your own records or when requesting technical support See section 5 2 on page 52 for more details 14 2 Warning and error monitoring In addition to the status indicators listed in section 14 1 1 on page 218 the status of all components can be monitored and if the level falls below a set percentage a selected output line can be switched from low to high for use by an external indication system To configure the status iolines using the web interface select Configuration All options Status iolines assertion configuration To configure the statu
176. es GCF To configure an instance from the command line start gconfig and select System services from the top level menu Select the gdi2gcf GCF compressor link The screen shows a list of all GCF compressor instances that have been configured GCF compressor instance selection Select the GCF compressor instance you wish to configure To configure any existing instance click on its link To configure an additional gdi2gcf instance select Create new service instance The resulting screen allows you to configure the parameters of the selected instance 12 1 1 1 Configurable parameters in simple mode The configurable parameters for the GCF compressor in simple mode have two tabbed pages General and Channels General GCF compressor General setting gdi2gcf converts samples acquired through the system into GCF Guralp Compressed Format blocks suitable for use with other Guralp software and equipment such as Scream Compressed blocks are written into a ring buffer for recording transmission and backfill User description GCF compressor Default instance User label for this GCF compressor instance Enable Enable the compressor at system startup Buffer size 64 MiB Ring buffer size in MiB MAN EAM 0003 163 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Transmitting Data User description Sets the name of the service If multiple instances are created th
177. es options relevant to all three protocols Linux users are advised to use the minicom terminal emulator This includes X modem support and its use is described below For Windows users we describe the use of HyperTerminal which is supplied with many Windows systems For minicom users the X modem protocol should first be configured start minicom and type Su minicom s escape sequence and then to display the options menu eT 1fa Fish fish deskt File Edit View Search Terminal Tabs Help Welcome to minicom 2 3 OPTIONS T1i8n Compiled on Sep 25 2009 23 40 20 Port dev ttySo0 Press CTRL A Z for help on special keys configuration eam2243 Logi Filenames and paths Password File transfer eamz243 Serial port setup Modem and dialling Screen and keyboard Save setup as dtl Save setup as Exit Select File transfer protocols and ensure that the command used for X modem transfers is set to usr bin sx vv Before attempting to download files you should flush the recording buffers and mount the mass storage device The buffers can be flushed with the command eam2010 gdi record flush MAN EAM 0003 158 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Recording and Retrieving Data and the mass storage device can be mounted and held in a powered up state by use of the Pt storage facility as described in section 11 3 1 2 on page 152 Once the mass storage device is mounted
178. esponding button 12 1 4 2 Configurable parameters in expert mode The following additional configuration parameters are in expert mode Advanced Scream server Advanced options V4 0 COM names Check this to use old V4 0 COMxx port names Uncheck for meaningful names aff GCF compressor Default instance Select which GCF convertor instance to send data from GCF convertor Node name The node name used in the block description field Leave blank for hostname Log file Path to log file Leave blank to use syslog Log level Important notices Minimum severity level of messages to record in log Audit log size 256KiB medium V4 0 COM names Early versions of the Scream protocol expected all data to originate from COM ports and the port number was used to identify data sources Version 4 5 and above of the protocol allow for a much more flexible naming scheme The check box can be cleared to enable advanced naming or ticked to retain compatibility with earlier versions of the protocol Node name The protocol includes a description field identifying the source of each block By default this is set to the host name of the originating machine but it can be over ridden by entering a value in the field Log file It may sometimes be desirable for debugging purposes to separate log messages for this transmitter from the standard system log The text field
179. ess of the Internet gateway router in the Default route gateway field of the network interface configuration form See section 7 1 2 on page 72 for more details MAN EAM 0003 54 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Platinum Firmware Upgrades If the DNS server is not configured correctly or at all the output will look like this eam2010 ping c3 rsync guralp com ping bad address rsync guralp com eam2010 If you are using DHCP it is advisable to correct this problem by reconfiguring the DHCP server to supply the correct name server details If you are using static addressing enter the address of a suitable DNS server in the Nameserver field of the network interface configuration form only available in expert mode See section 7 1 2 on page 72 for more details Note If your internet connection is via a firewall you must ensure that port 873 rsync is open for TCP connections initiated by the acquisition module The following paragraphs explain how to check this To check that your internet connection is correctly configured enter the command rsync rsync guralp com The output should look like this eam2010 rsync rsync guralp com platinum crosslib Libraries required for cross compiling on the Platinum platform platinum stable Stable filesystems for the Platinum platform platinum builder Open source parts of Platinum firmware build tree large eam2010
180. essary to change this but should you desire to the following procedure can be used To set the system identity using the web interface select Configuration Hostname Or Configuration All options System identity hostname To set the system identity from the command line start gconfig and select System identity hostname from the top level menu The following screen is displayed System identity host name This is the name used to identify the system internally and to other systems in the local network system ID eam2079 local net Host name one word Use this screen to set the hostname of the system MAN EAM 0003 261 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Appendices 16 2 Appendix B Using third party terminal emulators There are a number of terminal emulator programs that you can use to access the serial ports of the digitiser and the optional networking interface The terminal emulator built into Scream is recommended but if this is not available there are a variety of alternatives Three of these are detailed below 16 2 1 Hyperterminal as provided with Windows XP 1 Click on Start and then Run 2 Enter hypertrm and click on __0k 53 Type the name of a program folder document or Internet resource and Windows will open ik For you 3 The program will ask you for a name for the connection Connection Description ai Hew Connection Ente
181. et up necessary and provided both systems are set to use DHCP both will assign themselves addresses on the same network If the laptop is running Scream you can add a server using the link local network s broadcast address 196 254 255 255 and start communicating immediately If the address of the acquisition device is required for say web access this can be read from Scream s control window or in the acknowledgement window resulting from a GCFPING The acquisition device will search for a DHCP server every minute and should one become available it will ask it for a new address 3 2 3 Assigning a static IP address If you wish to configure a static IP address you must first connect to the command line via a serial port This process is described in section 3 3 on page 30 3 2 3 1 Assigning a static IP address using net setup Once logged in issue the following command eam999 net setup Note This command relies on the EAM understanding what type of terminal emulator you are using If the display is corrupted and not usable set the TERM variable see section 4 3 1 on page 35 or simply power cycle the EAM and use the ip command see section 3 2 3 2 on page 25 instead The following screen is displayed Configuration for eth Select how this interface will be configured Automatically configured by DHCP Static Manually assigned static IP address Off Powered off lt OK gt lt Cancel gt Using the
182. ete Causes this instance to be deleted from the system when the form is submitted Directory Specifies the directory to be monitored and cleaned File sorting Specifies the method used to determine which files should be deleted when the directory becomes too large Several methods are available Lexical alphabetical this method sorts the files by their names in strict ASCII order If the files are named after dates in YYYYMMDD order then this method will remove the oldest files first Reverse lexical this method also uses strict ASCII order If the files are named after dates in YYYYMMDD order then this method will remove the newest files first By version number this method attempts to use a more natural sort order It can cope with file names like a0 a1 a2 a9 a10 a11 and recognise the sequence Files with lower numbers will be removed first The exact algorithm comes from the standard GNU Linux strverscmp function for which documentation can easily be found on the web Reverse version number this method uses the same comparison function as the one above but deletes files in the reverse order MAN EAM 0003 248 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Monitoring Operations File modification time this method ignores the file names and deletes the files which were modified least recently Maximum used space MiB Specifies a threshold in terms of storage space that will trigg
183. ettings If you are happy that you wish to proceed click Restore from backup The backup will be restored and the system will then automatically reboot so that the restored configuration can take effect Note If you you are working on a remote system and have selected Restore network settings this action may sever your communication link Ensure that you understand the consequences before proceeding To restore a configuration backup from the command line enter config backup restore path to file or in abbreviated form contig backup r pach Lo file replacing path to file with the full path directories plus file name of the previously saved configuration backup file If you wish to avoid overwriting the network settings use GOnrig backup 2eslore noO nelwork DaACI TO I1le or in abbreviated form cont Lo backup r N path to file The system will automatically reboot after restoring the configuration so that the new settings can take effect If you don t require the system to automatically reboot add no reboot or R to the options as in config backup restore no reboot path to file or in abbreviated form contig backup r R path to rile 4 4 6 Comparing configurations If more than one saved configuration backup is present on a system any two can be compared to show the differences This is useful both to understand what changes have been made to a system and also to compare two different syste
184. ew 4 2 2 Display options and form submission Many web forms display a series of buttons at the bottom of the form Config home Help Expert Submit Generated at 2011 03 21T15 46 147 by GCS 2 0 7 Portions of output copyright 2011 Guralp Systems Limited The Confighome button returns you to the configuration homepage This page can also be accessed using the All options link in the main menu The ep button displays on line help in blue interleaved with the form fields The xeet_ button changes the display mode to show extra form fields that do not normally need to be changed These expert settings are all described in the relevant section of the manual for that screen When in expert mode the button changes to Simple so that the display can be returned to the default mode The submit button sends the updated settings to the acquisition modules In many cases the changes are accepted immediately some however require a reboot of the modules or attached device User input to the forms is validated after submission Where invalid parameters have been detected an error message is displayed in red below the appropriate field IP address 192 168 0 1 Address in IPv4 or IPv6 format with CIDR format netmask see help Missing CIDR label or netmask length Add trailing number of bits Default route gateway 192 268 0 254 The IP address of the gateway router for access to other networks Invalid ad
185. f the four decimation taps This option requires four numeric values as supplied for the SAMPLES SEC command described in the DM24 manual cont Change which streams are produced as continuous output from each of the decimation taps This option requires four numeric values as supplied for the CONTINUOUS command described in the DM24 manual trig Change which streams are produced as triggered output from each of the decimation taps This option requires four numeric values as supplied for the TRIGGERED command described in the DM24 manual gps baud Set the line speed for the GPS port This option requires a single numeric value the new line speed to use in baud Set the line speed for the DATA IN port This option requires a single numeric value the new line speed to use upgrade Upgrade firmware files only this is the default downgrade Allow firmware files to be downgraded as well as upgraded force Firmware files are to be loaded even if they appear identical or the installed version number cannot be decoded boot file Specify a source file for DM24mk3 bootstrap This option requires a single value file which is the path to the firmware image file to be loaded firm file Specify a source file for DM24mk3 or CD24 firmware This option requires a single value file which is the path to the firmware image file to be loaded dsp file Specify a s
186. face address or hostname Leave blank for all Local service scream Local port number or service name Local address If the acquisition module has multiple IP addresses you can optionally restrict the client so that incoming connections are only listened for on one address Leave blank to listen on all available interfaces Local service Enter the UDP TCP port number on which the server is to listen for data requests Port numbers can be mapped to names using the standard Linux etc services file which can be edited from the command line Leave blank to use the default scream port 1567 MAN EAM 0003 135 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Receiving Data These two fields can normally be left blank 10 3 1 3 Servers On the Servers page you specify the details of any Scream servers from which you want to pull data Scream network client General Network Sener Servers Each server requires a unique name This is used for configuration and logging only name Wostname sorce wre _ C CO C es __ ee C y ee ee Name A descriptive name for identification purposes Hostname Enter the DNS name or IP address of the desired server Service Enter the UDP TCP port number on which the server is listening for data requests Port numbers can be mapped to names using the standard Linux etc services file which can be edited from the command line Type Select whether
187. fer which triggers a flush to the mass storage device The default is 50 but you can also choose 10 25 or 75 MiniSEED compressor This drop down menu allows the operator to select which instance of gdi2miniseed is used as the data source The menu will offer all configured instances 11 2 1 3 GCF GCF is the native recording format of Platinum firmware It can be read directly by Scream and many software packages are available from the GSL web site for converting it into other formats Selecting the GCF tab displays the following screen Home Configuration Storage and recording Storage and recording storage devi MiniSEED BOF Non seismic data NFS Advanced GCF Enabled Zj Check to enable recording of GCF blocks to storage File period 30 minutes Time span held in each output file Large files may be inefficient File name 96 M 0 S R 9 H M gcF Template for building the filename See help for details on the tokens Flush threshold 50 recommended A flush to disk starts when new data in ring rile exceeds this threshold GCF compressor GCF compressor Default instance Select which GCF compressor nubian to get data from Config home Help submit Generated at 2013 04 1571L41 197 by GCS 2 0 11 Portions of output copyright 2013 G ralp Systems Limited MAN EAM 0003 142 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Recording and Retrieving Data E
188. field is supported User Earthworm sender instance 1 description User label for this Earthworm sender instance Enable the sender at system startup Delete L Delete this sender instance Server hostname IP The hostname or IP address to listen on Leave empty for all address Server port service name 16005 The TCP port number or service name to listen on Config home Help Expert submit Generated at 2013 04 16714 56 292 by GCS 2 0 11 Portions of output copyright 2013 G ralp Systems Limited User description This field allows the user to configure a meaningful name for this EarthWorm sender instance MAN EAM 0003 187 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Transmitting Data Enable When ticked causes this service instance to start automatically when the system is re booted If this check box is cleared the service will need to be started manually from the Control Services menu Delete Causes the configuration for this instance to be removed from the system when the form is submitted Server hostname IP address By default the service instance will listen for incoming connections on all available interfaces If this field is populated with an IP address the instance will only listen for connections addressed to the specified IP address This option is only useful on systems with multiple IP addresses Server port service name This field specifies the port on
189. flect their logical function rather than their physical position Enable interface Enables the interface when checked No other configuration settings are changed when the interface is disabled allowing use of the interface to be suspended without deleting the configuration Startup enable Controls whether the interface is enabled automatically when the unit boots Enact on submit Controls whether changes made using the rest of this form take effect immediately or are only written to the configuration files When MAN EAM 0003 71 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Networking Configuration this box is cleared changes will only take effect the next time the unit is booted or the interface is reconfigured with this box ticked Configuration method The drop down menu offers the following choices Static The interface will take its address and routing parameters from values entered by the operator e DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol The interface will attempt to obtain its address and routing parameters from a DHCP server e Unconfigured but powered up possible VLAN trunk The interface will not be used directly but is available for carrying virtual network VLAN traffic Powered off The interface will not be used and the interface chip is disabled reducing the total power consumption by around 200mW 7 1 1 2 Static IP Network interface Static IP address The following par
190. form over the bandwidth of the system effectively white noise Sensor component axis All components simultaneously Duration in seconds minimum 60 BO Amplitude of signal as a percentage of full scale deflection range Calibrate sensor by injecting broadband noise T sensor by injecting a single frequency ee a MAN EAM 0003 226 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Monitoring Operations The sine wave calibration section provides controls for selection of components duration amplitude and frequency Not all instruments support calibration of individual components LAIKA SENSO oy injecung Hroadpangd Aolse I Calibrate sensor by injecting a single frequency signal Causes the digitiser to generate a sine wave at the specified frequency and amplitude for the specified duration The sine wave ts injected in to the sensor to calibrate its response at a single specific frequency Sensor component axis All components simultaneously Duration in seconds minimum 60 60 Amplitude of signal as a percentage of full scale deflection range 0 1 100 Frequency of signal in Hz range 0 004 20 Generated at 2013 07 23710 14 942 by sensorcontrol cei Portions of output copyright 2043 G ralp Systems Limited Note The Amplitude value in all calibration dialogues refers to an arbitrary full scale output from the calibration circuitry It can be left at 10
191. g from the top level menu Now select Create a new VLAN interface 7 3 1 Configurable parameters in simple mode The configurable parameters for virtual network interfaces have two tabbed pages in simple mode Interface and Static IP MAN EAM 0003 82 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Networking Configuration 7 3 1 1 VLAN Interface Network interface VLAN interface creation Hosting Interface ethO Primary wired network interface The interface that will be used for the VLAN VLAN tag The tag to use for the VLAN four digit decimal number Description Newly created VLAN interface User description of the interface Enable interface Ei Allow the interface to be used Startup enable i Start the interface at system startup DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Configuration method Determines how the interface parameters are discovered and set Hosting Interface drop down menu is populated with a list of the physical interfaces present on the system Select the physical interface over which you wish this virtual interface s traffic to flow VLAN tag text field should be populated with the required VLAN tag This identifies packets sent over this interface as belonging to the specified VLAN Description text field can be edited to provide a more useful name for the interface Enable interface check box can be ticked in order to enable the interface or clea
192. ges are generated for every heartbeat packet sent received or expected but missed Debugging messages will normally be written to var log messages but a different file can be specified in Expert mode Home Configuration Services gdi2zew 0 Earthworm sender Heartbeat settings Select whether to send and receive heartbeat packets Export heartbeat timeout 30 The delay in seconds between heartbeat packets sent to the Earthworm instance Export heartbeat message ExpAlive The message to send in the heartbeat packet if they are being used Import heartbeat timeout The aie in seconds between heartbeat packets received from the Earthworm instance Import heartbeat ImpAlive message The message we expect to receive in the heartbeat packet from the Earthworm instance Heartbeat debug L messages Check this box if you want to see debug messages for every heartbeat message Config home Help Expert submit Generated at 2013 04 16715 22 532 by GCS 2 0 11 Portions of output copyright 2013 G ralp Systems Limited 12 3 2 Configurable parameters in Expert mode Clicking the Expert button will display an additional tab Advanced with three extra fieds Home Configuration Services gdi2zew 0 Earthworm sender Advanced options Log file Path to log file Leave blank to use syslog Log level Important notices Minimum severity level of EA to record in log ae GDI multiplexo
193. ggering channel _eeraee secs Average secs ratio Z 0 1 10 2 N 4 1 10 E E 2 1 10 2 Level trigger Trigger Tap 1 100sps External trigger Enable external trigger input Enable external trigger output Triggered output timings ee Pre trigger time 10 seconds x Post trigger time 20 seconds x At least one triggered output must be enabled if any triggers are enabled here F Return to main settings al Addn ew trigger tap STA LTA triggers Activate when the ratio of the short term average to the long term average of the input signal exceeds a configured value Trigger input The drop down menu allows the selection of the input signal to be used for these calculations along with one of three filter settings The available filters have lower corner frequencies based on fixed fractions of the sample frequency specifically 5 15 and 25 of the sample rate The upper corner is 0 9 times the Nyquist frequency 45 of the sample rate For example if a tap configured for 25 samples per second the three filters offered will have pass bands of e 1 25 Hz to 11 25 Hz 5 of 25 Hz is 1 25 Hz and as the Nyquist frequency for 25 samples per second is 12 5 Hz 0 9 X 12 5 11 25 2 5 Hz to 11 25 Hz 15 to 45 of the sample rate and e 6 125 Hz to 11 25 Hz 25 to 45 of the sample rate Note that the filtering specified here is
194. given of command line interactions In these examples a fixed width typeface will be used Example of the fixed width typeface used Commands that you are required to type will be shown in bold Example of the fixed width bold typeface Where data that you type may vary depending on your individual configuration such as parameters to commands these data are additionally shown in italics Example of the fixed width bold italic typeface Putting these together into a single example System prompt user input with variable parameters MAN EAM 0003 9 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Preliminary Notes 1 5 A note on terminology Scientists and engineers from different disciplines often use different terminology to describe similar concepts The following terminology is used consistently throughout this document 1 5 1 Sensor A sensor is an accelerometer velocimeter or other transducer e g geophone or hydrophone with an analogue output i e where a continuously varying voltage is used to represent the magnitude of the quantity being measured A sensor cannot generally be used as a standalone component it forms a sub assembly of an instrument see below 1 5 2 Instrument An instrument is the assembly of sensors control electronics casing and connectors An example of an instrument is the CMG 3T seismometer shown on the right A digital instrument is one that combi
195. gs MAN EAM 0003 236 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Monitoring Operations The screen displays the query options Environmental log query m Output options Choose the start and end time of your query in 1508601 format The start time is the earliest possible time e g 2009 01 01 would be interpreted as 2009 01 01T00 00 00 and the end time is the latest possible time e g 2009 01 01 would be 2009 01 017123 59 59 2011 03 13712 17 302Z Start time 2011 03 14712 17 30Z End time Values to output External power outlet 0O cutoff_hysteresis power Port A power cutoff_hysteresis low_voltage_threshold m Query Choose output file format Download as text tab delimited fields 7 Getdata Configure graph setup For advanced users it is possible to build a CURL query which can be executed regularly e g via cron to extract reports Build CURL query Output options Enter the start and end times of the query If you enter the same date without times e g 2011 03 23 into both boxes the query will select times covering 24 hours from midnight to midnight on the selected date Values to output Select the value required by ticking the boxes To change the available values the environmental logging options will need updating as described in section 14 4 2 on page 235 Query Select the output file format from the drop down menu Th
196. he mass storage device is then ready for use Mass storage devices can also be formatted from the command line with the command eam999 Pt storage format Recording data All data recording is performed by the gdi record service Data are recorded first to a buffer held in flash memory When the buffer utilisation exceeds a configurable percentage data are flushed to the hard drive In low power applications the hard drive will normally be powered down and so MAN EAM 0003 138 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Recording and Retrieving Data must be powered up and mounted before use This is handled by the Pt storage service The disk is dismounted and powered down once the flush is complete An option exists to provide permanent power to the disk Older removable hard drives were equipped with a temperature sensor and heating element In low temperature applications the drive would be automatically warmed to a safe operating temperature before power was applied Modern GSL removable hard drives do not require pre heating The options that control this process are all on one page but given its size it is shown here in sections To configure data storage using the web interface select Configuration Storage and recording Or Configuration All options Storage and recording To configure recording from the command line start gconfig and select Storage and recording from th
197. host port T Note If using a DM24 MkIII seven channel digitiser there is no control over the second sensor Sensor B Any attempt to control the second sensor will act on Sensor A Selecting a device takes you to the Instrument Control page From here one can query mass positions lock unlock and centre the sensor masses and perform calibration functions The form is long and is displayed here in sections Home Control Instruments NETDM C728 NETDM C728 Macca Panin massas For a weak motion instrument causes the sensor s masses to be centred For certain strong motion instruments causes DC offset to be digitally nulled Centre masses Unlock masses for deployment For a weak motion instrument causes the sensor s masses to be unlocked and centred so that it may begin recording seismic signals aiinloesmasses Tandenloyment For a weak motion instrument causes the sensor s masses to be locked in place for transport The sensor will not record seismic signals while the masses are locked Lock masses for transport Ee m oe sensor by injecting a step signal The first part of the screen offers controls to centre unlock and lock the instrument s masses T Note These controls invoke the appropriate digitiser commands An indication of success means that the digitiser has accepted the command but does not imply that it has executed correctly MAN EAM 0003 22
198. i case Data Out port This is a standard 10 pin mil spec plug conforming to MIL DTL 26482 formerly MIL C 26482 A typical part number is O2E 12 10P although the initial 02E varies with manufacturer Suitable mating connectors have part numbers like m _12 10S and are available from Amphenol ITT Cannon and other manufacturers The pin out is the same as the serial output of a DM24 digitizer allowing you to insert a acquisition module into a pre existing installation and maintain connectivity e B Power mpu 1010335706 OSS ofsszcrs S Wiring details for the compatible socket 12 10S as seen from the cable end i e during assembly MAN EAM 0003 274 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Appendices 16 5 3 Peli case USB This is a standar d 6 pin mil spec socket conforming to MIL DTL 26482 formerly MIL C 26482 A typical part number is 02E 10 06S although the initial 02E varies with manufacturer Suitable mating connectors have part numbers like _10 06P and are available from Amphenol ITT Cannon and other manufacturers ad Function 5 V DC USB Type A pin 1 Data ve USB Type A pin 2 Data ve USB Type A pin 3 0 V USB Type A pin 4 Shielding not connected Wiring details for the compatible plug _10 06P as seen from the cable end i e during assembly MAN EAM 0003 275 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Module
199. iB Each entry in the table has a View button which shows detail from the relevant log at block packet level The view for Port A is shown here MAN EAM 0003 242 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Monitoring Operations GCF audit log viewer Port A Search within this log i Recent entries 2011 03 08 00 00 04 35 Block type status Number of bytes 212 ID LW 10500 Timestamp 60 00 03 14 n GCF block 2011 03 08T15 59 41 0000000007 00 19 BA 50 15 59 44 128 ancien Digitiser CMG DM24 mk3 3c cA Eo ED Block type status Ss Number of bytes 212 ID LW 10500 Timestamp 20 00 03 14 GCF block 2011 03 08T15 59 41 0000000007 00 19 BA 50 received Digitiser CMG DM24 mk3 lab clea yes O i E Block type status sila ngs Number of bytes 212 ID LW 10500 Timestamp 80 00 03 14 GCF block 2011 03 08T15 59 41 0000000007 00 19 BA 50 15 59 44 318 ceived Digitiser CMG DM24 mk3 oe ee The first column shows the time that the block was received not the time stamp on the block itself and the second column shows the event type GCF block received in most cases The Details column shows the stream ID from the received data block and the block time stamp The digitiser ID is shown if it is encoded in the block otherwise a best guess is displayed The rest of the entry shows the block type sample rate compression level and the
200. ibit progress messages aS S syslog Log to syslog rather than screen Backup options C comment lt text gt Comment for this backup Restore options R hO reboOor Do not reboot after a restore N no network Do not restore network settings hostname IP addresses MAN EAM 0003 50 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Platinum Firmware Upgrades 9 Platinum Firmware Upgrades 5 1 Platinum firmware is regularly updated to provide extra features improve performance and occasionally to correct errors The upgrade process is normally fast simple and can be carried out remotely using either the web or command line interface but see the important notes below Note This procedure does not upgrade the firmware of connected or embedded digitisers which should be upgraded using the web interface or the dm24 upgrade command as documented in section 8 2 3 on page 115 The upgrade process makes use of the rsync protocol which uses an elegant and efficient algorithm to effectively transfer only the differences between revisions even within individual files This significantly reduces the time required compared to traditional upgrade methods Important notes regarding build 10 000 5 1 1 Significant changes at build 10 000 All systems that run Platinum excluding the CMG NAM are based around ARM microprocessors Platinum relies on the Linux operating system and a number
201. ic addressing check and correct the Default route gateway field in the Network interface configuration page as described in section 7 1 1 on page 71 16 4 3 Upgrades report rsync error If an attempt to run the upgrade process using the GSL rsync server over the internet produces error messages like rsync error received SIGINT SIGTERM or SIGHUP code 20 at rsync c 541 the likelihood is that a firewall is blocking traffic on the rsync port Ask your network administrator to permit the EAM to open TCP connections to host rsync guralp comon port 873 16 4 4 Errors during upgrade directory not empty This message can occur under two separate sets of circumstances On CMG DCMs running firmware earlier than Build 3696 this message could appear in relation to files with the so extension and or files in the MAN EAM 0003 270 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Appendices usr share terminfo directory Such units should have their firmware upgraded twice to the latest version The first upgrade installs a new upgrade script and the second upgrade runs the new script which fixes this problem In all other cases this message signifies nothing of concern and can be safely ignored 16 4 5 Upgrade completes but build version remains at 3801 Build 3801 was the last Platinum build that used the OABI software architecture Subsequent versions use EABI The two software architectures
202. ied in the subsequent fields The port can be specified as either a name or anumber The mapping from port names to port numbers is configured by the conventional Linux file etc services which can be edited from the command line if required Target client Connections accepted by the port forward will be forwarded to the client identified by the contents of this field The field should be populated with the Username that was configured on the Server tab of the GSTM client as described in section 13 2 1 1 on page 212 T Note The client is specified by Username rather than I P address as might be expected This is to support clients that might be connecting from dynamic I P addresses Target service port Connections accepted by the port forward will be forwarded to this port on the remote client The port can be specified as either a name or a number The mapping from port names to port numbers is configured by the conventional Linux file etc services which can be edited from the command line if required Clicking the button on any row will open a new row In the same way rows can be deleted by clicking the corresponding button MAN EAM 0003 217 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Monitoring Operations 14 Monitoring Operations 14 1 This chapter details how to monitor and control the acquisition module Some functionality is only available from the command line when conne
203. imum Transfer Unit to be set for the network link This parameter controls the maximum packet size used for outgoing network packets If any segment of a link between two systems has a restriction on packet size larger packets flowing across the link must be fragmented broken into smaller parts and then re assembled on arrival This is inefficient and can badly affect the throughput of a link In such situations it makes sense to restrict the maximum packet size at the sender to match the limitation so that all packets can pass unimpeded There is no method to empirically determine the optimum MTU for a given link from the acquisition module itself but if the link is to a PC or in the case of say a link between two acquisition modules one end can temporarily be replaced by a PC the PC can be used to investigate the link properties and the correct value can be obtained For more information please see http www dslreports com faq 695 Note that if testing from a PC running Windows the MTU of the Windows PC should be set to 1500 before starting the test 7 1 2 2 DCHP options Extra dhcpcd arguments Used to change the operation of the DHCP client Please see http man wiki net index php 8 dhcpcd for information about what options can be added here Network interface DHCP options IP aliasing DHCP options Extra dhcped arguments Additional arguments passed to the dhcpced program 7 1 2 3 Static IP Expert
204. ing additional configuration parameters are available by clicking the Expert button at the bottom of the form and selecting the Advanced tab GDI link receiver gdi link rx receives samples in the native protocol of the Platinum software suite called Guralp Data Interconnect This is a low latency real time transmission protocol which sends encoded state of health with samples Advanced options Log file Path to log file Leave blank to use syslog Log level Important notices hai Minimum severity level of messages to record in log GDI multiplexor Default data tansport daemon Select which GDI multiplexor instance to compress data from Log file It may sometimes be desirable for debugging purposes to separate log messages for this transmitter from the standard system log The text field can be populated with a path name which will then be used for dedicated logging If left blank logging occurs via the standard Linux syslog facility to var log messages Log level The drop down menu controls the level of detail present in log messages whether to syslog or to a dedicated log file Not all of the standard syslog logging levels are available The menu offers a choice in order of decreasing detail of e Debugging information e Informational message MAN EAM 0003 210 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Building Networks 13 2 Important notices Warnings GDI mult
205. ing mode Data is stored in local flash storage A perodic status heartbeat is transmitted to inform listeners that data is available from storage Enable adaptive data mode Data is transmitted in real time whenever possible Any un acknowledged transmission is stored and retransmitted oldest first when the line is not being used for real time traffic Enable FIFO data mode Data is stored locally and transmitted in strict FIFO order If the link is lost for a period realtime data will be delayed while the stored data is transmitted Enable dual data mode Continuous data is transmitted as if in direct mode and Triggered data is stored in flash as if in filing mode Enable duplicate mode Data is transmitted as if in direct mode and also stored in flash as in filing mode although without the heartbeat operation The Transmission mode selections are exactly as defined on the form Note that Direct is the default and preferred method of transmission 8 1 1 10 Storage Mode Storage mode Enable storage re use When local storage is full new data arriving will over write the oldest data in the buffer Enable write once storage When local storage is full new data arriving will be transmitted as if in direct mode and will not over write the already stored data Reset flash buffers on next digitiser update In the storage mode section selecting the Reset flash buffers on next digitiser update check box wil
206. ional service can be started in response This will typically be another GSTM client in order to establish a back up link The GSTM client to be started should be identified here by its service descriptor which takes the form gstm client n where n is an integer 0 denotes the first configured client instance 1 the second and so on MAN EAM 0003 213 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Building Networks Link established command When the GSTM link is established or re established it is possible to run an arbitrary command Any text entered in the Link established command field is passed to the Linux shell for execution so this can be a single command or the path to a shell script to execute multiple commands Please contact G ralp support if you need assistance with this feature 13 2 2 The GSTM Server GSTM clients initiate connections to GSTM servers To configure a GSTM server from the web interface select Configuration All options System services Network Or Configuration Services Network Now select G ralp secure TCP multiplexor server The resulting screen shows a list of all GSTM server instances that have been configured on the acquisition module To create or edit a GSTM server click the appropriate link 13 2 2 1 Configurable parameters in simple mode The configurable parameters for the GSTM server have four tabbed pages in simple mode General Server Cli
207. iplexer In most configurations all data for all transmitters is taken from a single multiplexor as described in section 6 1 on page 65 For more complex configurations it is possible to configure multiple multiplexers each with their own set of input and output services In these situations the drop down menu can be used to select a multiplexer instance with which to associate this transmitter The menu offers a list of currently configured multiplexers Guralp Secure TCP Multiplexer The G ralp Secure TCP Multiplexer GSTM is a method by which TCP connections can be tunnelled in both directions over a single TCP connection It is an essential tool in situations where local network service providers cannot provide fixed static IP addresses For example in an installation involving a single central data collection point and multiple remote sensor sites it is sometimes impractical for the sensor sites to be allocated static IP addresses The use of GSTM allows the remote sites each to initiate a single GSTM TCP connection to the central site Once established further TCP connections can be initiated in either direction their packets are tunnelled over the GSTM link If no sites in an array can be assigned fixed IPs including the central data collection point a GSL EAM or GSL NAM can be installed anywhere that has a fixed IP address and used as a communications hub All sites initiate GSTM connections to the hub which can then act
208. is can be set to meaningful names for the data that each will be handling Enable Causes this service to start automatically when the system is re booted If this check box is cleared the service will need to be started manually from the Control Services menu Delete Causes the configuration for this instance to be removed from the system when the form is submitted Buffer size GCF data from the compressor are held in a ring buffer from which all client services such as GCF transmitters or the mass storage device recorder read The number in the field determines both how long a communication link can be down before data are lost and the time interval between flush to disk operations which can affect power consumption The next section of this page shown overleaf contains a drop down menu and a table which allow the operator to control which channels are transmitted and optionally renaming them Channels GCF compressor Channels Select which channels to compress See help for more details Wanie noe LW DEVOE2 LW DEVOE2 a nc Naming mode The drop down menu offers three choices e Automatic all channels are compressed and named automatically Offers no filtering and uses the system generated names for each channel as forwarded by gdi base e Semi automatic all channels are compressed names may be mapped below One or more of the channels may be renamed by adding en
209. is displayed at the top of the page Home Configuration Instruments Digitiser NETDM C 728 Digitiser configuration NETDM C728 m Identity system identification NETDM Software version v 106 build 57j A software update to version v 106 build 57k is available for this digitiser Connected devices and a check box is displayed at the bottom of the page Miscellaneous features amp Transmit Unified Status Packets Recommended _ Set the digitiser clock from the system clock on next form submission rr She igi n 2 Upgrade firm A ware to version Help Refresh display Submit changes amp Reboot digitiser Generated at 2013 07 23711 03 117 by digitiser config cei 1 1 13 Portions of output copyright 2013 Giralp Systems Limited To upgrade tick the check box and click Submitchanges amp Reboot digitiser MAN EAM 0003 230 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Monitoring Operations 14 3 3 2 Upgrading from the command line The dm24 upgrade command can be used to update the firmware of attached DM24 and CD24 digitisers When invoked without arguments it displays a detailed usage message When invoked with the name of a port e g Port A or PortA as an argument the command will identify the type of attached digitiser and the current firmware revision and will upgrade it if necessary For example the command
210. it or Ctrl D the disk will be unmounted It will remain mounted and thus powered up until you exit Then you will be returned to your original shel sx media 69BA 6202 280093936 acfraw 2809336110367 act E Receive File Place received file in the following folder C Documents and E Receive Filename modem never sends a filename 0 nou must specii a filename for stoma the recened file Foker C Documents and Setlings fish Fiename AS33657 10302 ocd ANSI 115200 8 N 1 EAM HyperTerminal File Edit wiew Call Transfer Help Requesting disk with UUID 69BA 6202 Ihe disk 18 mounted at media H 6202 H new bash session has been created When you exit from thi the disk will be unmou you exit Then you wil ae sx media Stomng as C Documents and Sethngs Vish 2009336T 1030 gel i or Ctrl D Amodem file receive for EAM ed u 5 until Packet Eror checking CAC Reties Totalreties 0 File 16K Last eror Throughput 3148 cps Elapsat You will be returned to the prompt when the transfer is complete 11 3 2 Reading the removable drive on other computers The mass storage device may be disconnected from the system at any time without risk of data loss In practice users will normally manually flush the memory contents to mass storage device using either the gdi record flush command or the Flushtostorage button on the Removable disk page of the web interface and allow tha
211. itten to the removable USB FireWire disk and can be read via the web interface the command line or by removing the mass storage device and attaching it to an external USB or FireWire host such as a PC or laptop e External USB drive on mil spec connector data will be stored on external media which should be attached to the USB connector The Pt storage daemon handles the required operations for mounting and un mounting the file system e Internal USB storage for cylindrical digitisers only data can be stored on internal USB accessible flash memory It can be retrieved by a USB host such as a laptop connected via the GPIO connector See section 15 1 3 1 on page 256 for more details e Ring buffer on flash module some systems are equipped with an external flash module to extend the storage capacity beyond that available on the normal file system Data written here are accessible via the web interface or from the command line under the path media flash module Record files under var spool recdata this is the only option on CMG NAMs and CMG NAM64s and it is not available on other platforms Data are written directly to the internal hard drive and are accessible via the web interface or from the command line under the path var spool recdata e Remote NFS mount this option causes data to be written to a remote network accessible storage device that uses NFS as the underlying protocol such a
212. ket received 1970 01 04714 50 262 GCF audit log viewer Removable dick oui india hl amet View saved XML snapshot Download snapshotas XML Show hidden values Systems Limited T Genemied of ITALJET SLL by miete gt Portions of ouipat copyright D 1970 G ralp Systems Ltd MAN EAM 0003 218 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Monitoring Operations 14 1 2 System Log The most important source of diagnostic and debugging information is the system log facility syslog This logs all messages from programs and from the Linux kernel At present this can only be viewed from the command line To view the system logs you can use the tail less grep or vi commands to inspect the file var log messages older files are available as var log messages 1 var log messages 2 etc Use the following syntax to view the files e tail var log messages Views the last few entries e tail f var log messages As above but after printing the last ten lines of the file continues to run printing each new line as it is added to the log Type eE to stop the output and return to the command line e less var log messages Views the whole log file use the cy o Home and keys to navigate and the key to exit e vi var log messages Those users familiar with the vi text editor may wish to use it as the most powerful way to view log entries e grep i string var log messages Searches for a string or patt
213. l cause all data in the flash storage to be erased and the read pointers to be reset Note Use this facility with caution Data will be erased so if they are important ensure that they have been flushed to storage and are readable before clearing the buffer MAN EAM 0003 111 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Digitiser Configuration 8 1 1 11 Transmission Parameters Transmission parameters Heartbeat interval 18 seconds The periodic status heartbeat is only used with tiling and dual data modes Acknowledgement 150 milliseconds delay How long to wait before a transmission is assumed to have failed Heartbeat interval When the digitiser is in the filing or dual transmission modes regular heart beat messages are sent This allows software such as Scream to be aware of the devices even though they are not sending sampled waveform data The frequency of these messages can be set to an integer number of seconds Acknowledgement delay When the digitiser is in the adaptive or FIFO transmission modes special action is taken if data cannot be transmitted The acknowledgement delay field controls how long the digitiser waits for an acknowledgement packet before assuming that the link has failed This should be set to an integer number of milliseconds 8 1 1 12 Ports The Ports section of the web page allows control of the baud rates of the digitiser s serial por
214. l that is required to deploy a unit is to restore the correct data processing configuration hub or element and then restore the appropriate network configuration Configuration files can also be backed up and stored on different sites to provide a disaster management resource Arbitrary pairs of stored configurations may be compared to reveal what changed between them T Note It is recommended that configuration backups are only restored onto acquisition units with hardware and firmware revision identical to those on the unit on which it was saved Failure to adhere to this policy could result in unexpected behaviour or in extreme cases an unusable system T Note Libraries of stored configurations should be updated after each firmware upgrade 4 4 1 Automatic saving of configurations The system checks every hour for configuration changes and if any have been made in the preceding hour an automatic configuration backup is performed This provides a useful audit trail and a convenient means to return to previous configurations Automatically saved configurations can be distinguished from manually saved configuration by inspecting the file names displayed on the Configuration Save Restore web page Automatically saved configurations have file names of the the form auto nnnnnnnn hostname where nnnnnnnn is an automatically incremented sequence number and hostname is the host name of the acquisition unit Configurations sav
215. latinum Firmware Appendices 16 5 6 Cylinder GPIO These are standard 12 pin mil spec sockets conforming to MIL DTL 26482 formerly MIL C 26482 A typical part number is O2E 14 12S although the initial 02E varies with manufacturer Suitable mating connectors have part numbers like _14 12P and are available from Amphenol ITT Cannon and other manufacturers The USB lines provide external host access to the internal USB memory device When power is sensed on pin J an internal switch disconnects the memory device from the internal circuitry and connects it to this socket Pin Function USB Data ve USB Type A pin 2 see text above USB Data ve USB Type A pin 3 see text above Anti tamper line 4 Anti tamper line 3 Anti tamper line 2 Anti tamper line 1 A B C D E F G Console transmit RS232 TXD H J K L M Console receive RS232 RXD USB Power input USB Type A pin 1 see text above USB Ground USB Type A pin 4 Anti tamper line 0 Ground Wiring details for the compatible plug _14 12P as seen from the cable end i e during assembly MAN EAM 0003 278 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Appendices 16 5 7 Cylinder GPS This is a standard 10 pin mil spec plug conforming to MIL DTL 26482 formerly MIL C 26482 A typical part number is O2E 12 10P although the initial 02E varies with manufacturer Suitable mating connectors have
216. leaning in new directory Config home Generated at 2012 06 19T08 45 117 by GCS 2 0 11 Portions of output copyright 2012 G ralp Systems Limited To edit an existing instance click the appropriate link To create a new instance click Setup cleaning in new directory The resulting screen allows you to configure the parameters of the selected instance MAN EAM 0003 247 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Monitoring Operations 14 5 1 1 Configurable parameters All parameters for a directory cleaner instance are displayed on a single screen Home Configuration Tasks Directory cleaner 0 Directory cleaner Configure the settings for a single directory here The directory cleaner is recursive and will delete files or entire subdirectories under the given directory At least one constraint maximum size or number of files must be specified Delete Check to delete this task Directory Directory in which old files will be removed File sorting Lexical alphabetical Select order to sort files to find the oldest ones Maximum used space MiB The maximum space that files in the directory are allowed to use in mebibytes Maximum number of files The maximum number of files that the directory is allowed to hold Confighome Help Submit Generated at 2012 06 12T08 52 042 by GCS 2 0 11 Portions of output copyright 2012 G ralp Systems Limited Del
217. lect the port to which the modem is connected Change the function of the port to PPP PPP network connection with the correct baud rate for the modem Click Submit to save MAN EAM 0003 91 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Networking Configuration these changes Go back to the configuration of the serial port and click on PPP network configuration 1 1 2 Configurable parameters The configurable parameters for each port on the PPP connection screen have three tabs General IP and Authentication 7 7 2 1 General Data Out PPP settings Authentication General setting Connection type Local serial link active client mode The connection style to use Number of seconds to power down modem between calls 0 Connection type has the following options e Local serial link active client mode e Local serial link passive server mode GPRS connection via Vodafone GPRS connection via T Mobile The choices available from this menu reflect the chat scripts installed on your system If you wish to use a satellite modem or GPRS with an ISP other than those listed please contact G ralp Systems Ltd technical support Number of seconds to power down modem between calls Set the desired power down time for the modem if required This can be useful with modems that are prone to entering undefined states and ensures a clean reset before each new connection MAN EAM 0003 92 Issue E February 2014
218. lerometer digitiser and EAM Ports This section lists the ports external connectors found on Platinum systems Not all ports listed in this section are available on all devices A typical NAM for example only has power and Ethernet ports while the CMG 5TCDE integrated instruments have Data GPS Ethernet GPIO and USB as Note Refer to section 16 5 on page 273 for information on connector pin outs 2 5 1 Ports A B C The 10 pin data input ports accept serial data from digitisers for processing by an acquisition module They can also be used for other functions as listed in the description of the Power Data port below 2 5 2 SENSOR ports CMG DAS units have one or more 26 pin connectors for attaching analogue instruments They provide power and control signals to the instruments and accept analogue data from the sensors The number of input connectors depends on the model of the digitiser 2 5 3 Ethernet The 6 pin Ethernet port is a 10BASE T 100BASE TX Ethernet connection referred to as ethO within the user interface The supplied cable supports connection to a hub switch or router If direct connection to a PC or laptop is required an optional cross over cable can be ordered MAN EAM 0003 14 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Equipment Overview 2 6 2 5 4 GPIO The 12 pin GPIO General Purpose Input Output port fulfils three functions It provides a serial console t
219. link tx default by default but if you have changed this you should specify the new location here File sorting set to Lexical Maximum used space or Maximum number of files use either or both of these to limit how much back fill is retained The gdi link tx back fill process generates one file per hour so setting Maximum number of files to 24 for example will guarantee 24 hours of back fill Note The size of the back fill files varies with data compressibility If you specify a large number of files to be retained you should monitor operation for several hours and then check that the configured number of files multiplied by their average size does not exceed the free space on the disk 13 1 2 The GDI link receiver To configure a GDI link receiver via the web interface select Configuration Services GDI or Configuration All options System services GSI Now select gdi link rx GDI link receiver The screen shows a list of all GDI link receiver instances that have been configured on the acquisition module MAN EAM 0003 207 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Building Networks GDI link receiver instance selection Select the GDI link receiver instance you wish to configure System gdi link receiver does not start automatically Create new service instance In most cases you will only need a single instance and you can enable and reconfigure the D
220. listen on all available IP addresses Bind host Enter the service name or port number on which you want the server instance to listen If you are configuring multiple server instances each needs a unique service port The service name to port number mapping is stored in the standard Linux file etc services which can be edited from the command line TCP keepalive The server is capable of generating TCP keep alive packets in order to defeat any automatic disconnect on idle mechanisms which may be present on the link Tick the check box to enable this feature Watchdog interval Like the GSTM client the GSTM server also generates watchdog packets to monitor for link failure These may also be more effective at maintaining a link than TCP keep alives because some network devices automatically block and or spoof keep alive packets Watchdog packets are sent after a certain amount of time when the link appears to be idle and at regular intervals thereafter until traffic is detected This time interval can be configured by entering an integer value in seconds in the field MAN EAM 0003 215 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Building Networks Clients tab GSTM server Clients __I A single GSTM server instance can accept simultaneous connections from multiple clients For each client enter Client name Should contain the username as configured in the GSTM client E
221. ly with all input modules which handle the various incoming data streams and all output modules which convert the data into the required formats All incoming data are stored and accessed internally in an intermediate format regardless of the format in which it was originally received Note The sole exception to this is incoming CD1 1 data which for reasons related to frame signing an authentication technology do not pass through gdi base CD1 1 data handling and the associated system configuration are covered in a separate manual MAN EAM 1100 which is available for download from www guralp com The diagram below shows the basic internal organisation of an acquisition system ignoring the CD1 1 subsystem multiplexor gdi base buffering output modules disk interface e qdi record z The multiplexor makes incoming data available to the output modules These come in two flavours simple modules such as those for WIN GSMS and QSCD simply convert the data streams and output them in the required format other modules maintain a ring buffer which is used to for example satisfy BRP back fill requests The ring buffers use the NAND flash memory These output modules also send data to gdi record which handles all mass storage device writing requests regardless of format MAN EAM 0003 65 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Data Handling
222. m State directory var lib gcfout brp PonL Directory in which application state is stored Log file It may sometimes be desirable for debugging purposes to separate log messages for this transmitter from the standard system log The text field can be populated with a path name which will then be used for dedicated logging If left blank logging occurs via the standard Linux syslog facility to var log messages Log level The drop down menu controls the level of detail present in log messages whether to syslog or to a dedicated log file Not all of the standard syslog logging levels are available The menu offers a choice in order of decreasing detail of MAN EAM 0003 168 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Transmitting Data e Debugging information e Informational messages Important notices or Warnings Audit log size The GCF BRP serial sender keeps its own audit log independent from the system log The contents of this log are available using the GCF Audit Log viewer facility as described in section 14 4 5 on page 241 The amount of data retained is controlled by the drop down menu where the choices are 64Kib small e 256Kib medium 2MiB large e 16MiB huge GDI multiplexer In most configurations all data for all transmitters is taken from a single multiplexor as described in section 6 1 on page 65 For more complex configurations it is
223. m the GCF convertor or only a subset All blocks Select which types of block to transmit Output type Max sample rate samples per second If filtering by sample rate the maximum sample rate to send lf filtering by channel name the channels to be transmitted should be entered into the table below The exact name of the channel must be given in the format SYSID STRID Output type The drop down menu offers a choice of e All blocks filtering by block type is disabled e Only status blocks no data blocks are transmitted e Only blocks below a certain sample rate the threshold inclusive rate is specified in the following text field e Only blocks matching a list of channel names offering the highest granularity of control Max sample rate If the output type is set to Only blocks below a certain sample rate the text field is used to specify the inclusive threshold above which data are not transmitted If the Output type field is set to Only blocks matching a list of channel names the channel names must be specified in the channel name table MAN EAM 0003 177 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Transmitting Data Channel name L Channels should be specified by giving their system ID and their stream ID separated by a hyphen Clicking the button on any row will open a new row In the same way rows can be deleted by clicking the corr
224. mand line configuration system sssesessssessessrersersserssressersserssees 35 4 3 0 Using graphical interfaces from the Command line sneeeessssseresesssssrrrressseees 35 A 3h Usine CC OTIS spss ios sssepesven saben O T TAEA 36 L LOX MOMUEY eld Sis cesta caaassnui dota A sone a e a A 37 ABD GC CK DONO Scpa E E O 38 TA Drop down MENUS rerata O 38 To Using DOL MUG x casera TEA TTA A A A 39 AA GONTICUTATION Mana Ge IMM spei ne an A E O 41 4 4 0 Automatic saving of configurations ssessssssseessssseresssseesereseressesserssersseessees 42 dAl Savin AiCOMM CUA Oeann a NEE A AA OEE 43 4 4 2 Downloading a saved configuration sessssesessssressssrerssssserrssssrerssseesseessees 44 4 4 3 Uploading a saved Configuration cccccccccsessccccecseeccceesaeeecccessasscceesaaeesceeaees 45 AAA KReStOri 07a COMM OUP AO Nicssiarssterdindintincedsain eden RT 45 44n Compan COMMPGUTALIONS cepa ieee dana ATA 46 4 4 6 Deleting saved configurations sseeessssseeessssecrsssssceessssceresscsseeeserssersseesserssee 48 4 4 7 Transferring backups between systemS s ssessssssesssseresserssrresersserssersserseens 49 AAG Technica detalls ausigue 49 5 Platinum Firmware Uperades setesi E N E ENA AEAEE 51 5 1 Important notes regarding build 10 000 esssesssssrsssserssssrersserrsssrersssenserssessersees 51 5 1 0 Significant changes at build 10 000 ss ssessssessssssreresssreressserssersserssresersssress 51
225. menu which leads to a sub menu the lt ait option changes to o and invoking it will then take you back to the top level menu Selecting a menu item will lead you either to another menu or to a form Forms are composed of text entry fields check boxes or drop down menus all described below To move between fields use the iy v or keys 4 3 3 Text entry fields Text entry fields are those into which the operator can type textual parameters Text entry fields are identified by surrounding braces and MAN EAM 0003 37 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Platinum Overview To edit the contents of a text entry field move the cursor on the field and start typing Characters typed are always inserted at the current cursor position i e existing characters are never over typed The whole field is shown with a black background as seen below and the cursor is identifiable as a pale block i n i a i The Ka and gt keys move the cursor within the field and the key deletes characters to the left of the cursor 4 3 4 Check boxes Check boxes offer the operator a yes no choice Check boxes are identified by surrounding guillemots and To change the setting of a check box move the cursor on the field and use the key to toggle between selected and not selected 99 66 When the value is yes enabled or otherwise selected the field is shown with an X in it
226. messages to record in log Audit log size 256KiB medium Debug port TCP port number or service name to which a copy of input is sent Port name override Replacement port name to display for terminal access GDI multiplexor Default data transport daemon Select which GDI multiplexor instance to send data to Log file It may sometimes be desirable for debugging purposes to separate log messages for this transmitter from the standard system log The text field can be populated with a path name which will then be used for dedicated logging If left blank logging occurs via the standard Linux syslog facility to var log messages Log level The drop down menu controls the level of detail present in log messages whether to syslog or to a dedicated log file Not all of the standard syslog logging levels are available The menu offers a choice in order of decreasing detail of e Debugging information e Informational messages Important notices Warnings Audit log size The GCF input subsystem keeps its own audit log independent from the system log The contents of this log are available using the GCF Audit Log viewer facility as described in section 14 4 5 on page 241 The amount of data retained is controlled by the drop down menu where the choices are 64Kib small e 256Kib medium 2MiB large e 16MiB huge MAN EAM 0003 133 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and
227. modules available in various cases and form factors suitable for deployment in the field It is compatible with all G ralp digitisers and instruments Multiple digitisers and instruments can be attached and controlled by a single module with data being recorded to a removable hard disk on peli cased modules or internal or external flash either as a standalone recorder or as a backup for data communications The EAM has 100BASE TX and 10BASE T Ethernet up to 8 serial ports for connecting to external devices and a USB port for use with external storage Cylindrical versions have additional ports including a USB port that can be connected directly to a PC for access to the internal storage The EAM can be supplied as standalone borehole and sensor integrated variants Other options include tamper line monitoring external power control and an authentication module 2 3 2 Data Communications Module The CMG DCM is the precursor of the CMG EAM It is a versatile Linux based module for storing and transmitting digitised data CMG DCMs were originally supplied with different firmware which is no longer supported Platinum firmware as used on CMG EAMS has been ported to the CMG DCM platform and all users are recommended to upgrade their CMG DCMs to run Platinum firmware An article on our web site http www guralp com upgrading cmg dcm units with legacy firmware to pla tinum firmware has full details of the upgrade procedure 2 3 3 Ne
228. ms To compare two systems save a configuration backup on one download it to a PC upload it to the second system without restoring it and then use the comparison feature to reveal the differences between the two MAN EAM 0003 46 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Platinum Overview Each stored configuration is displayed with two radio buttons next to it as shown below Configuration backup Please note DM24 CD24 ADC module configuration is not saved or restored by this program even if the ADC module is integrated internally into this system ld Back up current configuration Upload backup file Ifyou have previously downloaded a backup file perhaps from another Platinum umt you may upload a copy to this device Choose File Mo file chosen Upload backup file Saved backups show differences between selected backups S i Show Filename Date saved Description Actions lifferenc Download copy 2013 04 2013 04 Test backup for eae 12 1131 eam2243 fish 12711437 documentation SEINEM EMAI up Delete this backup Automatic backups Automatic backup due to changed files auto 00000001 2013 04 fete gqdi record gqdi Download copy camag fish q2T144 07 record local Restore this backup reter init local net eth auto 00000000 2013 03 l l Download copy First automatic backup eam e43 Tish 13T12 202 Festore this backup show differences between sel
229. n Display help text Show expert mode fields Submit the current form Move to the next page of a multi page form Move to the previous page of a multi page form cu sg m O a E u 4 4 Configuration Management Platinum has a comprehensive configuration management system that allows both complete configurations and individual classes of configuration information such as data processing and networking to be saved individually and merged during restoration Note This system does not save the configuration of any attached ADC modules DM24 or CD24 Only the Platinum configuration is stored MAN EAM 0003 41 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Platinum Overview This feature can be very useful when multiple acquisition modules are to be configured for a project In a typical array with a central communications hub only two data processing configurations need be created one for the hub and one for an array element The latter can then be copied from acquisition module to acquisition module avoiding having to configure each unit individually Network configurations need be created for each element of the array and for the hub but these can all be created and stored on a single acquisition module If the complete set of stored configurations is then copied to each machine and to any hot spares then every acquisition module becomes rapidly interchangeable al
230. n as compression as it can compress four samples into the space otherwise occupied by a single value The digitiser can be configured to limit the amount of compression used decreasing latency The difference values are stored in records which are four bytes long and so may contain four 8 bit differences two 16 bit differences or one 32 bit difference A GCF packet can contain up to 250 records so the maximum number of samples in a packet is between 250 when 32 bit differences are used and 1000 for eight bit differences Packets must start on whole second boundaries so they are not always filled In addition it is possible to configure the digitiser to further restrict the number of records in a packet in order to decrease latency The drop down menu controls both of these settings and normally offers the following choices Recommended for 200sps or less 8 bit 20 records maximum 80 samples Represents the best compromise for throughput allowing 8 bit compression potentially increases the number of samples per MAN EAM 0003 106 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Digitiser Configuration packet and limiting packets to twenty records guarantees reasonably low latency Maximum recommended for 250sps or more 8 bit 250 records maximum 1000 samples Optimises line utilisation allowing maximum compression and minimising the number of packet headers transmitted Minimum for lowest la
231. nabled GCF recording will be enabled if this check box is ticked and disabled otherwise File period This drop down menu offers a choice of file periods the options are 15 or 30 minutes and 1 2 3 4 6 12 or 24 hours If set for example to 15 minutes four files will be generated each hour whereas if set to 24 hours only one file will be generated per day The files may contain a single component or multiple components see the next field description for details The default file period is 30 minutes File name The contents of this field determine how the data files are named Tokens within the field are replaced by parameters derived from the data while all other characters are coped verbatim into the resulting file names It is possible to organise files into hierarchical directories by using forward slash characters in this field Please see section 11 2 2 on page 146 for details of the tokens that can be used Note that if this field contains any token that identifies a stream individual files will be created for each stream If no such token is present multiple streams will be recorded into each file Flush threshold This drop down menu allows control over the percentage utilisation of the GCF ring buffer which triggers a flush to the mass storage device The default is 50 but you can also choose 10 25 or 75 GCF compressor This drop down menu allows the operator to select which instance of gdi2gcf is used as the da
232. ncryption key Should match that configured in the client see the notes about the client configuration in section 13 2 1 on page 211 for more information Startup command The GSTM server can run an arbitrary command when a client successfully initiates communication Any text entered into this column is passed to the Linux shell for execution The path to a shell script can be entered here if it is required to run multiple commands Contact G ralp support if you need assistance with this feature Clicking the button on any row will open a new row In the same way rows can be deleted by clicking the corresponding button Forwards tab GSTM server Port forwards ftir MAN EAM 0003 216 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Building Networks An active GSTM link can forward arbitrary TCP connections to the clients from any host that can access the server For each desired port forward enter the following information Listen address By default the port forward will listen for incoming connections on all available interfaces If this field is populated with an IP address the port forward will only listen for connections addressed to that address This option is only useful on systems with multiple IP addresses Listen service port The port forward will listen for incoming connections addressed to this port and forward those connections across the network to the client and port specif
233. nd once the acquisition module and computer are communicating properly an emulation window will open and you will see the Login prompt If it does not appear immediately press the ENTER key a few times seconds for a new session to start T Note If a terminal session has just been closed it can take up to ten 3 3 2 Using a terminal Emulator You are free to use whatever terminal emulation software you wish Common choices are applications such as minicom on Linux or PuTTY on Microsoft Windows See section 16 2 on page 262 for more information Configure your emulation software to use the correct serial port Set the line speed Baud rate to 38 400 and the communication parameters to eight data bits no parity bits and one stop bit This combination is commonly referred to as 8 N 1 Turn off all hardware flow control RTS CTS and or DSR DTR should not be used Turn off all software flow control XON XOFF should not be used Once the emulator is connected you will see a Login prompt If it does not appear immediately press the ENTER key a few times qs Note If a terminal session has just been closed it can take up to ten seconds for a new session to start MAN EAM 0003 31 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Initial set up 3 3 3 Logging in Acquisition modules are shipped with a default user name of root and password of rootme Additional users with controlled capabilities c
234. nes one or more sensors with a digitiser their part numbers include a D A 3TD for example is a 3T instrument combined with a DM24 digitiser Within this document the term digital sensor is used in two contexts when discussing digital inputs which may be connected to either digitisers or digital sensors and when describing configuration items which apply to both the digitiser modules embedded within digital sensors and to stand alone digitisers 1 5 3 Digitiser A digitiser is an electronic device designed to accept analogue inputs from one or more sensors and using sampling techniques convert these analogue signals into streams of numerical data which are then stored or transmitted digitally An example of a digitiser is the CMG DM24 shown in the image above MAN EAM 0003 10 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Equipment Overview 2 2 1 Equipment Overview Introduction 2 2 The range of G ralp acquisition modules include the e Embedded Acquisition Module CMG EAM e Data Communications Modules CMG DCM now superseded e Network Appliance Module CMG NAM e Data Acquisition Systems and e Integrated Instruments All of these units are Linux based devices but in general no Linux knowledge is required in order to make full use of them The use of Linux provides a high degree of flexibility additional functionality can often be added on request cont
235. ng authentication and digital signatures to ensure that the received data are exactly those transmitted i e that they have not been tampered with during transmission Platinum firmware contains many facilities to support CD1 1 These are documented in a separate manual MAN EAM 1100 which is available on request from support guralp com MAN EAM 0003 19 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Initial set up 3 3 1 Initial set up Introduction 3 2 All acquisition modules except the CMG NAM can be configured and monitored either over an Ethernet network or via a serial RS232 line and are provided with at least one network and one serial port Because the CMG NAM is designed for use in a data centre it only has a network port The actual number of network or serial ports is dependant on the exact model of the acquisition module CMG EAMs in peli cases are supplied with a dedicated console connector located under the lid If using a network the acquisition module can be accessed using a web browser or in character mode using ssh Instructions for connecting to the network port are given in section 3 2 on page 20 If you prefer to use serial communications the module can be accessed using a terminal emulator Instructions for connecting via the serial port are given in section 3 3 on page 30 Connecting to the network port To use the network port you must first set up a network address
236. ngle numerical argument which specifies the Baud rate of the Data in port upgrade Upgrade firmware files only this is the default downgrade This option over rides internal version number checks allowing firmware to be downgraded as well as upgraded force This option causes firmware files are to be loaded even if they appear identical to the versions already loaded or in cases where the installed version number cannot be decoded 232 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Monitoring Operations boot file This option specifies an alternative source file for DM24 Mk3 bootstrap firmware If not specified the upgrade command will look in usr share firmware CMG DM24mk3 for files with names of the form dm24mk3 boot img and use the most recent version that it finds It uses a lexical sort to determine which is the most recent The argument file should be the path to a valid DM24 bootstrap firmware image firm file This option specifies an alternative source file for DM24 Mk3 system firmware or for CD24 firmware If not specified the upgrade command will identify the digitiser type and for DM24s look in usr share firmware CMG DM24mk3 for files with names of the form dm24mk3 0 9 img and use the most recent version that it finds For CD24s it will look for files with names of the form dm32 xx hex in usr share firmware CMG CD24 where represents the hardware type e g 4A
237. num Firmware Transmitting Data Send ack packets This check box when ticked enables the use of acknowledgement packets These are not normally required when the connection between the client and server is reliable Installation id This field allows the user to specify the installation ID that will be supplied to the EarthWorm installation Module id This field allows the user to specify the module ID that will be supplied to the EarthWorm installation Inject SOH data This check box when ticked causes the service instance to generate special state of health SoH packets and send them to the EarthWorm installation Value for the SOH message type State of health packets should have a distinct message type to distinguish them from seismic data packets If the previous check box is ticked use this field to specify the message type This value must match the value of TYPE GCFSOH PACKET in the EarthWorm configuration file Length of the send queue This field controls the size of the buffer used for sending data and should match the parameter SendQueueLength in the EarthWorm export_ack configuration file 12 3 1 3 Channels tab Home Configuration Services gdi2zew 0 Earthworm sender Channels Select which channels to send See help for more details Naming mode Automatic all channels are compressed and named automatically SS SSS System name _ SEEDchannelname ponn ST pox wewe e ACC1 CHZ A
238. o be removed from the system when the form is submitted MAN EAM 0003 199 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Transmitting Data Network The WIN transmitter can be configured to be either a TCP server to multiple clients or a UDP sender to a single address If you want to sent the data to multiple clients set up the acquisition module as a TCP server and the remote machines as clients that connect to it WIN format transmitter Network parameters Protocol TCP server accepting multiple clients Set the protocol used for transmission Hostname Hostname or IP address to use Service 9999 Service or port number to use Max delay 5 Maximum delay before data is transmitted seconds Early transmit size 450 Packets exceeding this size may be transmitted early UTC offset 9hours JST Hour offset from UTC to apply to timestamps Protocol To configure the sender as a TCP server select TCP server accepting multiple clients from the drop down list Hostname To use a specific IP address to listen for requests from clients set this in the box By default it will listen on all interfaces Service Set to the port that you want the server to listen on in the box If you only want to send the data to a single UDP server select UDP datagrams sent to specified address from the Protocol drop down list Configure the remote machine s hostname or IP address in the
239. o log file Leave blank to use syslog Log level Important notices Minimum severity level of messages to record in log Mini SEED convertor Mini SEED compressor Default instance Select which Mini SEED convertor instance to send data from Log file It may sometimes be desirable for debugging purposes to separate log messages for this transmitter from the standard system log The text field can be populated with a path name which will then be used for dedicated logging If left blank logging occurs via the standard Linux syslog facility to var log messages Log level The drop down menu controls the level of detail present in log messages whether to syslog or to a dedicated log file Not all of the standard syslog logging levels are available The menu offers a choice in order of decreasing detail of e Debugging information e Informational messages Important notices Warnings GDI multiplexer In most configurations all data for all transmitters is taken from a single multiplexor as described in section 6 1 on page 65 For more complex configurations it is possible to configure multiple multiplexers each with their own set of input and output services In these situations the drop down menu can be used to select a multiplexer instance with which to associate this transmitter The menu offers a list of currently configured multiplexers EarthWorm EarthWorm is a suite of automated earthquake proce
240. o the EAM which can be used for monitoring configuration and control This is permanently configured to run at 38 400 baud It provides USB access from a PC or laptop to the internal FLASH storage for data collection use of this feature is described in section 11 3 3 on page 161 and It provides a number of tri state lines which can be used to control or monitor external equipment One application is as tamper detection lines which can be connected to external switches and monitors as part of a secure installation 2 5 5 USB The 6 pin USB port allows connection of an external USB storage device for data collection It is also possible to perform firmware upgrades using this port in situations where internet access is not available see section 5 3 3 on page 59 for details 2 5 6 GPS The 10 pin GPS port allows connection of a GSL GPS receiver for use as a synchronisation source for time stamping seismic data 2 5 Power Data The 10 pin Power Data Out port is a power input and also a general purpose serial port which can be used for GCF output suitable for serial connection to Scream PPP network connections inbound GCF from a digital instrument for example NMEA functions TCP serial conversion a modem answering service or as a recorder to store and forward data from any instrument with a serial output 2 5 8 POWER The 4 pin Power port where fitted is an alternative power input It can be used as a permanent powe
241. o the dhcpcd program Static IP address The following parameters are used only in a static configuration IP address Address in IPv4 or IPv6 format with CIDR format netmask see help Broadcast address The broadcast address in IPv4 or IPv6 format Extra ip addr arguments Additional arguments to ip addr program for this address Default route gateway The IP address of the gateway router for access to other networks ip route arguments Arguments to ip route program for this route Extra dhcpcd options Used to change the operation of the DHCP client Please see http man wiki net index php 8 dhcpcd for information about what options can be added here MAN EAM 0003 79 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Networking Configuration Extra IP addr arguments Used to tune the operation of the network interface A non standard broadcast address can be specified by entering broadcast broadcast address For other settings that can be used here please see http linux die net man 8 ip IP route arguments Used to modify the invocation of the ip route add command in order to e g set the route metric The options that can be set here are mostly highly technical and should rarely be required Please see http Alinux die net man 8 ip for more information 1 2 2 3 IP aliasing The IP aliasing table is used to add extra addresses to this interface a practice known as multi homing By default the t
242. o use and the argument ser specifies the serial number samp This argument allows you to specify new sample speeds to set for the decimation filter chain This argument requires requires four numerical values to be supplied using the same format as for the MAN EAM 0003 231 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Monitoring Operations MAN EAM 0003 SAMPLES SEC command described in the DM24 manual For example the command dm24 upgrade samp 1000 500 100 50 PortA will set tap 0 to 1 000 samples per second and taps 1 2 and 3 to 500 100 and 50 samples per second respectively cont This option specifies which streams will be enabled for continuous output at each tap This argument requires requires four numerical values to be supplied using the same format as for the CONTINUOUS command described in the DM24 manual For example the command dm24 upgrade cont 1 0 0 7 will turn on continuous output of the vertical component at tap 0 and of the three triaxial components at tap 3 trig This option specifies which streams will be enabled for triggered output at each tap This argument requires requires four numerical values to be supplied using the same format as for the TRIGGERED command described in the DM24 manual gps baud This option takes a single numerical argument which specifies the Baud rate of the GPS port in baud This option takes a si
243. ocal Files with the extension local are deleted MAN EAM 0003 62 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Platinum Firmware Upgrades To restore defaults while upgrading from the web interface select Tools Firmware and then click Advanced options The following screen will be displayed Firmware update Upgrade from server Upgrade this system s firmware over the network using the Guralp rsync server You may also sync default configuration files erasing your own settings and restoring the defaults Upgrade Standard upgrade from rsync server e f i t fault setti f Il a Upgrade rom reyno server and restore default settings for a i programs Erases user settings Upgrade from rsync server and force factory settings Erases all Upgrade force factory settings changes made to files and settings Erases data that is not on removable disk The first button Upgrade does exactly the same as the similar button on the previous screen The Upgrade restore defaults button performs the action described in this section To perform this action from the command line invoke the upgrade script with the argument restore defaults eam999 upgrade restore defaults Watch the screen for any error messages and then reboot the unit to complete the process Note Certain upgrades depending on the initial version number make it difficult or impossible
244. of e Debugging information e Informational messages Important notices Warnings MAN EAM 0003 130 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Receiving Data Audit log size The GCF input subsystem keeps its own audit log independent from the system log The contents of this log are available using the GCF Audit Log viewer facility as described in section 14 4 5 on page 241 The amount of data retained is controlled by the drop down menu where the choices are 64Kib small e 256Kib medium 2MiB large e 16MiB huge Debug port It is possible to copy all incoming data verbatim to a network port which can be specified in this field This is an advanced debugging technique which is beyond the scope of this manual GDI multiplexer In most configurations all data from all inputs is sent to a single multiplexor which then feeds all outputs as described in section 6 on page 65 For more complex configurations it is possible to configure multiple multiplexers each with their own set of input and output services In these situations the drop down menu can be used to select a multiplexer instance with which to associate this receiver The menu offers a list of currently configured multiplexers 10 2 BRP GCF From Network Devices The acquisition module can receive data from network enabled instruments such as the CMG 6TD and networked digitisers such as the CMG DM24 Data can be receiv
245. of information so you may have to wait a short time until the IP address scrolls into view When using DHCP it is recommended that the DHCP administrator allocates a fixed IP address to the acquisition module s MAC address in order to avoid unexpected address changes The MAC address is displayed by the ip command in the example in section 3 2 1 1 on page 21 it is 00 50 c2 40 54 75 If you cannot learn the IP address in this way there are three methods available to discover which address has been allocated 3 2 1 1 Address discovery serial connection You can connect via a serial port as described in section 3 3 on page 30 and issue the ip command eam999 ip addr show eth0 2 ethO lt BROADCAST MULTICAST UP LOWER UP gt mtu 1500 qdisc PELLO tast glen 1000 Link ether O0 50eCc2 40254275 Pra Eri riir rr err sire inet 192 168 0 101 24 brd 192 168 1 255 scope global eth0O ineto fe80 250 c2ff fe40 5475 64 scope link valid lft forever preferred lft forever eam999 The key things to look for here are the adapter status and the IP address The first line of the output should contain the word UP confirming that the adaptor has been enabled The IP address that has been assigned is shown on the line beginning inet in this case it is 192 168 0 101 with a netmask of 24 bits indicated by 24 T Note With an IP version 6 network the IP address will be on a line beginning inet6 In practice most networks today are still
246. of storage within the digitiser which can hold arbitrary data In some applications such as when a digitiser is generating strong motion packets they should hold structured information about the attached sensors Newer digital sensors have their calibration information pre loaded into the InfoBlock The format of the data is given at http i but you can add any additional information that you find useful such as asset tracking information provided you don t exceed the one kilobyte limit Digitisers automatically transmit the InfoBlock if it is set at every reboot The block is transmitted with a special stream ID ending IB Retransmission of the InfoBlock can be requested at any time by issuing the digitiser command SENDINFO If a copy of Scream receives an InfoBlock it will scan it for calibration values and incorporate any that it finds into its calvals txt file This information is used for displaying streams in ground units rather than counts amongst other things There are one or two info blocks per digitiser and the display will recognise this fact The Display device info blocks button s show the contents of the info block s and allows you to upload new data to them should you wish When the button is clicked the following is displayed Device info blocks Info block 1 SER TAL NOS TSNG1 WO 547 VPC 3 2 3 2 3 2 G 1 028 1 018 1 020 COILCONST 1 1 1 CALRES 1 CALVPC 2 TYPE CMG 5T RESPONSE CMG 5 100HZ AC
247. of utility programs which are made freely available by the ARM development community In 2010 this community agreed a new specification for the way that programs interact with the operating system and each other This specification is know as the Application Binary Interface or ABI The new ABI was called the EABI and the original one was retrospectively renamed the OABI for old ABI The two paradigms cannot coexist and all new community development will be carried out using the newer EABI For this reason starting with build 10 000 Platinum development also moved to the EABI Using the EABI requires the use of a different compiler and to simplify development a similar compiler change has been made for CMG NAM and CMG NAM64 development The decision to use the EABI and the new compiler has one significant consequence an upgrade from a build before 10 000 to a current build is vulnerable to interruptions in a way that no other upgrade is This has implications for systems installed in remote locations 5 1 2 Systems installed in remote locations Programs using the EABI cannot interoperate on the same processor with programs using the OABI There are also problems when mixing programs MAN EAM 0003 51 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Platinum Firmware Upgrades 5 2 built using the two different compilers For this reason it is important that an upgrade from build 3801 to build 10
248. off Cut off hysteresis To prevent rapid repeated power cycling of attached devices a hysteresis value should be set The monitored voltage must rise MAN EAM 0003 223 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Monitoring Operations above the sum of the threshold voltage and the hysteresis voltage before the supply will be re enabled Click the Return to front page button to display the main Digital I O summary again 14 3 2 Digitiser Sensor Control The acquisition module allows control of attached digitisers and sensors To configure digitisers see section 80n page 100 Note Support for active high sensors Control of sensors is implemented using logic lines in the cable between the sensor and the digitiser one for each function lock unlock centre etc Standard G ralp sensors use active low logic which means that the logic lines are normally floating at 5V with respect to the logic ground the sensors have a pull up resistor and the digitiser presents a high impedance When a particular function is to be activated the digitiser grounds the relevant logic line triggering the appropriate action at the sensor Some special order G ralp sensors use active high logic where the lines are normally grounded and allowed not driven to float high in order to trigger the associated control function CMG DM24SxEAM units can be configured to support active high instruments by conn
249. og messages for this transmitter from the standard system log The text field can be populated with a path name which will then be used for dedicated logging If left blank logging occurs via the standard Linux syslog facility to var log messages Log level The drop down menu controls the level of detail present in log messages whether to syslog or to a dedicated log file Not all of the standard syslog logging levels are available The menu offers a choice in order of decreasing detail of e Debugging information e Informational messages Important notices Warnings GDI multiplexer In most configurations all data for all transmitters is taken from a single multiplexor as described in section 6 1 on page 65 For more complex configurations it is possible to configure multiple multiplexers each with their own set of input and output services In these situations the drop down menu can be used to select a multiplexer instance with which to associate this transmitter The menu offers a list of currently configured multiplexers MAN EAM 0003 183 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Transmitting Data 12 2 2 The SEEDlink server The SEEDlink server transmits data in miniSEED format i e no station channel metadata over the network to remote data consumers The data are generated by a GDI Mini SEED compressor instance Note The SEEDlink server requires data in 512 byte blocks the compressor
250. om GPS connected via ADC modules and for CMG NAM hardware from directlyconnected GPS units Integrated digital systems have a direct connection between the GPS and the ADC module so GPS time not this setting will be used for timestamping the data The manual mode requires time to be set once per day on the commandline using forcedigitisertiming Timing mode MTP F Mode to use for system timing Following a timezone change the system should be rebooted to ensure all programs are synchronised Note the timezone is only used for display not for timestamping of data UTC gt r Select timezone used when displaying dates and times Config hame Help Submit Generated at 2013 07 25109 22 567 by GCS 2 0 1 Portions of output copyright 20 13 G ralp Systems Limited The first drop down menu on the General tab Timing mode allows selection between NTP and Manual NTP is recommended for nearly all applications If NTP is selected further configuration should be carried out on the NTP tab Likewise if Manual is selected further configuration should be carried out on the Manual tab The second drop down menu Timezone allows selection of the time zone used when dates and times are displayed in web pages in log files and on the command line This is a system wide setting that affects all users T Note Changing the time zone of the acquisition unit does not affect the timestamps of recorded da
251. ommands MAN EAM 0003 56 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Platinum Firmware Upgrades GSLSRC rsync guralp com platinum stable CMG DCM mk4 rsync BOGOnLopriey exclude resoly cont rsvynict 7 gt GSUSRE If the systems being upgraded are already at build 10 000 or later you only require the latest build which occupies around 70MB of space Use the following commands GSLSRC rsync guralp com platinum stable CMG DCM mk4 eabi rsync EGnLoOprey exclude resoly cont rsvynct 7 gt GSUSRE If you are upgrading systems from earlier than build 3801 to the current build you will need both sets of firmware requiring around 123MB of storage Use the following commands note the additional punctuation GSLSRC rsync guralp com platinum stable CMG DCM mk4 rsync Egnhloprey exclude resolv cont rsynict 7 SGSLSRC CMG NAMs This architecture currently requires around 94MB of mass storage device space for the mirror GSLSRC rsync guralp com platinum stable CMG NAM rsync E gHlopr ty exclude resolv cont rsynci7 SGShSRe CMG NAM64s This architecture currently requires around 125MB of mass storage device space for the mirror GSLSRC rsync guralp com platinum stable CMG NAM64 rsyne E9Hlopr e exclude resolv Con rsync 7 SGSUSRC 5 3 2 2 Setting up a local rsync server Your local rsync server is configured by creating the file etc rsyncd conf If the serving host already runs an rs
252. on Modules and Platinum Firmware Digitiser Synchronisation 9 Digitiser Synchronisation Accurate time stamping of samples is essential to seismology G ralp Systems Ltd recommend the use of GPS receivers for generating clock signals wherever possible they are the most accurate time sources available for all practical purposes but see below GPS is best used indirectly Where GPS receivers cannot be used but an internet connection is available Network Time Protocol NTP can produce acceptable results Platinum firmware can produce NTP synchronised NMEA output for use with GPS capable devices All acquisition modules have an internal clock which is used to time stamp log file entries but not data samples This clock is managed by the NTP subsystem but need not necessarily use Internet NTP servers and normally doesn t DAS units Cylindrical Digitisers and Integrated Instruments have two clocks the digitiser clock and the acquisition module clock the former is used to time stamp data samples and the latter to time stamp log file entries The acquisition module clock is also managed by NTP The two clocks can be synchronised in a number of ways 9 1 Overview and important notes Acquisition modules can synchronise their internal clocks to three different time sources e special timing signals known as RTSTATUS packets produced by a digitiser internet NTP signals from a GPS receiver GPS receivers produce two signal
253. on identifier spaces are removed from all SEED Ids C 3 char SEED channel identifier n 2 char SEED network identifier MAN EAM 0003 146 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Recording and Retrieving Data l 2 char SEED location identifier b block length f bits sample or compression format p samples second a literal percent sign If the format string ends in a extension without any escape sequences in the extension then this extension will be noted and used in some other locations e g for the top level date directory The default format strings are GCF Directory format 3Y j gcfraw GCF File format 3Y jT H MZ gcf miniSEED Directory format 3Y j mseed miniSEED File format 3Y j H amp M s c n 1 mseed Slashes will cause subdirectories to be created Using them as date separators will have unintended and usually undesirable consequences 11 2 2 1 Some examples The GCF default 3 Y jT H MZ gcf includes the data and time but no stream identifiers resulting in a single file containing all streams per recording period This will produce file names like ZOOUSSLSOTIAASZ GCck If you are recording at two different sample rates including a p will cause all streams at the same rate to be grouped into one file per rate per recording period Using 3Y3jT H MZ p gcf might produce files like 2008315T1445Z 200 gcf and 2008315T1445Z
254. onal instances may be created as required This will be necessary if you have different channel filtering requirements for say recording and transmitting or if you need different transmitters to send different sets of channels to different destinations The configuration page for every transmitter has in the Expert mode options a drop down menu which allows the operator to select which compressor instance to use for its input The gdi record configuration page has a similar facility Instances of either compressor are dependant services meaning that they do not need to be and should not be configured to start automatically when the system boots They will be started whenever a client service such as a connected transmitter or gdi record starts Configuration of the GCF compressor gdi2gcf is described in section 12 1 1 on page 162 Configuration of the miniSEED compressor gdi2miniseed is described in section 12 2 1 on page 180 MAN EAM 0003 69 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Networking Configuration T Networking Configuration 1 1 Platinum firmware includes comprehensive support for Ethernet networking Features include VLAN virtual network support a PPP implementation IP over serial lines an iptables firewall and IPV6 support Minimal network configuration is described in section 3 2 on page 20 Those steps will allow you to communicate with your device over a netw
255. onfigurable parameters in expert mode The following additional configuration parameters are available by clicking the Expert button at the bottom of the form and selecting the Advanced tab GSMS sender Advanced options Log file Path to log file Leave blank to use syslog Log level Important notices x Minimum severity level of messages to record in log GDI multiplexor Default data tansport daemon Select which GDI multiplexor to gather data from Log file It may sometimes be desirable for debugging purposes to separate log messages for this transmitter from the standard system log The text field can be populated with a path name which will then be used for dedicated logging If left blank logging occurs via the standard Linux syslog facility to var log messages Log level The drop down menu controls the level of detail present in log messages whether to syslog or to a dedicated log file Not all of the standard syslog logging levels are available The menu offers a choice in order of decreasing detail of e Debugging information e Informational messages Important notices Warnings GDI multiplexer In most configurations all data for all transmitters is taken from a single multiplexor as described in section 6 1 on page 65 For more complex configurations it is possible to configure multiple multiplexers each with their own set of input and output services In these situations the drop down men
256. ontrols the level of detail present in log messages whether to syslog or to a dedicated log file Not all of the standard syslog logging levels are available The menu offers a choice in order of decreasing detail of e Debugging information e Informational messages Important notices or Warnings MAN EAM 0003 206 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Building Networks GDI multiplexer In most configurations all data for all transmitters is taken from a single multiplexor as described in section 6 1 on page 65 For more complex configurations it is possible to configure multiple multiplexers each with their own set of input and output services In these situations the drop down menu can be used to select a multiplexer instance with which to associate this transmitter The menu offers a list of currently configured multiplexers 13 1 1 3 Managing back fill files Unless managed back fill files will accumulate ultil they fill the disk which will disable the system It is essential to configure a directory cleaner instance to manage these files One directory cleaner instance is required for each gdi link tx instance Instructions for creating a new directory cleaner instance are in section 14 5 1 on page 246 Configure the parameters are follows Directory this should be the location of the back fill directory for the gdi link tx instance The first instance uses the directory var lib gdi
257. ork The configuration changes made in that way will not however survive a reboot To make the configuration permanent follow the procedures in this section Configuring physical network interfaces Most acquisition modules have a single physical network interface CMG NAMs are typically equipped with multiple physical network interfaces Platinum firmware follows the standard Linux convention of naming the first physical network interface present on a system eth0 and subsequent interfaces eth1 eth2 etc To configure a physical network interface from the web interface select Configuration Networking Interfaces Or Configuration All options Networking The following screen will be displayed Networking configuration Select a network interface to configure e ethO Primary wired network interface Create a new VLAN interface or a network service To configure a physical network interface from the command line start gconfig and select Networking from the top level menu The first link on the screen takes you to the configuration page for the first physical network interface If your hardware has multiple physical interfaces you may need to create configurations for them using the Create a new interface button Once created the can be configured in an identical manner to eth0O as described below MAN EAM 0003 70 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Netwo
258. orm this action from the command line invoke the upgrade script with the argument force factory settings eam999 upgrade force factory settings Watch the screen for any error messages and then reboot the unit to complete the process Upgrade logs The upgrade process stores all progress and error messages in the file var log upgrade log If you suspect that there has been a problem with an upgrade or you wish to have full details of what has changed you can inspect this file by issuing the command eam999 less var log upgrade log You can scroll forward through the file simply by pressing the space key For more control you can move forward and backwards line by line with the D and y keys or page by page with the and keys The key should be used to return to the command line If you wish to obtain a copy of this log file it can be copied from the system to an external computer either via the serial port see section 11 3 1 4 on page 157 or over the network see section 11 3 1 2 on page 152 MAN EAM 0003 64 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Data Handling 6 6 1 Data Handling Introduction The data handling system of the acquisition module is very flexible due to its modular software architecture In the simplest configuration all data flowing through the acquisition module is routed through a single multiplexor module called gdi base This communicates direct
259. ource file for DM24mk3 DSP code This option requires a single value file which is the path to the firmware image file to be loaded auto baud Scan for digitiser baud rate and adjust configuration If possible verbose Show most of the digitiser dialog debug Output some additional debug information from the underlying expect script MAN EAM 0003 116 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Digitiser Configuration 8 3 Configuration for a second instrument When the acquisition module detects that an attached or built in digitiser supports a second instrument SENSOR B additional items appear on the web interface menu for the digitiser To use a second instrument click the link for the associated digitiser in the System Setup sub menu of the Configuration menu The resulting screen will display a text field Serial number 2 Populate this field with the serial number of the second sensor or any desired value and submit the page rebooting the digitiser LW 105 Identity System identification LW Serial number 105 Serial number 2 oe Software version v 106 build 55 Wait a short while and then use the refresh facility in your web browser to reload the main menu An extra device will appear in the Control section of the main menu and an extra link for the digitiser will appear in the System Setup
260. out at any time Stand alone DCM modules use off the shelf Lacie hard disks which can be easily removed and installed in most conditions You can specify other models of IDE USB or IEEE 1394 2 5 disk at manufacture If an internal disk is not present and the module has a USB host interface it will look for hard disks connected to its external USB port Re Leu ere feet ae E T C wi tk le S i j i a J i i T a8 Foo eS a Lt hg tay at bea aAa u Rn E 5 pa wee i Bt Tall ria a a ar i a Pa gs AAT fe i fee AT woe PEERI ae weit ifs Pe ig Pt he ws aS Ta eds Oke ee ae es a a ze Pt hee nar a i Pomo mee rt bt eee y Teir Once the data are stored on the DCM whether in Flash memory or on the hard disk it can be retrieved by e A remote computer running G ralp Systems Scream or other GCF compatible software Another DCM or AM also using GCF e Setting up a CD1 0 or CD1 1 transmitter on the DCM Direct file transfer using SSH HTTP HTTPS etc e Optionally requesting the data using SeedLink or AutoDRM A PC running G ralp Systems Scream software can not only collect data from the DCM but also configure the module and any instruments attached to it You may need to enable and configure some of these methods before you can use them MAN EAM 0003 257 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Technical operation Most installations of the DCM
261. p button inserts and extra row in the decimator output table and returns the display to the main digitiser configuration settings screen 8 1 1 8 Multiplexor channels The next section of the main display shows and controls the transmission of data from the auxiliary and state of health channels of the digitiser m Multiplexor channels 7 MO channel 0 M8 Z mass position Mi channel 1l 7 M9 N S mass position w M2 channel 2 T MA E W mass ion v M3 channel 3 MB E ichami 1 MC M5 channel S lt MD M6 channel 6 amp 6 ME M7 channel 7 MF Inputs M3 through M7 and MB through MF are typically derived by digitising at 16 bit resolution the analogue inputs on the Auxiliary connector of the digitiser although in some configurations they may be connected to internal sensors For example ME is often used for an internal temperature sensor and M8 M9 and MA provide mass position data from the first sensor Output from each displayed channel can be enabled by ticking the associated check box or disabled by clearing it MAN EAM 0003 110 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Digitiser Configuration 8 1 1 9 Transmission mode Transmission mode Enable direct transmission mode Data is transmitted in real time without being copied to local storage Only a small transmit buffer is used Enable data fil
262. p or sftp the storage is mounted automatically and MAN EAM 0003 149 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Recording and Retrieving Data dismounted when the user logs out again See section 11 3 1 3 on page 156 for details 11 3 1 1 Downloading over a network using the web interface To retrieve data from the removable drive using the web interface select Tools Storage and recording The following screen is displayed Home Tools Storage and recording Storage and recording Select function Select action View files in storage It is also possible to download individual files although it is recommended to perform bulk transfers through a faster method View Files Write whatever is currently buffered in flash to storage Flush to storage Partition and format attached storage device This will erase ALL data on the storage device Format storage Note actions may take some time to complete if the storage device is not powered up The web page will not load until after this has occurred Please be patient Storage status fem Stas vae bascos mss soToRasomz Someesse SRO Stomeepowwraaverle ea O Stomgepowrentine oosa Generated at 2013 04 16709 20 202 by Pt storage cgi Portions of output copyright 2013 G ralp Systems Ltd The top of the screen offers various action buttons while the bottom half displays some status information In the example given above one can
263. part numbers like _ _12 10S and are available from Amphenol ITT Cannon and other manufacturers The pin out is the same as the GPS input of a DM24 digitizer alco pa PowerssavbC SSS not comected OOOO Wiring details for the compatible socket _12 10S as seen from the cable end i e during assembly MAN EAM 0003 279 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Appendices 16 5 8 Cylinder USB This is a standard 6 pin mil spec socket conforming to MIL DTL 26482 formerly MIL C 26482 A typical part number is 02E 10 06S although the initial 02E varies with manufacturer Suitable mating connectors have part numbers like _10 06P and are available from Amphenol ITT Cannon and other manufacturers Function 5 V DC USB Type A pin 1 Data ve USB Type A pin 2 Data ve USB Type A pin 3 0 V USB Type A pin 4 Shielding not connected Wiring details for the compatible plug _10 06P as seen from the cable end i e during assembly MAN EAM 0003 280 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Appendices 16 5 9 Cylinder Power This is a standard 4 pin mil spec plug conforming to MIL DTL 26482 formerly MIL C 26482 A typical part number is O2E 08 04P although the initial 02E varies with manufacturer Suitable mating connectors have part numbers like _0Q8 04S and are available from Amphenol ITT Cannon
264. per second an additional button is displayed Normal operations mode The fastest decimator tap must be set to 200sps before switching to strong motion operation Force strong motion operation Enable causal filtering The Force strong motion operation first reconfigures the taps so that the highest tap is set to 200 samples per second and then enables strong motion mode If the highest tap is already set to 200 samples per second the Enable strongmotionoperation button is active and when clicked enables strong motion mode When in strong motion mode this section of the screen displays as Strong motion mode Revert to normal operation _ Transmit 20sps low latency waveforms The Transmit 20sps low latency waveforms check box enables or disables the 20 samples per second stream which is used internally to provide the data for the strong motion calculations but can also be transmitted recorded and used like any other output stream Clicking the Revert to normal operation button cancels strong motion mode and returns the CMG DM24 to normal operation The thirty additional streams produced when in strong motion mode are shown in the following table where S represents the System ID and C identifies the component Z for vertical N for North South or E for East West MAN EAM 0003 104 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware
265. ptional name visible from the GDI link server MAN EAM 0003 208 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Building Networks Local IP address If the GSL EAM has multiple network addresses you can limit the GDI link receiver to use only one of them by entering it in this field If left blank the receiver will listen on all configured addresses Local port service The default GDI link port is 1566 but this can be over ridden if desired you would want to do this if you had multiple instances running on the same address by entering a port name or number Backfill Back fill is the process whereby missing data are recovered It can be disabled if desired but in most cases you should leave this enabled GDI link receiver gdi link rx receives samples in the native protocol of the Platinum software suite called Guralp Data Interconnect This is a low latency real time transmission protocol which sends encoded state of health with samples Backfi il Enable backfill 7 Directory var lib gdi link m defaul Directory under which backfill state files are stored Enable backfill If selected enables the back fill transmission Directory The default directory for back fill data Servers The servers tab contains a table within which you can configure the GDI link servers to which this receiver should listen GDI link receiver General Network Backfill Ferrers
266. r Default data transport daemon lt Select which GDI multiplexor instance to compress data from Config home Help Simple submit Generated at 2013 04 167T15 35 002 by GCS 2 0 11 Portions of output copyright 2013 G ralp Systems Limited Log file It may sometimes be desirable for debugging purposes to separate log messages for this sender from the standard system log The text field can be populated with a path name which will then be used for dedicated logging MAN EAM 0003 191 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Transmitting Data 12 4 If left blank logging occurs via the standard Linux syslog facility to vwar log messages Log level The drop down menu controls the level of detail present in log messages whether to syslog or to a dedicated log file Not all of the standard syslog logging levels are available The menu offers a choice in order of decreasing detail of e Debugging information e Informational messages Important notices Warnings GDI multiplexer In most configurations all data for all transmitters is taken from a single multiplexor as described in section 6 1 on page 65 For more complex configurations it is possible to configure multiple multiplexers each with their own set of input and output services In these situations the drop down menu can be used to select a multiplexer instance with which to associate this transmitter The menu offers a list of curr
267. r create an ssh key pair on the client PC using the ssh keygen command on Linux or the PuTTYgen application on windows Copy the newly created public key into the authorized_keys file The new user should now be able to invoke ssh scp sftp or rsync without being prompted for a password Once you are happy that password less logins are working you can remove the password for the new user by editing etc shadow on the Platinum system and replacing the encrypted password the part of the line between the first and second colons with an exclamation mark 11 3 1 4 Downloading over a serial port using the command line In situations where it is not convenient to use the network interface files can be downloaded from the removable mass storage device using one of three file transfer protocols X modem Y modem or Z modem None of these protocols were ever rigidly standardised so if you are not using one of the terminal emulators discussed in this section you may need to experiment a little this is reflected in the huge range of optional arguments that the transfer program accepts MAN EAM 0003 157 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Recording and Retrieving Data The X modem transmitter is invoked as sx the Y modem transmitter as sy and the Z modem transmitter as sz They are in fact all implemented by the same program so the detailed help message displayed with the help option describ
268. r a name and choose an icon for the connection Mame Direct leon Enter any suitable name then click __o ___ MAN EAM 0003 262 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Appendices 4 You will then be prompted to enter COM port and modem details Connect To Direct Enter details for the phone number that you want to dial Country regiory Connect using The Country region Area code and Phone number fields can be ignored they are only used when working with modem connections Select the name of the correct COM port from the Connect using drop down menu then click __ok _ 5 Enter the port configuration settings COM1 Properties Port Settings Bits per second S600 Data bits g ye Parity Horne we Shop bits at Flow contol i Restore Defaults Ensure the following parameters are set MAN EAM 0003 263 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Appendices Bits per second 38400 for DM24 115200 for DCM 19200 for CD24 Data bits 8 Parity None Stop bits 1 Flow control None 6 Click on and the program will then connect providing you with a terminal emulator screen from which you can access the command line of your system 16 2 2 Using Hyperterminal with Windows Vista or Windows 7 HyperTerminal is not provided with the Windows Vista or Windows 7 operating systems but the necessary files can
269. r input in situations where the Power Data port is only used occassionally Typical Applications 2 6 1 Autonomous remote data logger In this application depicted below a CMG EAM is used to collect data from a digital instrument or analogue instrument and digitiser and store it on its MAN EAM 0003 15 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Equipment Overview hard drive The low power consumption and high storage capacity of the CMG EAM makes it ideal for this purpose Where appropriate the battery supply can be augmented with a solar panel The CMG EAM is capable of interfacing with and monitoring many types of solar charge controller RS232 power CMG EAM If it is desired to contact an acquisition module for monitoring or urgent data download purposes the unit can be fitted with a GPRS or satellite modem allowing remote connectivity 2 6 2 Protocol Converter An acquisition module can be deployed as a protocol converter the wide variety of output formats and connectivity options make it ideal for this application In the illustration below a digital instrument s GCF output is retransmitted as SEEDLink data over Ethernet SEEDLink over Ethernet power CMG EAM 2 6 3 Array Concentrator The acquisition module can combine the data from many instruments in an array and retransmit them over a single link serial or network Ethernet output CMG DM2
270. r to gather data from Log file It may sometimes be desirable for debugging purposes to separate log messages for this transmitter from the standard system log The text field can be populated with a path name which will then be used for dedicated logging If left blank logging occurs via the standard Linux syslog facility to var log messages Log level The drop down menu controls the level of detail present in log messages whether to syslog or to a dedicated log file Not all of the standard syslog logging levels are available The menu offers a choice in order of decreasing detail of e Debugging information e Informational messages Important notices Warnings GDI multiplexer In most configurations all data for all transmitters is taken from a single multiplexor as described in section 6 1 on page 65 For more complex configurations it is possible to configure multiple multiplexers each with their own set of input and output services In these situations the drop down menu can be used to select a multiplexer instance with which to associate this transmitter The menu offers a list of currently configured multiplexers 12 6 WIN Sender WIN is a Japanese seismic data format MAN EAM 0003 198 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Transmitting Data To set up a WIN server on the acquisition module using the web interface select Configuration Se
271. rage device The storage device is powered down when not in use If power is not a consideration certain options such as retrieving data to remote systems using scp are easier if the power to the storage device is left on continuously Tick this check box to enable continuous power to the storage device 11 2 1 2 MiniSEED For some applications it is more convenient to store the data directly in mini SEED format The second tab of the Storage and recording page controls options related to recording in this format If recording in mini SEED format is enabled a GDI to Mini SEED compressor converter is started automatically See section 12 2 on page 179 for more details Selecting the MiniSEED tab displays the following screen Home Configuration Storage and recordin Storage and recording Storage deve SEED CF Nonsisic data NS Aavancea MiniSEED Enabled Zj Check to enable recording of miniSEED records to storage File period 30 minutes Time span held in each output file Large files may be inefficient 96 9 m d 5 9c l H M mseed Template for building the filename See help for details on the tokens Flush threshold 50 recommended A flush to disk starts when new data in ring buffer exceeds this threshold MiniSEED compressor Mini SEED compressor Default instance lt Select which miniSEED compressor ringbuffer to get data from Config home Help submit Generated at 2013
272. ransmitter The screen shows a list of all GDI link transmitter instances that have been configured on the acquisition module GDI link transmitter instance selection Select the GDI link transmitter instance you wish to configure In most circumstances you will only need a single GDI link transmitter but this screen allows you to create more if desired MAN EAM 0003 203 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Building Networks To configure the transmitter click on the link corresponding to the required instance 13 1 1 1 Configurable parameters in simple mode The configurable parameters for the GDI link transmitter have four tabbed pages in simple mode General Network Backfill and Push General GDI link transmitter gdi link tx transmits samples in the native protocol of the Platinum software suite called Guralp Data Interconnect This is a low latency real time transmission protocol which sends encoded state of health with samples General settings User description System gdi link transmitter User label for this transmitter module User description Can be changed if desired This may be useful if you have multiple instances This description is seen when viewing running services or configuring instances It is not seen by the clients Subsequent instances can be enabled or disabled with a check box but this is absent from the page for the default instance because the defaul
273. rder Pressing a GA a second time will just send a fena to the remote system If you have changed your escape character to something other than a ZN this works analogously for that character MAN EAM 0003 267 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Appendices HoOogsggs bho MAN EAM 0003 added before every carriage return displayed on the screen Gives you a scroll back buffer You can scroll up with Ut down with D a page up with E a page down with and if you have them the Ka gt D v and keys can also be used You can search for text in the buffer with case sensitive or case insensitive N will find the next occurrence of the string will enter citation mode A text cursor appears and you specify the start line by hitting key Then scroll back mode will finish and the contents with prefix gt will be sent Toggle local echo on and off A break signal is sent Toggle the type of escape sequence that the cursor keys send between normal and applications mode See also the comment about the status line below Jump to a shell On return the whole screen will be redrawn Clears the screen runs kermit and redraws the screen upon return Turn Capture file on off If turned on all output sent to the screen will be captured in the file too Configure minicom Puts you in the configuration menu Communication Parameters Allows you to change the bps ra
274. ready set The use of minicom is described in section 16 3 on page 267 When you have finished configuring the digitiser key a BA then Q to exit Any previously running service will be restarted 8 2 3 dm24 upgrade The dm24 upgrade tool provides a command line facility to upgrade the firmware on attached CMG DM24 and CMG CD24 digitisers Each release of Platinum firmware contains the latest firmware images for both digitiser types You may wish to upgrade your Platinum firmware see section 5 on page 51 for details before using this command To perform a simple upgrade enter the command dm24 upgrade id replacing id with the port identifier typically PortA or PortB or the digitiser s ID as reported by for example the data terminal command described in the previous section More complex operations are possible these are invoked by placing command line arguments between the command and the port identifier as in dm24 upgrade arguments id The available arguments are described in the following paragraphs trashfram Perform a hard factory reset all parameters will be lost MAN EAM 0003 115 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Digitiser Configuration ids sys ser Specify new system ID and serial number to set following a hard factory reset This option will attempt to preserve the previous values if new values are not specified samp Change the sample speeds for each o
275. red for example to specify a hard mount rather than a soft mount they can be entered here 11 2 1 6 Advanced The Advanced tab of the Storage and recording screen contains a number of specialised options Selecting the tab displays the following screen Home Configuration Storage and recordin Storage and recording ange dv ini 807 Norse aera NFS Rane Advanced Force unsafe rename L Disables the safe rename algorithm on FAT32 for extra speed a User ID to write files as for NFS or ext4 Should usually be empty a Group ID to write files as for NFS or ext4 Should usually be empty Config home Help submit Generated at 2013 04 15715 24 502 by GCS 2 0 11 Portions of output copyright 2013 G ralp Systems Limited MAN EAM 0003 145 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Recording and Retrieving Data Force unsafe rename The recording system takes considerable care to avoid data loss in the event of power disconnection or storage device removal When the storage device is formatted as a FAT32 volume part of this care involves a safe rename routine which takes a little time to complete When the power budget is particularly tight this extra time costs extra power as the storage device needs to be powered up for longer Ticking this check box disables the safe rename routine reducing the amount of time for which the storage device needs to be powered at the co
276. red in order to disable it No other configuration settings are changed when the interface is disabled allowing use of the interface to be suspended without deleting the configuration Startup enable check box controls whether the interface is enabled automatically when the unit boots Configuration method drop down menu offers the following choices Static The interface will take its address and routing parameters from values entered by the operator DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol The interface will attempt to obtain its address and routing parameters from a DHCP server with a matching VLAN tag Powered off The interface will not be used and the interface chip is disabled reducing the total power consumption by around 200mW MAN EAM 0003 83 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Networking Configuration 7 3 1 2 VLAN Static IP Network interface Static IP Static IP address The following parameters are used only in a static configuration IP address Address in IPv4 or IPv6 format with CIDR format netmask see help Default route gateway The IP address of the gateway router for access to other networks If DHCP is not being used the IP address text field should be populated with the required address in CIDR format where the address is followed by a slash and then the number of bits defining the netmask e g 192 168 0 1 24 for IPV4 or 2001 db8 32
277. rform a standard upgrade from the web interface select Tools Firmware The following screen will be displayed Upgrade from server Upgrade this system s firmware over the network using the Guralp rsync server Upgrade Standard upgrade from rsync server nl Advanced options Display advanced upgrade options Not normally required Press the Upgrade button and watch the screen for any error messages To perform the same upgrade from the command line simply enter the command eam999 upgrade with no arguments Watch the screen for any error messages and then reboot to complete the process Note Certain upgrades depending on the initial version number make it difficult or impossible to reboot the system via the web interface In these cases the system can be rebooted from the command line with the reboot command or by power cycling 5 4 2 Upgrade and restore defaults The standard upgrade respects and preserves user configuration settings In some circumstances it may be necessary to overwrite these settings and return all configuration settings to their factory defaults The unit is not completely restored to factory condition this allows for the possibility of implementing customisations and user developed scripts which persist across upgrades T Note All files on any connected hard drive or USB drive are left untouched as are any files in the directories home root var and usr l
278. rking Configuration 7 1 1 Configurable parameters in simple mode The configurable parameters for physical network interface have two tabs in simple mode Interface and Static IP 7 1 1 1 Interface Network interface Network interface eth Device eth Device name Fixed MAC address 00 01 c0 06 d1 ce MAC address Fixed Description Primary wired network interface User description of the interface Enable interface 7 Allow the interface to be used Start the interface at system startup Enact on submit Startup enable 7 Check to make changes as page is submitted Otherwise change on reboot DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol pi Configuration method Determines how interface parameters are discovered and set Device Not editable It displays the name of the network interface being configured MAC address Not editable It shows the Media Access Control address of the adapter s hardware It is often useful to know this when configuring DHCP servers by binding an IP address to a particular MAC address the DHCP administrator can ensure that the device retains the same IP address across reboots Description Allows the operator to modify the description of this interface in configuration dialogues and error messages This is of limited value when there is only a single interface but for example when a CMG NAM has multiple interfaces it may be useful to rename them in order to re
279. rnet it is necessary to choose a strong password Since the password will almost certainly be programmed into the client file transfer software there is no requirement for it to be memorable GSL recommend the use of password generation software for this purpose There are a number of good free password generating applications and web sites available on the Internet MAN EAM 0003 156 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Recording and Retrieving Data A typical invocation looks like this eam999 Pt storage adduser dskusr New password Repeat password Password changed New user dskusr added and ready eam999 The chosen username dskusr in this example can be anything you wish but must consist of lower case letters and digits only The new user can now be used with file transfer commands For example from a Linux box you could enter commands like me mypc dl ssh dskusr eam999 gdi record flush me mypc dl rsync avz dskusr eam999 media This will flush outstanding data from the ring buffers and then synchronise all files from the mass storage device to the current directory on the invoking computer It is also possible to eliminate the password prompt To do this Run the following commands on the Platinum system mkdir m 700 dskusr ssh gt dskusr ssh authorized keys chmod 600 dskusr ssh authorized keys replacing dskusr with the name of your own special use
280. rnet is described in section 3 2 on page 20 The use of ssh is covered in section 3 2 5 on page 27 4 3 1 Using graphical interfaces from the command line Some Platinum applications use a system called ncurses which allows graphical interfaces to be implemented on text only terminals This requires the applications to know the type of terminal from which they are being accessed The terminal type is stored in an environment variable called TERM which is queried with the command eam999 echo STERM VELOO eam999 note the use of the sign when accessing the value of this variable and set with the command eam999 export TERM vt100 No spaces should be used around the sign Platinum is aware of around thirty different terminal types and uses the terminfo system to support them so you can add your own types if you need Files describing each terminal type are stored under the directory folder usr share terminfo in sub directories named after the initial letter of the terminal name Some settings for specific applications are given in the following table MAN EAM 0003 35 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Platinum Overview Emulator in use TERM setting ssh under Unix No action required the ssh protocol sets the TERM environment variable automatically PuTTY in ssh mode under Windows No action required the ssh protocol sets the TERM environment
281. rt names to port numbers is configured by the conventional Linux file etc services which can be edited from the command line if required If desired you can configure a list of addresses from which to accept connections If no addresses are configured then all incoming addresses will be accepted Otherwise connections will only be accepted if they match an entry in the table with its Reject box unticked Entries are matched in order as soon as a match is made the connection is accepted or rejected and no further processing is done The IP addresses fields can each specify a host name an IP address or an IP address range given in CIDR format For example to accept connections from LAN addresses you can add the addresses e 10 0 0 0 8 anything from 10 0 0 0 to 10 255 255 255 172 16 0 0 12 anything from 172 16 0 0 to 172 31 255 255 i 192 168 0 0 16 anything from 192 168 0 0 to 192 168 255 255 and 127 0 0 1 loopback address 7 8 2 Simple client mode This mode of operation is similar to simple server except that the acquisition module establishes an outgoing TCP client connection rather than listening on a socket It writes raw data from the serial port to the remote server and writes raw data from the remote server to the serial port It does not support the querying or setting of the serial port hardware control lines In this mode only a single option needs to be provided the contact details for
282. rvices Miscellaneous or Configuration All options System services Miscellaneous To configure a WIN server from the command line start gconfig and select System services from the top level menu Now select win out WIN sender The screen shows a list of all WIN server instances that have been configured You can reconfigure any existing service by clicking on its menu entry To configure a new WIN sender select Create service instance The following screen allows you to configure the parameters of the sender It is shown here in parts 12 6 1 Configurable parameters in simple mode The configurable parameters for the WIN sender have three tabbed pages in simple mode General Network and Channels General WIN format transmitter General settings User description WIN sender instance 1 User label for the service instance User label Application label used for identification in logs Enable Enable the transmitter at system startup Delete Delete this transmitter instance User description Set to a meaningful name for the data that it will send User label Can be set to distinguish this instance from others in the log files Enable Causes this service to start automatically when the system is re booted If this check box is cleared the service will need to be started manually from the Control Services menu Delete Causes the configuration for this instance t
283. rwise accumulate and eventually fill the file system Non configurable system provided instances monitor three directories var lib envirolog which holds environmental logging data var log libterminal which records terminal interactions with digitisers and var lib tamper which 246 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Monitoring Operations records tamper detection events Additional instances can be created if required It is necessary to create a directory cleaner instance if you use the GDI link transmitter gdi link tx One directory cleaner instance is required for each gdi link tx instance You may also use directory cleaner instances in association with your own scripts to simplify programming To create a directory cleaner instance using the web interface select Configuration All Options Routine tasks Directory Cleaner To configure an instance from the command line start gconfig and select Routine tasks and then Directory cleaner The screen shows a list of all directory cleaner instances that have been configured Home Configuration Tasks Directory cleaner Directory cleaner This task will remove old files from one or more directories For each directory to be considered a desired maximum size and or maximum number of files may be specified Every hour each directory on this list is scanned and files over the limit are cleaned e Setup c
284. ry 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Appendices 16 5 12 Sensor Port This is a standard 26 pin mil spec plug conforming to MIL DTL 26482 formerly MIL C 26482 A typical part number is O2E 16 26P although the initial 02E varies with manufacturer Suitable mating connectors have part numbers like _16 26S and are available from Amphenol ITT Cannon and other manufacturers Ba Fanction Pence Vertical velocity ve P Calibration signal Vertical velocity ve Vertical calibration enable C N S velocity ve S N S calibration enable D N S velocity ve E W calibration enable E W velocity ve v Active high see section 14 3 2 on page 224 Vertical mass position K Busy indicator LED PW mass positon Fa nck coneced no connected w Powrov Wiring details for the compatible socket _16 26S as seen from the cable end i e during assembly MAN EAM 0003 284 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Appendices 16 5 13 Cylinder Auxiliary Input This is a standard 19 pin mil spec plug conforming to MIL DTL 26482 formerly MIL C 26482 A typical part number is O2E 14 19P although the initial 02E varies with manufacturer Suitable mating connectors have part numbers like _14 19S and are available from Amphenol ITT Cannon and other manufacturers Function Pin Function Optional SENSOR B auxiliary calibration channel ve L SENSOR
285. s E a a u iE m H 4 yes a e e egg i A Er Port C NMEA In NI Sd5 Console lt lt _ Port B qz O ot H D Pee e eRe P REPRO EE ef B MAN EAM 0003 252 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Technical operation T Note this configuration is not recommended as a method of synchronising a acquisition module see section 9 on page 120 for a detailed explanation Incoming data from an external GPS receiver is available to both the digitiser and acquisition modules Both the digitiser s GPS input and Port C of the acquisition module must run at 4 800 Baud This should never be changed If an external GPS receiver is available it should be used to synchronise the digitiser the EAM should then be synchronised the digitiser s RTSTATUS packets In this case the service on Port C can be set to none If use of a GPS receiver is impractical but internet derived NTP synchronisation is available this can be used as the clock source for both the digitiser module and the acquisition module By setting the service on Port C to NMEA out the following connections are enabled gVEBBRBRBeeeee a a a ou a m E E E f za GPS 4 Port C NMEA Out NI Sd5 Console pija Port B as QO a 0 2 x i a Both the digitiser s GPS input and Port C of the acquisition module must run at 4 800 Baud
286. s NMEA which is a serial ASCII data stream consisting of a sequence of sentences which convey information such as the time to the nearest second the position the number of satellites visible and much more e PPS which is a one pulse per second signal which accurately signals the start of each second GSL digitisers such as the DMG DM24 use both signals to accurately synchronise their internal clocks Because of a limitation in the Linux kernel on ARM processors the CMG DCM and CMG EAM cannot make use of the PPS signal This means that a DCM or EAM synchronised directly to GPS can be several hundreds of milliseconds adrift While this is not crucial the clock is only used to MAN EAM 0003 120 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Digitiser Synchronisation time stamp log file entries it does make direct synchronisation to GPS the least accurate of the three options available We recommend the following synchronisation strategy e If GPS is available synchronise the digitiser s directly to GPS and synchronise the acquisition module to the RTSTATUS packets from the digitiser If GPS is not available but an internet connection can be used synchronise the acquisition module to internet NTP and enable the NMEA output to which the digitiser can then be synchronised e If neither GPS nor internet NTP are available contact technical support for advice 9 2 RTSTATUS packets Where
287. s you could continue to navigate down them using the Follow buttons When files are present as in the above screen shot they each have an associated button which invokes your web browser s standard download facility to copy the data to your computer 11 3 1 2 Downloading over a network using the command line If very recent data are required start by flushing the buffers with the command eam999 gdi record flush Before data can be retrieved from the removable drive it must first be brought to operating temperature for heated drives powered up and the relevant file systems mounted A utility Pt storage is provided to accomplish this When invoked without arguments Pt storage displays a menu Select action to pertorm lt CanceLl gt The mount option which can be selected with the key displays a menu of available file systems on removable media When you choose your desired file system it is mounted under media and you will be told the exact mount point and then presented with a command prompt This is a sub shell the file system will remain mounted and the mass storage device will remain MAN EAM 0003 152 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Recording and Retrieving Data powered up until you exit the shell with the exit command or by keying CE E The format option which can be selected with the iE key prepares a drive for use as described in section
288. s NAS units See section 11 2 1 5 on page 144 for configuration details Recycle space If this check box is set to zero gdi record will write to the storage device until it is full and then stop writing The module will check periodically for free space and start writing again when it can This prioritises the earliest data at the expense of the most recent data If the recycle space field is set to any other numerical value it is interpreted as the amount of free space in MebiBytes to leave on the disk When this value is approached older data are deleted to make space for the current data This prioritises the most recent data at the expense of the earliest data MAN EAM 0003 140 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Recording and Retrieving Data Format filesystem This drop down menu allows you to select the format used when the storage device is reformatted The current choices are FAT32 and ext4 The ext4 filesystem is more robust and should be used where possible but it is not currently supported by Microsoft windows If you need to read the storage device under windows for example by using the GPIO USB cable then you should choose FAT32 Continuous power In order to reduce power consumption gdi record does not write continuously to the hard drive Data are buffered in flash memory and at a configurable interval these data are checked to see which complete files can be written to a mass sto
289. s and Platinum Firmware Appendices 16 5 4 Peli case Network This is a standard 6 pin mil spec plug conforming to MIL DTL 26482 formerly MIL C 26482 A typical part number is O2E 10 06P although the initial 02E varies with manufacturer Suitable mating connectors have part numbers like _10 06S and are available from Amphenol ITT Cannon and other manufacturers Data transmit ve RJ45 pin 1 Data receive ve RJ45 pin 3 not connected Data receive ve RJ45 pin 6 Data transmit ve RJ45 pin 2 Wiring details for the compatible socket _10 06S as seen from the cable end i e during assembly MAN EAM 0003 276 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Appendices 16 5 5 Peli case Console This is a standard DE9F TIA 574 sub miniature D sub line socket conforming to DIN 41652 and MIL DTL 24308 They are very widely available as are suitable mating connectors The console port is pre configured to run at 38 400 Baud with 8 data bits no parity bit and one stop bit It is strongly recommended that these settings are never changed so that access to the configuration system can be gained via this port if all other routes are unavailable C Pe pooma SOS E SSCS Pa fnotcomeced SS Wiring details for the compatible plug DE9M as seen from the cable end i e during assembly MAN EAM 0003 277 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and P
290. s described below MAN EAM 0003 144 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Recording and Retrieving Data Selecting the NFS tab causes the following screen to be displayed Home Configuration Storage and recordin Storage and recording Storage deve MniSEED GOF Nonasamie data NFS Advanced NFS Platinum modules have the ability to record to a standard Linux NFS Network File System system If you have such a system and wish to record to it set the storage device to NFS and enter the details below You may also wish to change the UID GID from the default of 0 root which can be found on the Advanced tab host path Path to NFS mount written as host path or ip path ao Extra options to pass when mounting Usually blank See mount 8 Config home submit Generated at 2013 04 15714 28 162 by GCS 2 0 11 Portions of output copyright 2013 G ralp Systems Limited Path Use this field to specify the NFS host and the path on that host to use for storing data For example if the data are to be stored in a directory called GCF data on a NAS host called nas0 datacentre example com enter nas0 datacentre example com GCF data in this field Options The external storage provided by the NFS server will be prepared for access using the standard Linux mount command see http linux die net man 8 mount for details invoked without non mandatory options If additional options are requi
291. s instance to be removed from the system when the form is submitted Server tab GSTM client Server settings Server Hostname or IP address to connect to Port service gstm TCP port number or service name to connect to Username dem105 Name used to identify client to server Encryption key Pre shared key used to encrypt communications Must match server Server The client will automatically connect to the GSTM server specified by a DNS name or IP address entered into the Server field Port service The connection to the server will be made using the TCP port specified by a service name or number in the Port service field Username The client identifies itself to the server using a username this can usefully be set to the hostname of the acquisition module MAN EAM 0003 212 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Building Networks client T Note The username is the means by which the server refers to this Encryption key GSTM communication is encrypted using TLS Each end of any GSTM link needs to be configured with the same pre shared key If the server has already been configured the server administrator will give you a value for the Encryption Key field Otherwise enter a random string into this field and let the person administering the server know what you have used A command line tool gstm genpsk is provided to generate suitable random
292. s iolines from the command line start gconfig and select Status iolines assertion configuration from the top level menu 14 2 1 Configurable parameters in simple mode The configurable parameters for recording data in simple mode are shown below status iolines assertion configuration This server is to enable the setup of a warning level and a line to be asserted if the overall status value drops below that level and an error level and a line to be asserted if the overall status value drops below that level Enable Enable this xmistatus assert server Warming level Level between 1 and 100 below which line is raised high Line to assert on warning None Select which line to assert on a warning Error level Level between 1 and 100 below which line is raised high Line to assert on error None ha Select which line to assert on an error Enable Activates the assertion server Warning level Set the level at which the warning signal is to be triggered Line to assert on warning Select the output line from the drop down list All output lines are displayed so care should be taken to choose a suitable output line Error level Set the level at which the warning signal is to be triggered The error level must be less than the warning level MAN EAM 0003 220 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Monitoring Operations 14 3 Line to assert on error Select the output line from the drop
293. s is followed by the number of bits of the network mask The above example uses 192 168 0 1 with a netmask of 255 255 255 0 24 bits of network address A PC connected to this network could communicate with the acquisition module if it was configured to use an IP address of for example 192 168 0 2 with a matching netmask of 255 255 255 0 Note IP addresses assigned using this method will be lost if the unit is rebooted To permanently assign an IP address use net setup see section 3 2 3 1 on page 23 the web interface section 7 1 on page 70 or gconfig section 7 1 on page 70 If you wish to connect to the acquisition module from a PC they must either both be on the same physical network and have the same network address usually the first three numbers of the IP address or be able to connect to each other via routers In the latter case you will need to tell the acquisition module the address of its default router also known as the gateway Issue the command eam999 ip route add default via 192 168 0 254 substituting the address of your network s default router in place of the example address 192 168 0 254 shown If you wish to be able to access your acquisition module across the Internet perform firmware upgrades or access GSL remote support you will also need to configure a default router as described in the preceding paragraph Note Both the static IP address and any route configured in this way are temporary
294. s5 00 06 2009336T 13007 gct 100 1889KB 3 8KB s 00 05 fishatfish desktop tmp fg ssh root S1 187 130 165 dcml105 exit Disk no Longer required by this shell session dcm105 Logout Connection to 51 187 130 165 closed fishafish desktop tmp fg Note the use of ssh s tilde escape followed by to suspend the ssh session and return to the calling PC in order to run the scp command with the mass storage device still mounted The fg command foreground returns control to the ssh session Windows users should follow the same procedure to log in power up and mount the file system At this point rather than suspending the ssh shell they can connect with WinSCP and navigate to the media directory The recorded files will then be displayed and can be dragged and dropped to appropriate locations on the PC MAN EAM 0003 154 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Recording and Retrieving Data 3 2009336 gcfraw root 51 187 130 165 WinSCP Local Mark Files Commands Session Options Remote Help Oo Jael Sse Be amp Pi Esti ih dev OCS Default Bm Zig 3 5 2009336 qcfraw C NGCF Downloads Si 504D F5D8 G 2009336 gcfraw 2009337 gcfraw G 2009338 gcfraw 2009339 gcfraw 9 2009340 gcfraw Size Changed Rights Owiner ES te root 301 120 gzj F nog AMEE XE root a294 704 O TIE WA E rook x rook 1 623 744 Oef12 2009 EXE XF 1 955 840 0 j1iz z009 FIA XF 3 OB of OB in
295. same duration For accurate results the duration should be significantly longer than the response time of the instrument amplitude a specify the amplitude where a is the integer percentage of the full output of the calibration signal generator This can normally be given as 100 but should be reduced if clipping is noticed 228 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Monitoring Operations adc command module calib noise arguments Perform a broad band noise calibration according to the specified arguments which are given as a space separated list of key value pairs e component ALL z N S E W specify the component s to be calibrated e duration m specify the duration in minutes where m is an integer value For accurate results the duration should be significantly longer than the response time of the instrument e amplitude a specify the amplitude where a is the integer percentage of the full output of the calibration signal generator This can normally be given as 100 but should be reduced if clipping is noticed The acquisition module also provides the ability to connect to the terminal of any connected G ralp digitisers in order to configure their operation and control the attached sensors To do this connect to the acquisition module terminal as in section 3 3 on page 30 and run the data terminal command eam999 data terminal Select the desired digitiser using the
296. samples LW DEVOES New segment ID OO000008 00000000 2011 03 08T16 54 482 Initial subscription list complete 100 sps 2011 03 08T16 54 482 00000003 00000000 LW DEVOES 100 Signed 32 bit integer samples 100 sps 2011 03 08T16 54 452 00000003 00000000 LW DEVOE3 100 Signed 32 bit integer samples 100 sps 2011 03 08T16 54 502 O0000003 00000000 LW DEVOES 100 Signed 32 bit integer samples 100 spa 2011 03 08116 54 512 00000003 60000000 LW DEVOES 100 Signed 32 bit integer samples 100 spa 2011 03 08T16 54 522 00000003 00000000 LW DEVOES 100 Signed 32 bit integer samples 100 sps 2011 03 08T16 54 532 00000003 00000000 LN DEVOES 100 Signed 32 bit integer sampies E 100 spa 2011 03 08T16 54 542 00000003 00000000 LW DEVOE3 100 Signed 32 bit integer samples 100 sps 2 011 03 08116 54 552 00000003 00000000 LW DEVOES 100 Signed 32 bit integer samples E 100 spa 2011 03 08T16 54 562 00000003 00000000 LW DEVOE3 100 Signed 32 bit integer samples 100 sps 20171 03 08T16 54 572 000000035 00000000 LW DEVOES 100 Signed 32 bit integer samples 100 sps 2011 03 08T16 54 582 00000003 00000000 LW DEVOE3 100 Signed 32 bit integer samples 100 sps 2011 03 08T16 54 592 00000003 00000000 LW DEVOES 100 Signed 32 bit integer samples 100 sps 2011 03 08T16 55 00Z 00000003 00000000 LW DEVOE3 100 Signed 32 bit integer samples 100 sps 2011 03 08T16 55 012 00000003 00000000 LW DEVYOES 100 Signed 32 bit integer samples 6 100 sps 2011 03 08T1
297. screen allows you to configure the parameters of the service It is a large form and is shown here in parts MAN EAM 0003 174 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Transmitting Data 12 1 4 1 Configurable parameters in simple mode The configurable parameters for GCF Scream network server have four tabbed pages in simple mode General Terminal Push and Filter General Scream server General setting User description GCF Scream network server instance 1 User label for this Scream server instance Enable Enable this Scream server at system startup Delete Delete this Scream server instance Server hostname IP address The hostname or IP address the server socket will bind to Leave empty for all Server port service name scream The TCP and UDP port number or service name to listen on User description Used to rename the service in configuration menus and log files to something more indicative of its function The first instance can neither be disabled nor deleted but if subsequent instances are created two additional check boxes appear on their associated configuration menu Enable Causes this service to start automatically when the system is re booted If this check box is cleared the service will need to be started manually from the Control Services menu Delete Causes the configuration for this instance to be removed from the system when
298. second on the second and held to ground at other times It is not essential that the position string sent matches the physical location of the digitiser as only the GPS time signal is used by the digitiser Click Submit to save the changes 9 7 2 Configurable parameters in expert mode The following additional parameters are available in expert mode Path to log file Leave blank to use syslog Log level Important notices Minimum severity level of messages to record in log Log file Max NTP error Maximum clock drift in microseconds to accept as locked Log file It may sometimes be desirable for debugging purposes to separate log messages for this transmitter from the standard system log The text field can be populated with a path name which will then be used for dedicated logging If left blank logging occurs via the standard Linux syslog facility to var log messages Log level The drop down menu controls the level of detail present in log messages whether to syslog or to a dedicated log file Not all of the standard syslog logging levels are available The menu offers a choice in order of decreasing detail of e Debugging information e Informational messages Important notices Warnings MAN EAM 0003 126 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Digitiser Synchronisation Max NTP error Controls the accuracy of synchronisation which must be achieved by NTP before the res
299. see that the storage is currently mounted and in use Active and that a flush of MiniSEED data is almost complete 35MiB 35MiB The size and utilisation of the device is also given The storage power duty cycle shown is the ratio of the total time during which the storage has been powered up to the system uptime the time since the last boot expressed as a percentage In power critical applications this provides useful feedback when tuning the ring buffer sizes and fill thresholds see section 11 2 1 on page 139 for details of these parameters If you wish to retrieve the most recent data first click the Flush to storage button to copy all pending data from the buffer memory to the hard drive A MAN EAM 0003 150 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Recording and Retrieving Data progress screen will display messages as the various stages of the process complete Flush files to disk Data flush has been signalled to daemon This may take some time to complete Contacting rdisk daemon Rdisk daemon mount complete Flushing GCF buffers Creating file 2011068 gctfraw 2011068T04002 oqctf new Creating file 2011068 gcfraw 2011068T04302 oqcf new File 2011068 gcfraw 2011068T0O5002 qcf new 168 ocfraw 2011068TO5302 gqcf new Creating file 201106 Creating file 2011066 gctraw 201106 Creating file 2011068 gcfraw 2011068T11002 qcf new Flushing DIRCOPY buffers Starting copying var spool
300. ser is covered in a separate manual the CD1 1 operations guide MAN EAM 1100 which is available for download from http www guralp com documents MAN EAM 1100 pdf 14 4 2 Environment logs Platinum firmware has the facility to record environmental information such as temperature and supply voltage Samples are recorded every ten seconds The data can be subsequently downloaded or graphed The parameters available for monitoring vary between models To configure the environment logs from the web interface select Configuration All options GPIO labels and power switch settings Logging The screen displays the environment logging options MAN EAM 0003 235 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Monitoring Operations GPIO line settings Environment logging Some input lines have properties associated with them such as line voltage or temperature that can be logged Select the desired properties to log below Enable monitoring ow voltage thresnol W_Voltage_threshal Tick the check box next to each parameter you wish to monitor then scroll to the bottom of the page and click Submit to record your choices 14 4 3 Retrieving environment log data Before data can be retrieved from the environment logs the parameters that are to be logged must be selected as described in the previous section To view or retrieve the logged data from the web interface select Tools Environment lo
301. serss 197 12 5 QUICK Seismic Characteristic Data csisasecasnstconsin cnGastntiareaanna reas seseesuvbeadicadsvoencd 198 12 5 0 Configurable parameters in simple MOdE ccccccccesseescecaeeeeaeseeaeeeesesess 198 12 5 1 Configurable parameters in expert mode sssssssssssrresssssrerrsssrerssrrsserssers 200 120 WIN SONG OT haen e snes decneaae decanted vie aieahued E T 200 12 6 0 Configurable parameters in simple MOdE cccccccessseeeeeceeeeeneseeaeseeaesees 201 12 6 1 Configurable parameters in expert mode sssssssssssrrsessserrresssrerssrrssersserse 203 13 Bun Gin NGERW OLKS vesicorssuscssicansaducenqatensancucessuatceusdatauasuaeenaawantanaelaxenostusaansasntarentneeenncnes 205 DU GD ae eg aece vsiscerc ie ned ichonin tact Peaeaiye ara sce SoMa aceleniad cme Pane e aee a ateatte 205 13 0 The GDHNnk tans MCT eerren E E gandadeehaniou acres tniosaeameaaewnds 205 Tt TEGDI INK ICCI VO errentea dint lacneted sicitieaddsiaataiatersnuiteniieds 209 13 2 G ralp Sec re TCP Multiplexer nasiona nE E ET E 213 DZO TTheGSTM Cicih ersa e a a ei ouetasaundeacteanetere 213 T21 The GS EM Ser CF eaaa a a aa 216 14 Monitonine Opera GUS vid sasiies tacteoncdecesaianaitoctiedindseveateaainesdelaccesdsaateetbenadecns saan yeateniness 220 14 1 Diagnostics and the Summary SCTEEN cccceseecccseeesceceaeeeneeecauceeeeeeseseeeeceeesegs 220 TALO OV SUSI AUG sinteaecasi nin a eee tet est ert wine eta teunea natn nte Man hitiaes 220
302. services from the top level menu Now select seedlink out SEEDlink network server from the System Services menu The next screen shows a list of all SEEDlink server instances that have been configured SEEDIink network server instance selection Create new service instance MAN EAM 0003 184 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Transmitting Data You can reconfigure any existing service by clicking on its menu entry To configure a new SEEDlink server select Create service instance The following screen shown overleaf allows you to configure the parameters of the server 12 2 2 1 Configurable parameters in simple mode The configurable parameters for the SEEDlink network server are contained in a single form in simple mode General SEEDIlink server General settings IMPORTANT NOTE you must configure the MiniSEED record creation process gdi2miniseed to create records with a size of 512 bytes If you do not do this the SEEDIlink server will not run as SeedLINK requires 512 byte records User description SEEDlink network server instance 1 User label for this SEEDIink server instance Enable Enable this SEEDlink server at system startup Delete Delete this SEEDlink server instance Server hostname IP address The hostname or IP address to listen on Leave empty for all Server port service name seedilink The TCP port number
303. sing WEP enter the second key or passphrase here WEP key 2 If using WEP enter the third key or passphrase here WEP key 3 If using WEP enter the fourth key or passphrase here MAN EAM 0003 77 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Networking Configuration SSID Specifies the Service Set Identifier network name for the desired wireless network Priority Used to decide which network is chosen for connection when several configured networks are detected connections to networks with higher priority numbers are attempted first Key management Drop down menu used to select which authentication strategy is used for this network If WPA PSK WiFi Protected Access pre shared keys is chosen the following fields allow the operator to specify one or more access keys passphrases 7 2 1 3 IP address The IP address screen allows the selection of DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol or static addressing If DHCP is chosen a DHCP server will provide the unit with an IP address as well as the IP address of a default router gateway and optionally other parameters such as the address of a DNS server name server If static addressing is selected the desired IP address and default router must be specified in the following two fields Network interface wlanO IP address settings Configuration method DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol x Determines how the interface parameters are disco
304. smitting Data Server hostname IP address Used to restrict the server to listen for incoming connection requests only via particular network interfaces If multiple interfaces or addresses are configured for this system entering the IP address or associated hostname of one of them prevents connection attempts made to all other addresses If left blank connection requests will be considered from all interfaces Server port service name Must be populated with the service name or port number on which it will listen for incoming connections This must not be used by any other service on this system Protocol Network BRP server settings Protocol parameters ACK NAK timeout 150 ms Time to wait for ACK NAK before transmitting next block milliseconds Mode Direct simple transmission with link error correction butno backfill Block transmission mode Allow terminal F Allow access to configuration terminal through this link ACK NAK timeout Should be populated with an integer value which specifies the number of milliseconds the server should wait for an acknowledgement packet before transmitting the next block Mode The drop down menu controls the BRP transmission mode of the server At present the only available choice is Direct simple transmission with link error correction but no backfill Future implementations will offer additional options Filter The Output filtering sec
305. sponse times It can also be used to keep a sparsely used link alive where a disconnect on inactivity feature would otherwise interrupt it MAN EAM 0003 95 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Networking Configuration Reboot fail count If the link test fails repeatedly the acquisition module is rebooted Enter the number of failed tests before reboot The ppp watchdog service can be started stopped and restarted using the Services page under the Control menu See section 14 3 5 on page 234 7 7 5 Configurable parameters in expert mode A number of additional parameters are displayed when in expert mode a Length of time in seconds for the PPP daemon to start Test bin ping c 5 gstm guralp com command Command to run to test the link is active Time 30 5 between tests Length of time in seconds between test runs Kill usr bin killall pppd command Command to execute to restart the PPF daemon Force kill 3 count No of failures before we force kill 9 a PPP daemon restart empty for never Force kill usr bin killall 9 pppd command Command to execute when forcing PPP daemon to restart Reboot fail 3q count No of failures before system is rebooted empty for never Reboot sbin reboot comman Command to execute in order to reboot the system Ha Force sbin reboot n reboot command Command to execute to reboot the system when normal reboot command fails Home
306. ssing software developed by Instrument Software Technologies Inc For more information please see www isti com products earthworm The EarthWorm sender allows Platinum systems to send data directly to an EarthWorm installation MAN EAM 0003 186 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Transmitting Data To configure an EarthWorm sender from the web interface select Configuration Services Miscellaneous or Configuration All options System services Miscellaneous To configure an EarthWorm sender from the command line start gconfig and select System services from the top level menu Now select gdiZew Earthworm sender The screen shows a list of all EarthWorm sender instances that have been configured You can reconfigure any existing service by clicking on its menu entry To configure a new EarthWorm sender select Create service instance The following screen allows you to configure the parameters of the sender 12 3 1 Configurable parameters in simple mode The configurable parameters for the EarthWorm sender have four tabbed pages in simple mode General Settings Channels and Heartbeats 12 3 1 1 General tab Home Configuration Services gdi2zew 0 Earthworm sender General settings gdi2ew sends samples acquired through the system into Earthworm packets suitable for use with an Earthworm instance Only version 7 0 onwards using the Location
307. ssue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Networking Configuration order to synchronise external equipment such as a CMG DM24 digitiser module This technique is described in section 9 6 on page 124 The NTP subsystem displays its status in a panel of the System status display of the web interface This panel includes the current system date and time the lock status estimated error and current clock source Platinum systems support two distinct timing modes NTP and Manual NTP is recommended for nearly all installations Manual mode requires that the system clock be set from the command line at least once per day and is by its nature considerably less accurate than NTP mode To configure NTP from the web interface select Configuration Data handling Timing or Configuration All options Networking Network Time Protocol daemon To configure NTP from the command line start gconfig select Networking from the top level menu and then select Network Time Protocol NTP daemon 1 4 1 Configurable parameters The configurable parameters for timing are presented in three tabs General NTP and Manual MAN EAM 0003 85 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Networking Configuration 7 4 1 1 General tab Home Configuration Timing Timing mode The recommended mode of timing operation is NTP This can gather time from network servers fr
308. st of increased vulnerability to power outages or unexpected storage device disconnection UID and GID When recording to an NFS or ext4 volume files are normally written as user root and group root If this is undesirable another user ID and or group ID can be specified using these two fields 11 2 2 File name escape sequences Escape sequences tokens are used in the File name fields in the MiniSEED and GCF recording configuration pages The escape sequences all begin with a percent character and are used to insert variable data such as the date or stream name into the file or directory name each escape sequence is replaced with the relevant value Any non escape sequence characters are copied verbatim into the name as are unrecognised escape sequences All numbers are decimal and will have leading zeroes added to fill the required number of digits where appropriate The available escape sequences are listed below Items marked t only have values in GCF context and will be replaced by the relevant number of spaces if used with miniSEED Items marked t only have values in miniSEED context d 2 digit day of month 01 31 H 2 digit hour in 24 hour clock 00 23 j 3 digit Julian day m 2 digit month 01 12 M 2 digit minute 00 59 y 2 digit year i e without century digits 00 99 Y 4 digit year S GCF System ID T C GCF Stream ID T Ss 5 char SEED stati
309. st produce RTSTATUS packets CMG CD24 digitisers and digital sensors incorporating them such as the CMG 6TD will do this unconditionally when running firmware version 279 or later CMG _DM24 digitisers can have these packets enabled or disabled via MAN EAM 0003 87 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Networking Configuration 1 9 software using the command RTSTATUS ENABLE They are automatically enabled if the digitiser is ever configured via the interface in Platinum Acquire approximate time from connected GPS This check box tells the system that a GPS receiver has been attached to one of the serial ports and is to be used as a clock source The serial port used must be configured with a Port function of NMEA in Receive GPS data for NTP and when used with G ralp supplied GPS receivers must be set to 4 800 baud operation as described in 9 6 on page 124 No further configuration is required Server address Allows a number of Internet or network accessible NTP servers to be listed for use as clock sources You can specify these servers by either IP address or hostname If names are used they must either be listed in the local hosts file etc hosts or resolvable via the Domain Name Service DNS Clicking the button on any row will open a new blank row In the same way rows can be deleted by clicking the corresponding button 1 4 2 Configurable parameters in expert mo
310. strated below Linux Clock NMEA Out z CMG NAM Digitiser or Digital Instrument i Internet GPS input To configure the NTP subsystem see section 7 4 on page 84 To configure NMEA output see section 9 7 on page 125 Using GPS with Cylindrical Digitisers G ralp Systems Ltd s cylindrical digitisers provide a CMG DM24 and a CMG EAM in a single package An internal bi directional connection is available between Port C of the EAM and the digitiser module This connection can operate in one of two modes e The EAM s NTP subsystem can provide NMEA to the digitiser module s clock circuitry In this case the external GPS socket is automatically disconnected This is the recommended configuration when GPS synchronisation is impossible but internet NTP is available or e An external GPS receiver can provide input to both the digitiser module s clock circuitry and the EAM s NTP subsystem This configuration is possible but not recommended MAN EAM 0003 122 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Digitiser Synchronisation T Note Where GPS is available you should always synchronise the EAM to the digitiser s RTSTATUS packets rather than directly to GPS as explained in section 9 1 on page 120 The data flow when a GPS receiver is used is illustrated below GPS Receiver GPS Port Digitiser Clock lt gt RTSTATUS In 7 f Hod EH S NMEA Out If required the
311. sub menu of the Configuration menu Control Configuration Digital 1 0 All options Port A sensor LW 105 Hostname Port E sensor LW DEVO Save Restore Reboot Users Services Data handling Disk recording Serial ports Services Tasks Networking Interfaces Mail NTE 55H server System setup Port A digitiser LW 105 Port B digitiser LW DEVO Although there are two links on the Control section only the first sensor can be controlled Both links for the digitiser take you to the same page and either may be used This allows recovery from the situation where two physical digitisers with the same serial numbers have been connected If either of these links are selected the resulting page differs slightly from that described in Section 8 1 on page 100 MAN EAM 0003 117 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Digitiser Configuration The Device info blocks section now displays the status of two Info blocks one for each connected sensor The Display device info blocks button takes you to a screen from where you can edit both Device info blocks Info block 1 is set Info block 2 is set Display device info blocks Extra columns appear in the Decimator outputs configuration section Decimator outputs ns B Highpass filter Disabled Sample sia Z m e x z2 n2 E2 x2 Tapo 500sps continuous F J 7 Delete i T
312. t Network is unreachable ccccecccsecccseccneceneeeeaeeeneues 272 16 4 2 Upetades report rsync eor saisnacutsaticuenente ante ne Medhags 272 16 4 3 Errors during upgrade directory not CEMPty ccccccseeeecseecceeecaeseeeeeeseees 272 16 4 4 Upgrade completes but build version remains at 3801 c ccseccseeeeeeees 273 16 4 5 Regaining access when locked Out ccccccecccccsseecceceesccceeeesecseeeesseeeaenss 273 16 5 Append Bs Connector Pinol Sioe E sntuectnatas AO 275 16 5 0 Peli case PORTS A B C osssessssesresesresersesreseseeseseesersrseeeseesessesossrssereseresereses 275 165 1 Pelkcase ata Out POM re extn ewtedowians 276 162552 Pel case SB orii naa sane crauavacsamabaotenedqaielatimecnenuesieeansbuaneceaacioausunueacmienteaas 278 165573 Peleas NGIWO Kreien A E A E 279 10 04 Pel edser GONSO lC E eee townie 280 16 525 Ginder G PIO nirera e E O EAEC S 281 E T a a G E a N N E 282 16 57 Gy Ger USD arcaei AEA NEA T 283 10S Cynder POWO cenn eet aaah Dir eretiasei ee een tese eae aeeanc ates 284 1625 9 Gy tv Oi TO TIN CU kagusse a ctan SN eaue toe lee menhuatetaes 285 165 10 Cyn Ger aa ciatmuaredacnveudecnenecttcesnecnnesidenescetlaenvacwustoudsneen EEE E TOES 286 TOvo lal SSCS OF POP E E E E E NE E A 287 1675 2 Cynder Auxy pulaa TT 288 165 T3 DM24AS2AEAM SCns or Np noesieie n ei a E EEA 289 16 6 Appendix F Open source software and the GPL eessssssessessesssressrrsserssrrssre 29
313. t Reject check boxes clear Push Scream server Push destinations It is possible to push Scream packets over UDP to several destinations without needing a client to send a GCFSEND request Additionally it is possible to broadcast to a network although the broadcast option is turned off by default to avoid misconfiguration Enable broadcast Check this to enable pushing Scream packets to network broadcast addresses The scream server is capable of both responding to data requests from clients PULL mode and of sending data uninvited to remote destinations PUSH mode The table below is used to list any PUSH mode clients For each a Host must be specified as either an IP address or hostname and a Port must be given as either a service number or name MAN EAM 0003 176 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Transmitting Data Clicking the button on any row will open a new row In the same way rows can be deleted by clicking the corresponding button Enable broadcast By default the server will not send to network broadcast addresses This behaviour can be enabled by ticking the check box Filter The Output filtering section allows the operator to control which data are transmitted selecting by block type sample rate or channel name Scream server Output filtering This section allows you to choose whether to transmit all GCF blocks as they are received fro
314. t and output services In these situations the drop down menu can be used to select a multiplexer instance with which to associate this compressor The menu offers a list of currently configured multiplexers 12 1 2 GCF BRP Serial Server The GCF BRP serial server transmits G ralp Compressed Format GCF data using the Block Recovery Protocol BRP over any available serial port To configure a GCF BRP serial server from the web interface select Configuration Serial ports Or Configuration All options Serial ports To configure a GCF BRP serial server from the command line start gconfig and select Serial ports from the top level menu Now select the serial port over which you wish to transmit GCF Port function Select GCF out Outbound GCF data transmission from the drop down menu Port speed Choose the required Baud rate from the drop down menu Now select the GCF output settings link from the list at the bottom of the page The next screen allows you to configure the GCF BRP serial server instance which will run on the previously selected port The screen illustrated here is for an instance running on the DATA OUT port the screens for other serial ports are practically identical 12 1 2 1 Configurable parameters in simple mode The configurable parameters for the GCF output settings in simple mode have two tabbed pages General and Filtering MAN EAM 0003 166 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and
315. t instance is always enabled Network GDI link transmitter gdi link tx transmits samples in the native protocol of the Platinum software suite called Guralp Data Interconnect This is a low latency real time transmission protocol which sends encoded state of health with samples Network settings Client name Used to identify this transmitter to other receivers Leave empty for default Local IP address IP address or host name to listen on Leave empty for default Local port service Service name or TCP port number to listen on Leave empty for default Client name Set to the instance name as seen by the client A suitable default is used if this field is left blank Local IP address If the acquisition module has multiple network addresses it can be restricted to listen for incoming connections on only one of them by entering its address here If left blank the transmitter will listen on all available instances MAN EAM 0003 204 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Building Networks Local port service The default service port for the transmitter is 1565 but an alternative port can be entered here if required Back fill Back fill is the process whereby missing data are recovered GDI link transmitter gdi link tx transmits samples in the native protocol of the Platinum software suite called Guralp Data Interconnect This is a low latency real time transmission protocol
316. t password is rootme Note that no characters will be echoed to the screen as you type the password Once connected you will be presented with a shell prompt which is ready to accept commands When you are finished with your SSH session and want to disconnect enter exit at the command line or type Ctrl D There are a number of escape sequences for controlling the session all of which begin with a tilde so if you need to send a tilde character to the acquisition module type two tildes consecutively For more information see the section on Escape Characters in the manual at http man wiki net index php 1 ssh Note If you plan to use ssh regularly to communicate with a acquisition module you can configure the system to bypass the password prompt when logging in from a list of pre authorised computer user combinations This involves generating a unique key pair for the user and PC which will access the acquisition module and then copying the public half of the key pair to the acquisition module This can be more secure than passwords and is fully documented at http suso org docs shell ssh sdf For details about uploading your keys to the CMG EAM see section 7 6 on page 90 3 2 5 2 SSH connections using PuTTY To use PuTTY you must first know or discover the IP address of the unit as described in the previous sections Once you have the IP address start PuTTY by choosing it from the Start menu
317. t port which allows remote terminal access The ssh server sshd can not currently be configured using gconfig although it can be configured via the web interface If web access is unavailable it is possible to configure sshd from the command line by directly editing the configuration files 7 6 1 Configuring sshd via the web interface To configure the SSH server from the web interface select Configuration Networking SSH server The screen is not reproduced in this document as it is particularly large due to the amount of explanatory text Each option is however discussed below The version of sshd installed openSSH supports both version 1 and version 2 of the ssh protocol Version 1 has some well known weaknesses and should be avoided if at all possible but some commercially available systems still do not support v2 so v1 is supported here for compatibility The Enable SSH Protocol v1 check box should be cleared unless your ssh client cannot support v2 or cannot be upgraded to support it Click the Change server options button to commit this change If you want to download the ssh server s public key to allow the connecting host to check and verify the CMG EAM s identity use the relevant Download server public key button there is one each for protocol versions 1 and 2 There is also the capability to command the CMG EAM to create a new private public key pair from this screen To configure password less login to
318. t process to complete before removing the drive MAN EAM 0003 160 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Recording and Retrieving Data The drive can then be connected to any computer that supports external USB or FireWire storage devices In some circumstances you may need to provide a power connection to the drive see section 11 1 on page 137 for more details The mass storage device may have been formatted as either a VFAT or ext3 volume Windows computers cannot read ext3 volumes without additional software such as Explore2fs or DiskInternals Linux Reader See http www howtoforge com access linux partitions from windows for more 11 3 3 Accessing internal storage directly Certain systems such as integrated instruments and cylindrical digitisers are fitted with an internal Flash memory device which is accessible via USB It can be written to by selecting Internal USB storage from the Recording destination drop down menu on the Disk recording page see section 11 2 on page 138 When a USB host such as a laptop or PC is connected to the GPIO port the pin out of which is given in section 16 5 6 on page 278 internal circuitry detects the USB power and automatically connects the Flash memory directly to the GPIO socket causing it to behave identically to a standard USB memory stick This method can be used even if no power is supplied to the EAM When no power is detected
319. ta in any way The ADC module has its own clock which always runs in UTC MAN EAM 0003 86 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Networking Configuration 1 4 1 2 NTP tab Home Configuration Timing Timing mode NTP parameters NTP network time protocol is used to control the Linux system clock The ADC sample clock is typically controlled separately through GPS Acquire accurate time from connected ea digitisers recommended Use connected ADC module time For most surface installations Acquire approximate time from connected GPS NMEA Use connected GPS receiver to acquire time Mainly for CMG NAM timeservers lt is also possible to acquire time from a local network timeserver or from Internet timeservers This is mainly useful for CMG NAM modules or for specialised Installations without GPS The following servers will be queried for the time You can specify a server by hostname or by IP address Server options can typically be ignored unless you are very familiar with operation of the ntpd program Config hame Help Submit Generated at 20 13 07 25709 22 5672 by GCS 2 0 1 1 Portions of output copyright 2013 G ralp Systems Limited The NTP tab contains the following configurable options Acquire time from connected digitisers This check box tells the system that one or more attached digitisers are to be considered as accurate clock sources For this to work the digitiser mu
320. ta source The menu will offer all configured instances 11 2 1 4 Non seismic data Selecting the Non seismic data tab displays the following screen Home Configuration Storage and recordin Storage and recording Storage device MniSEED Gor None data NS Aavancea Non selsmic data File name 96 Y m d h Template for building the directory name See help for details on the tokens Flush threshold 10 A flush to ca is AE started when this much data is waiting Enable a aa a a intense of the system logfile to storage Config home Help submit Generated at 2013 04 15111 41 19Z by GCS 2 0 11 Portions of output copyright 2013 G ralp Systems Limited This facility can be used to copy data files from your own applications and optionally the system log files to the mass storage device simplifying transfer of these data from the unit to external systems MAN EAM 0003 143 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Recording and Retrieving Data Files to be copied should be created in the directory var spool to rdisk The following options are available File name When building the directory in to which files are copied any tokens in the template string are replaced with strings based on the current date time The following tokens are supported a literal percentage sign h system hostname Y 4 digit year number m 2 digit month number 01
321. tatus dem105 System status GCFin PotA GCFin PotB GCF in Port F Scream server GCF network sender G Default data transport daemon GCF compressor Default instance 49 Disk recording Q GSLA 1061 NTP Removable disk Linux system GCF in Port A 100 z mi m r m m Reboot w Total number of blocks received 79078 f 100 Services Total number of naks sent 0 i Number of blocks received in last 5 minutes 218 100 Tools r Number of naks sentin last 5 minutes 0 100 Extract Mini SEED records O Timestamp of last packet received 1970 01 04714 50 262 Remnvalhile siek Aerated at 197 j 7 eani saia aaa View saved XML snapshot Download snapshotas XML Show hidden values output copyright 1970 Garalp Systems Lomited Genenmted af IITTI SLL by amistatescg Portions of oulpet cogyright 1970 Giralp Systems itd The left hand frame contains the system ID above a menu while the main frame displays sub menus input forms and display screens 4 2 1 Navigation aides To help with navigation the main frame displays a series of links indicating the current position in the configuration system hierarchy Home Configuration Networking ethO These links are commonly known as a bread crumb trail The Home link will return the user to the system home page shown above MAN EAM 0003 33 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Platinum Overvi
322. te parity and number of bits Exit minicom without resetting the modem If macros changed and were not saved you will have a chance to do SO Receive files Choose from various protocols external If you have the filename selection window and the prompt for download directory enabled you ll get a selection window for choosing the directory for downloading Otherwise the download directory defined in the Filenames and paths menu will be used 268 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware MAN EAM 0003 Appendices Send files Choose the protocol like you do with the receive command If you don t have the file name selection window enabled in the File transfer protocols menu you ll just have to write the file name s in a dialog window If you have the selection window enabled a window will pop up showing the file names in your upload directory You can tag and un tag file names by pressing ee and move the cursor up and down with atv or JIK The selected file names are shown highlighted Directory names are shown within brackets and you can move up or down in the directory tree by pressing twice Finally send the files by pressing il or quit by pressing Esci Choose Terminal emulation Ansi color or vt100 You can also change the backspace key here turn the status line on or off and define delay in milliseconds after each newline if you need that Toggle line wrap on off
323. tency 32 bit 5 samples Disables compression forcing samples to be transmitted as 32 bit differences Latency is reduced by limiting the number of records to one per packet If the system is connected to a digitiser that is using a different combination of compression control and sample limits it will appear as an extra item in the drop down menu labelled Custom For example Custom 16 bit 40 samples max would appear if these settings had been manually configured from the digitiser s command line 8 1 1 7 Decimator outputs The decimator outputs control which digitiser taps have been configured to output data both in continuous and triggered states Decimator outputs Highpass filter Disabled Tap i 100sps continuous W W v Delete Refresh _ _Enable triggers _ _Add new output On four channel digitisers only the columns Z N E and X are displayed On seven channel digitisers Z N E and X represent the outputs from SENSOR A and Z2 N2 E2 and X2 represent the outputs from SENSOR B T Note Do not confuse SENSOR A and SENSOR B which are analogue inputs to the digitiser with Port A and Port B which are digital inputs to the EAM An optional Highpass filter can be applied to eliminate the effect of any DC offset in the sensor s output The available corner frequencies 100 300 and 1000 seconds can be selected from the drop down menu The table below the filter configur
324. ters in simple mode The configurable parameters for the QSCD server have three tabbed pages in simple mode General Network and Channels General QSCD sender General setting User description KIGAM QSCD Quick Seismic Characteristic Data sem User label for the transmitter instance Enable Enable the transmitter at system startup Delete Delete this transmitter instance User description Set to a meaningful name for the data that it will serve MAN EAM 0003 196 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Transmitting Data Enable Causes this service to start automatically when the system is re booted If this check box is cleared the service will need to be started manually from the Control Services menu Delete Causes the configuration for this instance to be removed from the system when the form is submitted Network QOSCD sender Network parameters Station name DCM10 9 letter SEED like station name to identify transmission me e Station name Like SEED QSCD links require a unique name to identify the source of the data To send QSCD data to remote hosts enter their DNS names or IP addresses in the table with the associated service name or port number for each Port names and numbers are associated with each other in the standard Linux etc services file Clicking the button on any row will open a new row In the same way rows
325. th the device s drive letter 5 3 4 2 Linux 2 6 20 To see all options enter the command US EroOoL To repartition the device enter the command u3 tool U dev sg3 Replace dev sg3 with the SCSI generic device associated with your device The correct device can be deduced from the output from the command dmesg 5 3 4 3 Linux 2 4 To unlock the secured data partition using Linux s USB subsystem modprobe r usb storage i fs TOOL w scan modprobe usb storage After unlocking the device can be used normally Upgrade Types There are three different types of upgrade each of which is described below When upgrading via the web interface the desired type is selected by pressing the appropriate button When upgrading directly from the command line or from a USB storage device the required type is selected by the use or omission of command line arguments 5 4 1 Standard upgrade The standard upgrade brings the firmware to the latest revision while respecting and preserving all configuration settings MAN EAM 0003 61 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Platinum Firmware Upgrades Note All files on any connected hard drive or USB drive are left untouched as are any files in the directories home root var and usr local In addition any file with an extension of local will be preserved this is the mechanism by which most configuration settings are safeguarded To pe
326. the CMG EAM you can upload the public key of the connecting machine to the CMG EAM using the New client key section Browse the connecting host s file system for the key file usually named id_dsa pub and upload it here This will allow password less root access to the system from that machine Uploaded client keys are displayed in the Authorised client keys section Any existing authorised keys can be removed Select the check box next to the key you wish to remove and click Remove selected keys Note Password less login via ssh v2 is perhaps counter intuitively the most secure way to access your acquisition module There is a useful discussion of the ssh protocol and full details of its usage at the site http tinyurl com whyssh MAN EAM 0003 90 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Networking Configuration tl Note Systems are shipped with a pre authorised client key to which G ralp Systems support staff have the matching key This allows us to access your unit and reset the root password should you forget it You are free to delete this key if you wish There is a second and significantly more complicated way of resetting the root password if you have physical access to the system Please contact support if you find yourself in this situation 7 6 2 Configuring sshd from the command line This is a complex issue and use of the web interface is strongly encouraged unless you are familiar
327. the appropriate commands for your terminal emulator Try each plausible baud rate in turn 2 At each speed press Enter a few times in the terminal window until the login prompt appears 3 Login to the EAM and enter the command gconfig 4 You can now configure the EAM as required 16 4 6 3 No output and connection not possible If there is no output at all and you are unable to connect to the EAM please contact G ralp Systems for assistance MAN EAM 0003 272 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Appendices 16 5 Appendix E Connector pinouts 16 5 1 Peli case PORTs A B C These are standard 10 pin mil spec sockets conforming to MIL DTL 26482 formerly MIL C 26482 A typical part number is O02E 12 10S although the initial 02E varies with manufacturer Suitable mating connectors have part numbers like 12 10P and are available from Amphenol ITT Cannon and other manufacturers The pin out is such that the port can be connected to the serial output of a DM24 digitizer using a straight through cable Function Power 0 V Power input 10 to 35VDC RS232 RTS RS232 CTS RS232 DTR RS232 DSR RS232 ground RS232 CD RS232 transmit RS232 receive Wiring details for the compatible plug 12 10P as seen from the cable end i e during assembly MAN EAM 0003 273 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Appendices 16 5 2 Pel
328. the form is submitted Server hostname IP address Used to restrict the server to listen for incoming connection requests only via particular network interfaces If multiple interfaces or addresses are configured for this system entering the IP address or associated hostname of one of them prevents connection attempts made to all other addresses If left blank connection requests will be considered from all interfaces Server port service name Must be populated with the service name or port number on which it will listen for incoming connections This must not be used by any other service on this system MAN EAM 0003 175 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Transmitting Data Terminal Scream server Terminal Terminal mode Disable terminal access Check this to disable terminal access through Scream clients Use the table below to limit terminal access to certain hosts See help IP address and mask o Disable terminal access Used to prevent clients of this server from accessing the command line of the originating digitiser via the connection allowing support for data consumers who should not be allowed to reconfigure the data sources If this check box is ticked the table below can be used to either prohibit terminal access to all hosts except those listed by ticking the relevant Reject check boxes or to allow access to all hosts except those lists by leaving the relevan
329. the most likely explanation is that the machine running the browser does not have working network communications to and from the acquisition module This can be verified by pinging the IP address of the browser from the command line of the acquisition module eam999 ping c3 192 168 0 2 PING 192 068 2022 192 168 0 2 36 data bytes 64 bytes from 192 168 0 2 seq 0 ttl 63 time 2 284 ms 64 bytes from 192 168 0 2 seq 1 ttl 63 time 1 129 ms 64 bytes from 192 168 0 2 seq 2 ttl 63 time 1 944 ms 19221600442 DING Statistics 3 packets transmitted 3 packets received 0 packet loss round trip min avg max 1 129 1 785 2 284 ms eam999 To resolve this class of problem ensure that the cables are functioning which can be verified by checking the diagnostic lights on most switches hubs and double check that the PC and acquisition module are on the same subnet which means the CIDR suffices must match and the first sections of the IP addresses as defined by the CIDR suffices must also match The website http en wikipedia org wiki IP_address has some useful information for those for whom sub networking is unfamiliar 3 2 5 Connecting to the command line using SSH SSH Secure SHell is the most flexible way to control an acquisition module but it is less friendly than using the web interface It is possible to configure more advanced operations using SSH but the majority of control and configuration tasks can be
330. the web interface select Control Services This screen gives a list of all configured services services are the background programs that read convert and and write data and carry out the individual functions of the acquisition module The services are presented in three columns In the first is given the name of the service and in italics its description The second column shows the word Stopped in red for any services which are not running and for those which are running the PID process ID a unique number which the operating system uses to keep track of running programs and the date and time that this instance of the service was started The third column has buttons allowing you to stop start or re start each service Service control Console Running Start Stop Restart Serial Console Port PID 388 Started Sun Feb 27 11 41 54 UTC 2011 PortA Running Stat Stop Restart Serial Port A PID 621 Started Sun Feb 27 11 40 37 UTC 2011 PortB Running Start Stop Restart Serial Port B PID 406 Started Sun Feb 27 11 41 54 UTC 2011 PortC Stopped Stat Stop Restart Serial Port C a It is possible to monitor and control services from the command line using the ps command and various scripts in etc init local and etc init d This should be familiar to Linux users but full details are beyond the scope of this manual 14 3 6 RAID Array Services RAID arrays provide increased data security at the cost of extr
331. ther with the responses received from the digitiser and this may be useful both for learning the command line interface of the digitiser and for debugging any unexpected behaviour To do this select Show full digitiser dialogue in future form submissions from the miscellaneous section near the bottom of the configuration screen T Note This is a web form and therefore no changes will be made to the actual configuration of the digitiser until the form is submitted i e until the operator scrolls to the bottom of the page and clicks Submit changes amp Reboot digitiser 8 1 1 Configurable parameters The digitiser configuration screen is too large to be reproduced in one illustration in this manual It is therefore shown here in sections MAN EAM 0003 100 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Digitiser Configuration 8 1 1 1 Identity The first section displays the digitiser s identification string and serial number which can be edited It also displays the digitiser s software version GSLA 1061 m Identity System identification GSLA Serial number 1061 Serial number 2 1 Software version v 106 build 46 System identification Serial number Make any desired changes and then click on the Submitchanges amp Rebootdigitiser button at the bottom of the screen If the digitiser is running in dual serial mode both serial numbers are displayed on this
332. tinum local mirror path path to your local mirror directory comment GSL EAM firmware numeric ids yes log file path to writeable log file timeout 600 hosts allow Consult the manual page for rsyncd conf 5 for details of further options that you can use in this file including optional security improvements This is available on line at http man wiki net index php 5 rsyncd contf Once the etc rsyncd conf file is ready you can start the rsync server with the command sudo rsync daemon If you want to run the rsync server permanently it is possible to start it via inetd xinetd or an rc script Consult the manual page for rsyncd conf 5 for further details 5 3 2 3 Configuring the upgrade system to use the new server The standard upgrade source must be over ridden on each system to be upgraded Create the file etc conf d upgrade local with the following contents ROoING HOST adaress OLwMmy lt server RSYNC PORT 61616 RSYNC MODULE platinum local mirror replacing e address of my server with the DNS name or IP address of the mirror server e 61616 with the port number you chose earlier and platinum local mirror with the module name you chose earlier Note the quotation marks around the variables The acquisition devices can now be updated from the mirror by following the instructions in section 5 4 on page 61 Note that the configuration files MAN EAM 0003 58 Issue E February 2
333. tion IP route args Used to modify the invocation of the associated ip route add command in order to e g set the route metric The options that can be set here are mostly highly technical and should rarely be required Please see http Jlinux die net man 8 ip for more information 1 2 Wireless Networking CMG EAM and CMG DAS units equipped with wireless networking hardware can function as clients for Wireless Access Points or participate in ad hoc wireless networks To configure a wireless network interface from the web interface select Configuration Networking Interfaces Or Configuration All options Networking The following screen will be displayed Networking configuration Select a network interface to configure ethO Primary wired network interface e Create a new VLAN interface s wlan Wireless interface wlan0 or a network service e Network Time Protocol NTP daemon e Mail Transfer Agent e mail service Now select wlan0O Wireless interface wlan0 Network interface wlanO Device wlang Device name Fixed MAC address 00 19 88 20 75 73 MAC address Fixed Description Wireless interface wlan0 User description of the interface Defined networks e Create new network You can change the description of the wireless network if you wish To configure a wireless network interface from the command line start gconfig and select Networking from the top level menu E
334. tion allows the operator to control which data are transmitted selecting by block type sample rate or channel name MAN EAM 0003 171 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Transmitting Data Network BRP server settings Output filtering This section allows you to choose whether to transmit all GCF blocks as they are received from the GCF convertor or only a subset Output type All blocks Select which types of block to transmit Max sample rate samples per second If filtering by sample rate the maximum sample rate to send lf filtering by channel name the channels to be transmitted should be entered below The exact name of the channel must be given in the format SYSID STRID Output type The drop down menu offers a choice of e All blocks filtering by block type is disabled e Only status blocks no data blocks are transmitted Only blocks below a certain sample rate the threshold inclusive rate is specified in the following text field Only blocks matching a list of channel names offering the highest granularity of control Max sample rate If the output type is set to Only blocks below a certain sample rate the text field is used to specify the inclusive threshold above which data are not transmitted If the Output type field is set to Only blocks matching a list of channel names the channel names must be specified in the
335. to a Scream server Data are also recorded to the configured mass storage device in GCF format This is shown in the following diagram MAN EAM 0003 66 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Data Handling Serial Input Jupu or feshmemoy Modules N Scream Input server Modules gdi base GCF out The gdi2gcf module know as the GCF compressor is responsible for re blocking GDI samples into GCF blocks It provides data to all GCF output modules as well as to the gdi record module which writes GCF files to the mass storage device It has a number of configuration options which are described in section 11 2 on page 138 A similar arrangement applies to miniSEED data the gdi2miniseed module provides data to the SEEDlink server and to gdi record lig In Output Modules Input Modules gdi base 6 2 Configuring gdi base The gdi base module requires no configuration in most applications For very complex situations however it may be necessary to create additional MAN EAM 0003 67 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Data Handling instances The information in this section is provided the interests of completeness To configure a gdi base instance on the acquisition module from the web interface select Configuration Service Expert Advanced or Configuration All options System services Expert A
336. tries to the mapping table If you wish to use this mode it may be useful first MAN EAM 0003 164 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Transmitting Data to run the system in automatic mode for a short while this will populate the mapping table with an entry for each currently known channel which can serve as the basis for your own mapping table e Manual only channels named below are compressed Offers both channel filtering and name mapping If you wish to use this mode it may be useful first to run the system in automatic mode for a short while to populate the mapping table with an entry for each currently known channel this can serve as the basis for your own mapping table Clicking the button on any row will open a new row In the same way rows can be deleted by clicking the corresponding button Deleted channels will be transmitted unmapped in Semi automatic mode and not transmitted in Manual mode 12 1 1 2 Configurable parameters in expert mode The following additional parameters are available in expert mode Advanced GCF compressor Advanced options Database directory varjlib gdi2gcf default Path in which database and control files are placed Must be unique Log file Path to log file Leave blank to use syslog Log level Important notices Minimum severity level of messages to record in log GDI multiplexor Default data transport daemon Sel
337. ts m Ports i serial port Data out 38400 Changing the digitiser data out rate will cause the corresponding change to the local Port A data service to be made GPS 38400 This setting is only used for non GPS operations If a GPS device is enabled the port will be set to the GPS rate of 4800 baud regardless of this setting Data in 38400 For a stand alone digitiser or digital instrument the GPS and Data in ports are exposed on external connectors The Data out port is assumed to be connected to the acquisition module and the rate set here must match that set for the appropriate serial port see section 10 1 on page 128 for details of reconfiguring serial ports MAN EAM 0003 112 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Digitiser Configuration Note For CMG DAS systems the digitiser s Data out port is connected internally to the CMG EAM module s Port A and both ports must use the same Baud rate The digitiser s Data in port is used to provide a console for the digitiser without interrupting seismic data transmission and is connected internally to the CMG EAM module s Port B Again both ports must use the same Baud rate The digitiser s GPS port is connected to the CMG EAM module s Port C This connection can be used in two ways the acquisition module module can share with the digitiser the data from the physical GPS receiver and
338. tton If the form is submitted when the table is full extra blank lines are appended Deleted channels will be transmitted unmapped in Semi automatic mode and not transmitted in Manual mode 12 2 1 2 Configurable parameters in expert mode The following additional configuration parameters are available by clicking the Expert button at the bottom of the form and selecting the Advanced tab MAN EAM 0003 182 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Transmitting Data Mini SEED compressor Advanced options Database directory var lib gdi2miniseed 0 Path in which database and control files are placed Must be unique Log file Path to log file Leave blank to use syslog Log level Important notices Minimum severity level of messages to record in log GDI multiplexor Default data transport daemon Select which GDI multiplexor instance to compress data from The Database directory field can be used to control the location of the ring buffer and associated files In most configurations the default location is adequate but if for example a very large ring buffer is desired and the optional extra flash memory module is fitted it may be desirable to use the extra memory for this purpose To do this enter into this field the path to a unique directory under media flash_ module Log file It may sometimes be desirable for debugging purposes to separate l
339. twork Appliance Module The CMG NAM is a rack mountable device intended for use as a data concentrator in seismic networks It provides more interfaces processing power and storage than the CMG EAM The CMG NAM is intended for use in a data centre and consumes more power than the CMG EAM which was designed specifically to be a low power device 2 3 4 Data Acquisition Systems The Data Acquisition Systems are range of products combining analogue to digital converters digitisers with a CMG EAM in a single package For example the DM24S24EAM combines four DM24 digitisers and an EAM for connection to up to eight triaxial or twenty four uniaxial instruments MAN EAM 0003 12 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Equipment Overview They are available in various different package options including Peli case and steel or aluminium tubes 2 3 5 Integrated instruments Integrated instruments combine seismic sensors and a data acquisition system in a single package and are ideally suited for environments where rapid deployment is required Most integrated instruments have their own manuals which are used in combination with that for the digitiser and this publication 2 4 Typical Acquisition Modules Cylindrical DAS 24 Channel DAS CMG NAM MAN EAM 0003 13 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Equipment Overview 2 5 Integrated instruments seismometer or acce
340. u can be used to select a multiplexer instance with which to associate this transmitter The menu offers a list of currently configured multiplexers MAN EAM 0003 195 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Transmitting Data 12 5 Quick Seismic Characteristic Data QSCD is a protocol developed by KIGAM http www kigam re kr eng to send strong motion results which are computed every second To set up a QSCD server on the acquisition module first configure the relevant strong motion data sources as described in section 8 1 1 4 on page 103 then from the web interface select Configuration Services Miscellaneous or Configuration All options System services Miscellaneous To configure a QSCD server from the command line start gconfig and select System services from the top level menu Now select qscd out KIGAM QSCD Quick Seismic Characteristic Data sender from the System Services menu The next screen shows a list of all QSCD server instances that have been configured KIGAM QSCD Quick Seismic Characteristic Data sender instance selection e Cre w service instar You can reconfigure any existing service by clicking on its menu entry To configure a new QSCD server select Create service instance The following screen allows you to configure the parameters of the server As it is a large screen it is shown here in pieces 12 5 1 Configurable parame
341. ulting NMEA sentences will will indicate that the GPS is locked MAN EAM 0003 127 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Receiving Data 10 Receiving Data 10 1 The modular architecture of Platinum software allows seismic data to be received simultaneously from a number of sources and using a number of protocols Extra protocols can be implemented by request please contact G ralp Systems Ltd for more details At the time of writing Platinum firmware is shipped with support for CD1 1 G ralp Compressed Format GCF data received over serial ports GCF data received over a network using the Block Recovery Protocol BRP and GCF data forwarded from a copy of Scream or a Scream server such as a CMG EAM The use of CD1 1 is covered in a separate manual MAN EAM 1100 The use of the other receivers is described in this section GCF from serial devices Any or all of the serial ports may be configured to receive GCF data from a serially attached digitiser or digital instrument To configure a port for this purpose from the web interface select Configuration Serial ports Or Configuration All options Serial ports The following screen is displayed Serial ports configuration Select a port to configure Data Out Terminal 115200 baud e Port A GCF in 38400 baud Port B GCF in 38400 baud Port C None Port D None Port E Terminal 115200 baud
342. uring a number of watchdogs give each of them memorable names Enable Should normally be ticked but can be left clear if you only want to use the associated PPP connection occasionally Delete Deletes the instance when the form is submitted Daemon startup delay If the PPP connection relies on a modem link for its transport there may be a significant delay between instructing the PPP link to start and the connection being established So that the watchdog does not falsely detect a failed link during this period it can be instructed to sit idle for a number of seconds before it begins to test the link The length of the required delay should be entered into the field Test command Once the start up delay time has elapsed the watchdog periodically tests the connection To ensure that there is a valid end to end connection where for example a multi hop link is in use the exact method of testing is user configurable any valid command can be entered into the field and its exit status is taken to represent the link status zero for link up non zero for down The most common method used is to use the ping command to verify ICMP connectivity to the ultimate remote host but you are free to use the command or script of your choice here so long as it returns a non zero exit status on link failure Time between tests Determines how often the configured test is applied It can be set high to conserve bandwidth or set low to improve failure re
343. ust want quick access to the software build number this is contained in the file etc build version which can be read with the command eam2243 cat etc build version Overall build version BULED LABEL placinum gr able BUILD VERSION 12642 eam2243 The version in this case can be seen to be 12642 Upgrade Methods This section describes three different methods of upgrading the firmware In order to be upgraded the unit needs access to the latest version of the firmware If an internet connection is available G ralp Systems Ltd s software repository can be used This method is described in section 5 3 1 on page 04 MAN EAM 0003 53 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Platinum Firmware Upgrades If a number of units share a common network but that network is not connected to the internet you can make you own copy of the software repository on a PC or laptop which can be connected the network either permanently or temporarily and use that as the upgrade source This method is described in section 5 3 2 on page 55 If one or more units are to be upgraded but Internet access is not available the new firmware can be copied to a USB storage device such as a memory stick and the upgrade performed from that This method is described in section 5 3 3 on page 59 5 3 1 Upgrading via the internet In order to upgrade over the Internet from G ralp Systems Ltd s software repository th
344. utton displays the following pop up window Configuration backup Please note DM24 CD24 ADC module configuration is not saved or restored by this program even if the ADC module is integrated internally into this system Back up current configuration Create configuration backup Filename 2013 04 12 1318 eam 2243 fish E Description of this backup Test for documentation Cancel Create backup auto 00000000 2013 03 S EN me eam2243 fish BTW ee jonm backup show differences between selected backups gt Backt Generated at 013 04 12T13 17 352 by Pt web wt 0 1 12 Last refreshed at 2013 04 12713 17 352Z Portions of output copyright 2013 G ralp Systems Ltd A default file name is suggested but this can be over written if desired You can also enter a description of the back up which will be displayed in the list of stored configurations Click Create backup to save the current configuration to the internal storage The new stored configuration will appear in the list of stored configurations To save a configuration backup from the command line enter config backup backup comment user description file or in abbreviated form config backup b C user description file replacing user description with your own description of the backup within single quotation marks The configuration will be saved to the file specified by file 4 4 3 Downloading a saved configuration Using th
345. vered and set Static IP address The following parameters are used only in a static configuration IP address Address in IPv4 or IPv6 format with CIDR format netmask see help Default route gateway The IP address of the gateway router for access to other networks 1 2 2 Configurable parameters in expert mode When in expert mode new fields are available on the network and IP address forms and there are two new tabs IP aliasing and Routes MAN EAM 0003 78 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Networking Configuration 7 2 2 1 Network Network interface wlanO New network definition Network description Description of the wireless network you are defining numbers letters only The Maximum Transfer Unit 200 1536 MTU This field allows you to define a Maximum Transmission Unit the size of the largest packet that a network protocol can transmit for the associated network A value which is too small will cause inefficient packetisation whereas one which is too large will cause packet fragmentation and possible disruption to communication See the discussion in section 7 1 2 on page 72 for more information 7 2 2 2 IP Address Network interface wlanO IP address settings Configuration method DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Determines how the interface parameters are discovered and set DHCP options Extra dheped arguments Additional arguments passed t
346. verity level of messages to record in log GDI multiplexor Default data transport daemon f Select which GDI multiplexor to gather data from Log file It may sometimes be desirable for debugging purposes to separate log messages for this transmitter from the standard system log The text field can be populated with a path name which will then be used for dedicated logging If left blank logging occurs via the standard Linux syslog facility to var log messages Log level The drop down menu controls the level of detail present in log messages whether to syslog or to a dedicated log file Not all of the standard syslog logging levels are available The menu offers a choice in order of decreasing detail of e Debugging information e Informational messages MAN EAM 0003 201 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Transmitting Data Important notices Warnings GDI multiplexer In most configurations all data for all transmitters is taken from a single multiplexor as described in section 6 1 on page 65 For more complex configurations it is possible to configure multiple multiplexers each with their own set of input and output services In these situations the drop down menu can be used to select a multiplexer instance with which to associate this transmitter The menu offers a list of currently configured multiplexers MAN EAM 0003 202 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and
347. vice name to which a copy of input is sent GDI multiplexor Default data transpor daemon Select which GDI multiplexor instance to send data to Transmission delay Allows the operator to specify the total delay incurred during packet transmission from the attached digitiser Digitisers can produce special RTSTATUS packets which can be used to synchronise the NTP subsystem and hence the system clock with the digitiser s own GPS synchronised clock see section 7 4 on page 84 Unlike normal NTP peer dialogues there is no transmission delay discovery mechanism so for optimal accuracy it is important to specify the value here The ordinary delay associated with packet transmission down a short serial cable is already calculated and used so this field only needs populating if additional delays generated by say modems or radio links are encountered Log file It may sometimes be desirable for debugging purposes to separate log messages for this transmitter from the standard system log The text field can be populated with a path name which will then be used for dedicated logging If left blank logging occurs via the standard Linux syslog facility to var log messages Log level The drop down menu controls the level of detail present in log messages whether to syslog or to a dedicated log file Not all of the standard syslog logging levels are available The menu offers a choice in order of decreasing detail
348. ving GCF data until 16 36 and the default instance of the Scream network server was sending GCF data until the same time GCF audit log viewer GCF audit logs Select View to view a log in more detail Pnom itatentomty size vow Port A 2011 03 08115 59 397 256KiB View Port B 2011 03 08T15 59 397 256KiB View Scream server GCF network sender 2011 03 08T15 59 377 256KiB View Latest entry The Size column shows the size of the log buffer allocated to each data source or sink The log buffer size can be changed from the relevant service or port configuration screens in expert mode For example to allocate a larger log buffer to the GCF receiver running on Port A click on Serial ports from the main menu then on Port A GCF in GCF input settings and then click the Expert button You will see a drop down selection list labelled Audit log size from which you can select 64Kib 256Kib 2MiB or 16MiB To change the GCF audit log buffer size for the Scream network server from the web interface select Configuration Data transfer recording Services Now then click on GCF Scream network server Click on the entry for the instance you wish to change and then click the Expert button at the bottom of the page You will see a drop down selection list labelled Audit log size from which you can select 64Kib 256Kib 2MiB or 16M
349. which sends encoded state of health with samples Backfill By default backfill is disabled Be sure to enable it if required and to set up an associated directory cleaner task to manage buffer space Enable backfill Directory var lib gdi link t amp defaul Directory under which backfill files are stored Enable backfill If selected enables the back fill transmission Directory The default directory for back fill data A Caution Unless managed back fill files will accumulate ultil they fill the disk which will disable the system It is essential to configure a directory cleaner instance to manage these files see section 13 1 1 3 on page 207 for details Push The push tab contains a table within which you can configure the GDI link clients to which this transmitter should send data GDI link transmitter gdi link tx transmits samples in the native protocol of the Platinum software suite called Guralp Data Interconnect This is a low latency realtime transmission protocol which sends encoded state of health with samples Push destinations Peer name Remote host oe nea z ig serice port startup MAN EAM 0003 205 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Building Networks For each client you should set e Peer name Should match the server name configured in the client receiver at the remote end of the link Remote host The DNS name or IP address of the GDI link cli
350. which the service instance listens for incoming connections The port can be specified as either a name or a number The mapping from port names to port numbers is configured by the conventional Linux file etc services which can be edited from the command line if required 12 3 1 2 Settings tab Home Configuration Services gdi2ew 0 Earthworm sender Settings for Earthworm communication These are settings for communication with the Earthworm installation Packet size Size of the packet in seconds to use to send to Earthworm instance Send ack packets E Enable use of acknowledgement packets If unsure leave unchecked Installation id The number for the Installation id in the messages sent to Earthworm Module id The number for the Module id in the messages sent to Earthworm expects Inject SOH data E Inject SOH data into the Earthworm ring Value for the SOH message type 119 This is the value for TYPE_GCFSOH_PACKET from the earthworm config file Length of the send queue 100 This is equivalent to the SenqQueueLength from the export_ack config file Config home Help Expert submit Generated at 2013 04 16715 22 532 by GCS 2 0 11 Portions of output copyright 2013 G ralp Systems Limited Packet size This field controls the size of the data packets that are transmitted The size should be specified as a duration in seconds MAN EAM 0003 188 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Plati
351. will not require any more complex setting up than the Web configuration system can offer However in some cases you may need to take advantage of the flexibility offered by the underlying Linux operating system For more information on using and configuring the CMG DCM see the manual MAN DCM 0001 15 3 24 Channel DAS The CMG DM24S24EAM comprises an EAM interface board and 4 DM24 digitisers Originally built to process geophone signals the DAS uses a system of breakout boxes to transmit the analogue signals to the module The Pelicase and breakout boxes are shown in the images below Each of the four breakout boxes has terminal connectors for up to 6 channels and connects to the DAS using 32 pin mil spec connectors Other ports on the DAS are Data out Ethernet USB and GPS and triggering For more information on the ports see section 2 5 on page 14 The connector pinouts are the same as those for the Cylindrical Digitiser and are are given in 16 5 on page 273 and listed in the table below Section 16 5 14 on page 286 Section 16 5 2 on page 274 Ethernet Section 16 5 4 on page 276 Section 16 5 3 on page 275 Section 16 5 7 on page 279 MAN EAM 0003 258 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Technical operation The system architecture is detailed in the image below Triggering t Datap Terminale Breakout i E E E E E a E E FF Input Signal onditioner i NET _
352. with Linux text editors configuration files and sshd itself The configuration file is located at etc ssh sshd_ config and its syntax and semantics are described at http man wiki net index php 5 sshd_ config More detailed discussion is beyond the scope of this document Working with PPP PPP or Point to Point Protocol is a data link protocol that can carry IP packets over a serial link between two networking nodes It can provide connection authentication transmission encryption privacy and compression Platinum firmware includes an implementation of PPP which can be used to provide network links between sites or to connect to an Internet Service Provider ISP A number of chat scripts are provided allowing connection negotiation and establishment over PSTN GPRS and satellite modems 7 7 1 Setting up a PPP Connection To configure a PPP connection you will need a user ID and authentication code the PAP secret as required by the remote server In addition a dial up chat script specific to the service you are using must be created If one does not already exist for your service please contact Giiralp support To configure a PPP connection from the web interface select Configuration Data handling Serial ports Port Or Configuration All options Serial ports Port To configure a PPP connection from the command line start gconfig select Serial ports from the top level menu and and se
353. wo ports simultaneously with sufficient accuracy T Note For Cylindrical Digitisers Port C should be used in order to provide NMEA output to the internal digitiser module If a GPS receiver is used the Data Out Port exposed as the DATA connector can be used to provide timing to additional external digitisers 9 7 1 Configurable parameters in simple mode Port function Set to NMEA out NMEA time fixed position output Port speed Set to 4800 Click Submit to save these changes Go back to the configuration of the serial port and click on NMEA output settings You will see this screen MAN EAM 0003 125 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Digitiser Synchronisation Port C NMEA settings Latitude 0000 0000 N Device latitude Format 0000 0000 N Longitude 00000 0000 E Device longitude Format 00000 0000 E Height 00000 The device height in meters 5 digits Geoid 000 The difference between sea level and geoid height Invert PPS Whether the pulse per second signal should be inverted Here you can configure the NMEA sentences that will be sent to the digitiser You can specify the location latitude longitude elevation the geoid the offset of the location from the theoretical earth surface and whether to invert the Pulse Per Second signal if unchecked the PPS line will be briefly asserted each
354. xisting defined networks can be reconfigured by clicking on the link and new networks can be defined by clicking on the Create new network link MAN EAM 0003 76 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Networking Configuration 7 2 1 Configurable parameters in simple mode The configurable parameters for wireless networking have three tabs in simple mode Network Access Point and IP Address 7 2 1 1 Network Network interface wlanO New network definition Network description Description of the wireless network you are defining numbers letters only Network description Enter a descriptive name of the network 7 2 1 2 Access Point Network interface wlanO Access point settings Enter the access point details here If WPA v1 or v2 is used with a pre shared key set the key management entry to WPA PSK If WEP or an open access point is used set key management to None WEP keys will be used if they are present otherwise no authentication will be used A scan of the available access points shows LTRX_IBSS platinum PlatinumExternal gold BT Fusion 4057 BI BusinessHub 05 7 BTOpenzone Enter the access point name here priority 0 Select priority 0 is lowest Higher numbers are used first Key management None WEP or open network X WPA key If using WPA PSK enter the key or passphrase here WEP key 0 lf using WEP enter the first key or passphrase here WEP key 1 If u
355. y another program then formatting will fail In this case simply wait and try again in some minutes Usually you will want to select a disk under the partitioning option below This partitions and formats the disk If you know that you have other partitions on the device that you want to keep you can use the more advanced format option Select disk for partitioning The following disks are attached Pressing the Partition button will cause the selected disk to be repartitioned and then formatted This will erase any other partitions and filesystems on the disk ldev sda Pa tition Select partition for formatting The following disks have valid partition tables The partitions they contain may be formatted Select a partition and press the Format button dev sdal Format The drop down menus for device selection use the Linux device naming convention where dev sda is the first device dev sdb is the second and so on Individual partitions on devices are identified by an appended number so dev sdal is the first partition on the first device and dev sdb3 is the third partition on the second device The Partition button causes the selected device to be repartitioned with a single partition which is then reformatted If you are using a device with existing partitions that you wish to preserve you should use the Format button instead Successful completion of the format is signalled by a short on screen message T
356. ync server you should modify this file by adding an extra module in order to allow access from the acquisition devices to the mirror directory we assume that you have the knowledge to do this without further assistance This section covers setting up a new dedicated rsync server You will need to choose a TCP port number which will not conflict with another service on your network The port number should be greater than 1024 in order to avoid additional complexity Consult your network administrator for an available port or simply try 61616 and if you get an error saying that the port is in use when you attempt to start the server choose a different random number in the range 49152 65535 61616 will be used in the following example and should be replaced with the port number you have chosen or been allocated If there are firewalls between your server and the acquisition devices you will need to open channels through them for this port MAN EAM 0003 57 Issue E February 2014 Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware Platinum Firmware Upgrades You will also need to choose a module name for the server This can be any descriptive string but for simplicity it is best to stick to numbers lower case letters and hyphens The name platinum local mirror has been used in the following example and should be replaced with the module name you have chosen Create the file etc rsyncd conf with the following contents port 61616 pla

MAN-EAM-0003 - Acquisition Modules and Platinum Firmware

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents